JP2017140375A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes specific process execution means for executing a specific process based on a predetermined command when receiving a predetermined command in a first game state. The specific process execution means executes a specific process regardless of non-reception of a predetermined command when a game state is a second game state differing from a first game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production, etc. with the aim of improving the fun of games and providing more healthy games ( For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of games and providing more healthy games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Form]
In a first gaming state, when a predetermined command is received, a gaming machine comprising specific process execution means for executing a specific process based on the predetermined command,
The specific process executing means includes
In the second gaming state in which the gaming state is different from the first gaming state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received.

  According to the gaming machine of the above form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters. It is explanatory drawing shown about the success / failure table memorize | stored in the success / failure table storage area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of the process which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an suggestion effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which a pachinko machine performs in a standby state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process in case a return condition is satisfied after the volume of background music becomes zero and before display of a demo video is started. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of background music. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start port. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variation time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a condition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for standby. It is a block diagram which shows centering around the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flowchart which shows an opening effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a standby state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of a display of the symbol display apparatus at the time of performing suggestion effect in a prior | preceding game round. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the setting process of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for objects A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an arrangement | positioning / timing setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the notice effect which combined the some object. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the setting process of the production type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for BC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification effect when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for ABC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the production type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel effect performed as a reach effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process in case an RTC effect start condition is satisfied while a symbol display device is displaying a background animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process in case an RTC production start condition is satisfied while a symbol display device is displaying a demo animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when a transition condition is satisfied while a symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while a symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect animation. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RTC effects performed in the sound side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state transfer process performed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed in the display side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding | maintenance effects in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for holding | maintenance effect in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display level upper limit setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit table in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding effect content determination processing in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the table for hold | maintenance effect determination in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding | maintenance effects in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for holding | maintenance effect in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance effect setting process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding effect content determination processing in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (Another example 1) performs. This is a storage area for holding effects in the tenth embodiment (Another Example 1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 2) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 3) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 4) performs. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for the big hit lottery etc. in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st start openings in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd start openings in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for electrically-powered object open | release lottery used when performing the electrically-driven object open lottery in 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of the process which the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the result image in the symbol display apparatus of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining other examples of processing which a pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the demo image which the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment displays. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the RTC effect animation and demo animation in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for starting ports which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for through gates which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game frequency count process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the holding information shift process for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the change time for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for high probability mode completion | finish which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process for the 2nd symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information shift process for the 2nd symbol display part which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 2nd symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the change time for the 2nd symbol display part which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation stop process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the round number setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening / closing process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance counter setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening limit time setting process for special winning a prize mouth which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize opening opening / closing process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the open limit time setting process for V prize opening which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ending time setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of the ending period which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric power support which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the electric utility opening / closing process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball | bowl launch control process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram which shows centering on the electrical structure of the audio | voice light emission control apparatus and display control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special 1 game times production which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special 2 game times effect process which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for standby which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for special 1 which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for special 2 which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main demonstration transfer process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the demonstration transfer process for sub which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the reset process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RTC effects which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the result display process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the result display process which the sound light side MPU in the aspect 12 of 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the structure of the right-handed unit with which the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment is provided. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the game ball which reached the right-handed unit of the 12th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image displayed on a symbol display apparatus in high probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the remaining number of acquired balls at the time of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for display of remaining number of acquired balls which the sound light side MPU92 in 12th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for a notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D. FIG.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
A4. Overview of processing in standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth Embodiment (Example of effect type setting process):
F. Sixth Embodiment (Another example of setting process of effect type):
G. Seventh embodiment (configuration with RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. et al. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M.M. Variations:
N. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, a big win winning, a reach occurrence or the like performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting the amount of dynamic operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function for controlling the main game and a function for monitoring the power source. The main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol or an image for production.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction for launching the game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is gently inclined so that the game balls are connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a vertical position, a case rail 56 connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55 in the vertical direction, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the drawing, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first start port 33 and the second start port 34 are both opened upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first start port 33 is above the second start port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game ball can win a prize at the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when game balls win the second start port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical object opening lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the second game ball PA. It is possible to win a prize at the start port 34. In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big win lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big win is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state in which game balls can be won. The opening / closing execution mode is shifted to a case where a big win is won as a result of a big win lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the open / close door 36b is in an open state. This mode repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first start port 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as winning balls.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b includes a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the big hit lottery triggered by the winning to the first start port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays, as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display, A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  When the big hit lottery triggered by the winning at the second start port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display portion 37c and a second hold display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are put on hold. The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that are won in the second start opening 34 are put on hold. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening release lottery triggered by winning a prize to the through gate 35 is performed, the universal map unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as a display form of the light emitting display. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special map unit 37 and the universal map unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a variable winning device 36. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on the winning to the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. In addition, when the second result display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on winning in the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variation display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when a big win is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and display surfaces 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the symbols of each symbol column Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Here, the game times are one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. In any one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs a predetermined process every game. After the symbol string is variably displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG.4 (b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41, the 1st reservation display area Ds1 and the 2nd reservation display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e at various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Connected to a plurality of detection sensors. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA during the game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winnings at the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the winnings at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, The main display unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening release lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 34b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning to the first start opening 33 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning to the second starting port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the notice effect executed at each game round, etc. are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 45, the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach lottery to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is shifted and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The holding information storage area 64b includes a first holding area Ra, a second holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area. When game balls sequentially win the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of winning are time-sequentially in the hold information storage area 64b. Is remembered.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success / failure table.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode for the big hit lottery. FIG. 7A shows a success / failure table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a success / failure table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for the jackpot winning is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), under the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is 20. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball is won at the first starting port 33, and the holding information is stored at the timing when the game ball is won at the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspects of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery lottery lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes a piece. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are ten.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one opening / closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the open / close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the occurrence frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a high-probability winner table as the winner table as a mode of the jackpot lottery mode after the end of the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a low probability success / failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the winning of the jackpot lottery using the high probability success / failure table is larger than the winning of the jackpot lottery using the low probability winning / failing table. The probability of doing is high.

  The pachinko machine 10 continues to emit game balls in a similar manner to the game area PA as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination release in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode, The number of times that the electric utility item 34a is in the open state when the electrification release is won may be set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the one open time may be set longer. In addition, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the opening state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state until the next opening state is started is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric actor release lottery is performed after the first electric agent release lottery than in the low-frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second start port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the first start port 33 is higher than that at the second start port 34. However, in the high frequency support mode, the first start port 33 is connected to the second start port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning at the second starting port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. Can do.

  In addition, the configuration in which the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher frequency of being in the power release state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a winning combination winning. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of securing times to be secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency is low. It may be set so that a shorter securing time is more easily selected than the support mode or the average securing time is shortened. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode is increased by applying any one or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability Good.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of jackpot types. The jackpot type allocation destination corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the sorting table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second start port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first start port 33, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R normal A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R probability variation jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode, and the open / close execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “14 to 27” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the jackpot type. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the next highest in the 8R probability variable jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. Thus, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second start port 34, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit Is set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “28 to 39” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the jackpots based on the winnings to the second start port 34 are probable variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is based on the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the first start port 33, and the second This is different from the case where a big win is won based on the winning at the start opening 34.

  As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode between the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays the game while expecting that a winning of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 will occur at the second start port 34. In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the open / close execution mode is not shifted and neither the success / failure lottery mode nor the support mode is changed.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the segment display unit to be displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. The display mode is determined. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, and is then stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The table is checked to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when winning the jackpot and shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 is subjected to the variable display of the symbol, thereby reaching a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in a closed state.

  Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first start port 33, and the second hold area Rb. The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the table corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case a1 and the case a2 as examples.

  FIG. 9A shows, as case a1, winning a jackpot lottery in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “big jackpot”), and winning the second game round executed after the first gaming round. A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost is shown. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game time immediately before the first game time is out, and there is no other game time between the first game time and the second game time. Explain. There may be other game times between the first game time and the second game time. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. The notice effect is an effect that is executed immediately before or after the start of the change of the symbol, and is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect that is executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot notification is made as a result notification effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The special game state is a state in which a privilege is given to the player. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the opening / closing execution mode is started as an opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode that repeats opening and closing of the opening / closing door 36b. During the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, a period for executing the ending effect is referred to as an ending period.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that an effect that has already been performed is reproduced. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect having content that suggests reproducing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game round. The special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the suggestion effect, the specific end effect, and a specific start effect described later. FIG. 10A shows a suggestion effect, FIG. 10B shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10C shows a specific start effect. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect that suggests that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, that is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in the ending period, and then, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game round. Perform reproduction. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, reach effect and result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced, but the notice effect, reach effect or result executed in the first game time are reproduced. Only a part of the announcement effect may be reproduced. For example, when executing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result notification effect as a special gaming state reproduction effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice effect is omitted and executed. Also good. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are frequently executed during normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce the reach effect and the result announcement effect (the jackpot announcement) that are executed only at the time of the reach or at the time of the jackpot. It is possible to execute special game state reproduction effects by narrowing down the effects that the reproduction is strongly desired, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variation display and the stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The contents of the design are partly different.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect of content that suggests that the female character has ended the special game state reproduction effect.

  The description returns to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state when the specific end effect ends. Thereafter, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery for the second game round is out of play. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also referred to as a normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notice effect (outage notice). The case a1 has been described above.

  Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 as a case a2 when winning the big hit lottery in the first game round and winning the big hit lottery in the second game round. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the big hit lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot notification is made as a result notification effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the opening / closing execution mode is started as an opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode that repeats opening and closing of the opening / closing door 36b. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect in the ending period.

  In the case a2, unlike the case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect in the ending period. The content of the suggestion effect is the same as the content of the suggestion effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special gaming state when the suggestion effect ends. That is, the ending period in case a2 is shorter than the ending period in case a1.

  The pachinko machine 10 ends the special gaming state when the suggestion effect ends. Thereafter, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won also in the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game times reproduction effect as an effect in the second game time. The game times reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effects already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, as the game time reproduction effect, the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (a jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (bonus notification) has a function as a part of the game times reproduction effect and also has a function as a result notification about the second game number jackpot lottery. Then, the second game round ends with the end of the game round reproduction effect.

  As will be described later with reference to a flowchart, in this embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the big hit lottery is constant. That is, in the case a2, since the first game time and the second game time are game times won in the big win lottery, the first game time fluctuation time and the second game time fluctuation The time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time.

  In this embodiment, control is performed so that the variation times of the game times won in the jackpot lottery are constant, but by setting the variation times of the game times won in the jackpot lottery using random numbers. The variation time of the game times at the time of jackpot may be different every time. In this case, when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the time of the difference between the variable times of the second game time and the first game time at the start of the second game time. A suggestion effect prepared in advance may be performed using (excess time). By preparing a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each length of surplus time, even if the surplus time is different every time, the suggestion effect can be executed at the start of the second game round. The suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestion effect to be executed in the special game state after the first game. Therefore, the content of the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time is set so that the suggestion effect to be executed in the special gaming state and the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time have the continuity. Also good. By doing in this way, even when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, when the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only a part of the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect. It is good. For example, when performing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result notification effect as a game time reproduction effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game time reproduction effect. May be executed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are frequently executed during normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce the reach effect and the result announcement effect (the jackpot announcement) that are executed only at the time of the reach or at the time of the jackpot. It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that strongly desires reproduction.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the end of the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes the specific start effect in the opening effect in the special gaming state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in the special game state after the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and the special game state (open / closed due to the jackpot of the second game round) This is an effect suggesting that the execution mode) is started. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, an effect and an ending effect (normal ending effect) executed in the opening / closing execution mode are effects executed at a normal big hit. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect suggesting that the special game state is ended.

  The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described using two cases, the case a1 and the case a2. As explained in case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is off, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result announcement effect executed after the suggestion effect were executed in the first game time. It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect, and the player also recognizes that the effect is an effect that reproduces the effect that has already been executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won as in the case a2, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect which are executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game times reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 was previously viewed, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to expect that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game round, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won by the result announcement effect. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game round are not simply reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery. In this way, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2, the game is given unexpectedness and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation regarding the performance to be performed. Further, by making the second game times in the case a2 unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game times are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further given to the game.

  Further, as in the case a2, when the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game time, the result notification effect in the second game time is executed. Even if it is, the player may not notice that he has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but since the specific start effect is executed in the special gaming state after the end of the second game round. When the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made aware that the big hit lottery in the second game round has been won.

A4. Overview of processing in standby state:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state refers to a state after the game round is completed and neither the special game state nor the next game round is started.

  FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment in a standby state. 11 shows a state diagram indicating whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the symbol display device 41, and the output of the sound output from the sound emission control device 90. The contents and the audio output level (volume) are shown. Further, FIG. 11 shows the ON / OFF state of the standby state flag in the main control device 60, the ON / OFF state of the transition condition establishment flag in the main control device 60, and the cue determination flag in the sound emission control device 90. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags will be described later.

  A number such as “01” described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicates a temporal position of the moving image data, and “01” indicates a head position of the moving image data. The time position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with the time length, and it is the time position of the video when the video data is captured by the time length. This is the position of the corresponding video data. As the time position of the moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the time position “30”, the moving image data returns to the time position “01” again and is displayed from the top.

  A number such as “01” described in the audio output contents indicates a temporal position of the music data, and “01” indicates a head position of the music data. The time position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the time length, and is the time position of the music when the music data is captured by the time length. The position of the corresponding music data. For example, a time code recorded in the music data can be used as the time position of the music data. In this embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output up to the time position “30”, it returns to the time position “01” again and is output from the beginning.

  The display control device 100 displays the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 in the game times in which the display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and also displays the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 in the standby state after the game times are ended. Is displayed continuously. The background moving image is a moving image that is displayed on the background side of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. When an image or a moving image such as the above-described notice effect or reach effect is displayed, the background moving image is displayed on the background side of the image or moving image. Is displayed. The background moving image of the present embodiment is a moving image in which characters are dancing in accordance with the rhythm of background music described later.

  The sound emission control device 90 outputs background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the background moving image described above in the game round from the speaker 46 and also from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game round ends. Is output continuously. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background moving image, and has the same time length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the background music at the time position “10” is output at the timing when the background video at the time position “10” is displayed, thereby displaying the background video and the rhythm of the background music. An effect corresponding to one-to-one is realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, main control device 60 turns on the standby state flag (time t1) when the game round ends, that is, when the variation of symbols on main display unit 45 stops. Then, after 15 seconds have elapsed since neither the special gaming state nor the next game round is started after the main control device 60 has stopped changing the symbols on the main display unit 45 and has entered the standby state. That is, when 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag is turned ON, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned ON, and the standby state flag is turned OFF (time t2).

  The transition condition is that the voice output mode is shifted from a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player to a mode in which the volume of background music is zero (silenced state). The display mode is a condition for shifting from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the audio output mode shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is cut off, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background video is cut off. . The demonstration video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video, and is a video for conveying the charm of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demo video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the game method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and characters and stories appearing in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. The demo video is sometimes called an attract video.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 changes the sound output mode to a background music output at a volume set in advance by the player (time t2). From the above aspect), the background music volume is reduced to zero (the aspect from time t2 to time t3) after the background music output is continued and the volume of the background music is reduced (fade out) over time. It shifts to a certain mode (mode after time t3). In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues to output the background music itself until 5 seconds have elapsed after the background music volume becomes zero, and after the background music volume becomes zero. At the timing (time t4) when 5 seconds have passed, the output of background music is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume set in advance by the game ball is the maximum volume.

  When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 shifts the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode of displaying a demo video after 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume of the background music has become zero (time) t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration video is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start display and output of the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position “01” when a return condition described later is satisfied. is there. In the present embodiment, the cueing determination flag is a mode in which the audio output mode is shifted to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is cut off, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode in which the continuity of the background video is cut off It is turned ON when it shifts to.

  If the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 after the transition condition is established and the game turn (design variation display) is started, the main control device 60 sets the return condition. It is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. The return condition is to return the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode of displaying a background video, and to return the audio output mode to a mode of outputting background music at a volume set in advance by the player. It is a condition.

  As shown in FIG. 11, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demo video is started (time t5), the cue determination flag is set. Is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute the cueing processing of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control apparatus 100 starts display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. The sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to a volume set in advance by the player, and outputs the background music from the temporal start position “01” of the background music when outputting the background music. To start. Therefore, display and output of both the background moving image and the background music are started from the temporal start position.

  The sound emission control device 90 is capable of outputting a plurality of types of background music, and cues for background music and background moving images (processing for starting music output or moving image display from a temporal start position “01” ), The type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control apparatus 100 displays a plurality of types of background videos corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. It is also possible to select a background moving image that can be displayed and corresponds to the selected background music and execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow a player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started (time t4), the cueing determination flag is set. Is OFF, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. Execute. In this way, the display mode and the sound output mode of the symbol display device 41 are restored to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cue determination flag is OFF, so the display control device 100 displays the background on the symbol display device 41. The mode in which the moving image is displayed is continued, and the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to a volume set in advance by the player. In this way, the display mode and the sound output mode of the symbol display device 41 are restored to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume becomes zero and the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 11). The display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. And when the display control apparatus 100 displays a background moving image on the symbol display apparatus 41, the display control apparatus 100 starts a display from the predetermined temporal position of the said background moving image. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for returning the volume of the background music to a volume set in advance by the player, and outputs the background music from a predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video is started varies depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started, the demo video is displayed. When returning to the mode of displaying the background video from the configuration of starting the display of the background video from the temporal position of the background video displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the display mode or the mode of displaying the demo video , A configuration in which the temporal position of the background video to start display is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode of displaying the demo video, after the transition from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video In addition to continuing the playback of the background video as an internal process, it also continues as an internal process when returning from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video Configuration, and the like to display the background video that is playing Te.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position “01” of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which display starts from a position in the middle of the background moving image and output starts from a position in the middle of the background music in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the background video and output is started from the position in the middle of the background music, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background video and the background music are to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or that there is a part of the background video and the background music that is not being viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the user can appreciate all of the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the background music volume is reduced to zero and when the return condition is satisfied before the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is established without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the background music volume is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. The sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode with a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapses without starting either the special game state or the next game round. The volume of background music can be reduced over time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game turn is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background video, and the audio Since the output mode returns to a mode in which background music is output at a volume set in advance by the player, it is possible to improve the expectation that the game turn has started, and to improve the interest of the game.

A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  In order to advance the game of each game time, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, a winning process for the starting port accompanying winning in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the start opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing Step S104, the process proceeds to Step S105.

  In step S105, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for start-up>
Next, the winning process for the start opening will be described. The winning process for the start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S104).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the start opening. In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 33 (start winning prize). If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first start opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reservation number RaN indicates the number of reservations based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first start port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205 to determine whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 34. 2 Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second start port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the starting process for the starting port is terminated.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, a start hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as a second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N of start suspensions (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the number N of starting suspension is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S209, when the number N of starting suspension is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, 1 is added to the number of starting suspension N in the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step S211. 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total reserved number CRN indicates the total value of the first start reserved number RaN and the second start reserved number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, ie, step In S210, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are as follows: The first storage area in the free storage area of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing Step S212, the process proceeds to Step S213.

  In step S213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which the determination as to the presence / absence or the like is executed before the hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step S213, the process proceeds to Step S214.

  In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

  The hold command indicates that the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has been won and the determination result by the pre-determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the win, the hold information is the main control device. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm before being a target of the big hit lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of a normal process described later.

  In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning at the second start port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the start port.

<Determination processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for a winning process for the start opening (FIG. 15: S213).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the pre-determination process is based on the hold information, and the determination results such as whether or not the jackpot lottery is determined, whether the jackpot type is determined, whether or not the reach has occurred, This process is executed before the lottery target.

  In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning at the starting port in the starting port winning process (FIG. 15) is read. Then, it progresses to step S302 and determines the lottery mode in the time of the jackpot lottery by this prize-winning being performed as a game time. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-determination process executed by the winning prior to the current winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the big winning lottery by the current winning. Thus, the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by the current winning is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current winning is executed as a game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the success / failure table storage area Reference is made to the success / failure table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, where it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current winning is executed as the game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success / failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, where it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and is stored in the storage area by winning at the current start port. The value of the big hit type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 that has been distributed this time is acquired based on a winning to the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table is referred to, If it is acquired based on a winning at the second start port 34, the second start port distribution table is referred to. After executing Step S307, the process proceeds to Step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and is stored in the storage area by winning at the current start port. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  If it is determined in step S313 that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (S313: NO), the destination determination process is terminated as it is.

<Winning winning process>
Next, a through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S105).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a through winning process. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the reserve item number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether. Note that the accessory reserve number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory release lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the through winning process is terminated.

  In step S402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory reserve number SN (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403, and 1 is added to the accessory reserve number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64. Then, the through winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S402 that the value of the reserved item SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the reserved item SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, The through winning prize process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demonstration video for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, output data such as a startup command set in step S502, a command set in timer interruption processing or normal processing executed last time, and the like are transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S503, the process proceeds to Step S504.

  In step S504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S506, the process proceeds to Step S507.

  In step S507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S <b> 508, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided at the second start port 34 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time, a standby process is executed to cause each control device on the sub side to start a demonstration video. Details of the waiting process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In step S510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. In step S510, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal process this time (S510: NO), in step S511 and step S512, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and the processes from step S503 to step S508 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S503 to step 507 changes according to the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned off when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period.

  If it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special gaming state, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps is performed. The game times control process is terminated without executing any of them. In other words, in the special game state, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the game is not in the special gaming state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is in a variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when the variable display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is finished.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to a game turn starting process in steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the total reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved number is “0” for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S603: YES), this game number control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S605, a change start process for starting change display on the main display unit 45 and change display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the variation start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing Step S606, the process proceeds to Step S607.

  In step S607, the standby state flag is turned OFF. The standby state flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the standby state is started, and is turned OFF when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 or when the standby state is started. is there. After executing Step S607, the process proceeds to Step S608.

  In step S608, it is determined whether the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON. The transition condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is turned ON when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state, and turned OFF when the fluctuation display of the main display unit 45 is started. If it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition establishment flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game times control process is terminated.

  In step S609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that the variable display on the main display unit 45 is started, that is, that the return condition is satisfied. After executing Step S609, the process proceeds to Step S610.

  In step S610, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display (S602: YES), the game turn progression processing in steps S611 to S615 is executed.

  In step S611, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol sequence starts to vary until all the symbol sequences are stopped, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in a variation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set variation time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612, and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S612, the game times control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613, and the variation end process is executed. In the variation end process, the result display unit is displayed in such a manner that the pattern displayed on the result display unit determined in the later-described variation start process (FIG. 21) is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Control display. After executing Step S613, the process proceeds to Step S614.

  In step S614, the standby state flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S615 and performs standby state time setting processing. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game times control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 19: S604).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the reserved area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first reserved area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6), the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored first in the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb). If it is stored in the holding area prior to the holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored first in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) is stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series more than the hold information stored first. When the hold information stored first in the hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing in step S701, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the processing target reserved area is the first reserved area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first reserved area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO) ), The data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

  In step S702, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step S703, where 1 is subtracted from the total hold number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S705, the process proceeds to Step S706.

  In step S706, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, that is, the first start port 33. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold to the display control device 100. To do. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  In step S701, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO), The process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, 1 is subtracted from the second start reserved number RbN of the second reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN, the process proceeds to step S710, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S711, the process proceeds to Step S712.

  In step S712, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, the second start port 34. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 gives the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 19: S605).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. After that, it is turned OFF when a normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S801 that the mode is the high probability mode (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the low probability mode winning / failing table shown in FIG. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S802 or step S803 is a jackpot winning. In step S804, when the result of the determination of whether or not the game is won is a big win (S804: YES), in step S805 to step S812, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win is set and a stop result are set. Execute the process.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806, and the first start port allocation table (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. To make a distribution decision. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range per 16R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 8R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 16R normal jackpot, or a numerical range per 8R normal jackpot Is included.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Referring to, perform the distribution determination. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range per 16R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 8R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 16R normal jackpot, or a numerical range per 8R normal jackpot Is included. After executing the process of step S806 or step S807. The process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probable jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probable big hit (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, a stop result setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is a variation in the state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round that will be won for the probability variation jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the probability variation jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S809, the process proceeds to Step S810.

  In step S810, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 (big jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON when it is a 16R probability variation big hit, and the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON when it is an 8R probability variation big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S808, if it is determined that the jackpot type assigned in step S806 or step S807 is not a probable jackpot (S808: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, step S811 is entered. move on.

  In step S811, a normal big hit stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for normal jackpots varies in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S811, the process proceeds to Step S812.

  In step S812, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 (big jack type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON when it is a 16R normal big hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON when it is an 8R normal big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S804, when the result of the jackpot lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a jackpot winning prize (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and a stop result setting process for losing is executed. The stop result setting process at the time of detachment is to end the variable display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round that becomes a detachment result. This is a process for setting. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for outage in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S813, the process proceeds to Step S814.

  In step S814, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set a variable time that is a time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b based on whether or not a big hit or a reach has occurred. It is processing of. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S814, the process proceeds to Step S815.

  In step S815, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816, and the first variation command is set. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time relates to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the first start port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And information on the variation time set in step S814. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817, and the second variation command is set. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the second start port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And information on the variation time set in step S814. After executing Step S816 or Step S817, the process proceeds to Step S818.

  In step S818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R ordinary jackpot information, or outage result information as jackpot type information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). Based on the received change command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S818, the process proceeds to Step S819.

  In step S819, the variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 21: S814).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variation time. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If any flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, referring to the big hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S902 that the big win lottery relating to the current game round is not a win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not won in step S902, a reach occurs in the game rounds that are not won the jackpot lottery in step S905. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach has occurred (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the occurrence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3 is specified.

  In step S906, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S905 that no reach occurs in the current game round (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the change time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the change time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the total number of reservations CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total reserved number CRN may be used. The smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant number without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach is not generated so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Further, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation time table for normal jackpot, a variation time table for outreach and a variation time table for complete losing may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 18: S507).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. As described with reference to FIG. 9, the ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the special game state.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  In Step S1003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to Step S1004, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not. In step S1004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is finished (S1004: NO), the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that it is the timing when the variable display is finished (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of this game (the result of the big hit lottery) is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag In step S1007, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing Step S1008, the process proceeds to Step S1009.

  In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010, and the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013, a round display start process is performed to notify the type of the current opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Check. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S1013, the process proceeds to Step S1014.

  In step S1014, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the big hit type flag (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed. If it is determined in step S1014 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is a 16R probability change flag or a 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015 and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1014 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R probability variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016 and is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “8” is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing Step S1015 or Step S1016, the process proceeds to Step S1017.

  In step S1017, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018, and a special prize opening opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize winning opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 36c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big prize opening 36a is being opened, the variable prize driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S1018, the process proceeds to Step S1019.

  In step S1019, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1019: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S1020, the process proceeds to Step S1021.

  In step S1021, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S1021, the process proceeds to Step S1022.

  In step S1022, a condition determination process is executed. The condition determination process is a process for determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery at the next game round, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period, and the effect (notification effect, reach production and It is determined whether or not to perform a process of reproducing the result notification effect (big hit notification). The condition determination process will be described later. After executing Step S1022, the process proceeds to Step S1023.

  In step S1023, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1023, the process proceeds to Step S1024.

  In step S1024, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S1024, the process proceeds to Step S1025.

  In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

  In step S1026, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in an ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. If it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

  In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1028 to execute a transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step S1028, the process proceeds to Step S1029.

  In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S1030 and performs standby state time setting processing. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing Step S1030, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S1026: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: 1017) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1102: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1103: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable prize driving unit is opened to open the big prize opening 36a. Let 36c be a driving state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since all the winning modes that are set are the high-frequency winning modes, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 36 a, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64 d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. If the low-frequency winning mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and “6” is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing Step S1105, the process proceeds to Step S1106.

  In step S1106, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the sub-side control devices to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received release command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the display contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the large winning opening 36a has been opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not “0” (S1110: NO), the large winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1107: YES), or when the value of the winning counter area PC is determined to be “0” in step S1110 (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1113, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1113: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1113: NO), “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process proceeds to step S1115 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special prize opening / closing process is terminated.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 which are the control devices on the sub side to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. In the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503), the sound is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the one-round large winning opening 36a has been completed, and the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and the effect on the symbol display device 41 is ended with the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Condition judgment process>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1022) of the game state transition process.

  As described above, the condition determination process is a process for determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. The condition for enabling the processing of case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first game time and to win the jackpot lottery in the second game time. This condition determination process is a process that is executed immediately before the end of the opening / closing execution mode after winning the jackpot lottery at the game time, and determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is won at the next game time.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the condition determination process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the hold number CRN> 0. By executing this process, when executing the special game state after the first game time, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game time immediately after the special game state. When there is no game time, there is no game time corresponding to the second game time in which the game time reproduction effect can be executed immediately after the suggestion effect, and the execution of the processing of case a2 becomes impossible. .

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the reserved number CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the reserved number CRN> 0 is not satisfied (S1201: NO), the condition determination process is terminated as it is.

  In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game time is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by reading the start opening in the start opening winning process (FIG. 15) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery relating to the next game round is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204, and the low probability mode success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the success / failure table for the high probability mode stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect overlap avoidance flag further reproduces the game time reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. This flag is used to prevent execution. If it is determined in step S1207 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. Thereafter, the condition determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined in step S1207 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON. If this is the case (S1207: YES), this condition determination process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1023) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, “3000” (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 which is a timer of the ending time. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, 6 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the suggestion effect. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, the effect overlap avoidance flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, “15000” (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game in the case a1 of FIG. In case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time required for executing the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In this embodiment, the time required for the suggestion effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1307, and an effect overlap avoidance command is set. The effect overlap avoidance command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON. The effect overlap avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). After executing Step S1307, the process proceeds to Step S1308.

  In step S1308, “4000” (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds are secured as the ending time required for executing the normal ending effect.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1028).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type flag is turned on in the RAM 64. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402, and flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing Step S1402, the process proceeds to Step S1403.

  In step S1403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S1404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game state is shifted to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1407, and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1409, where 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric utility support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 18: S508).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the electrified object opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened is turned ON, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1503: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505, and after setting the out-of-display, the main role support process is terminated. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reservation number SN is larger than “0”. If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S1506: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1508 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S1507 (S1507: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509, and the electric utility article opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric charge holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric charge release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric charge release lottery is performed. Winning. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1509 is support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electrical equipment release lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter 64 is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1512 that the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1512: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is.

  In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S1513 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S1513: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1513 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process advances to step S1514 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516, and the electric-powered object opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric charge holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric charge release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric charge release lottery is performed. Winning. At the same time as the lottery for the opening of the electric accessory, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1517.

  In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1516 is a support win. If it is determined in step S1517 that the support is not won (S1517: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1517 that the support win is selected (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, the support win flag is turned ON, and “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the main power support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1519, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1519: NO), since the variation display of the picture in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main character support process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

  In step S1520, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1521, where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1522, and the electric combination opening / closing control process for opening / closing the electric combination 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electric power switch control processing>
Next, the electric role opening / closing control process will be described. The electric utility opening / closing control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of electric utility support processing (FIG. 28: S1522).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electrical combination opening / closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1602: NO), the main utility opening / closing control process is terminated. In other words, when the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric switch opening / closing control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 34a is “0”, the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S1603, the process proceeds to Step S1604.

  In step S1604, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1605, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1605: NO), the main role opening / closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1607: NO), the main utility opening / closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state is executed. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S1609: NO), the process proceeds to step S1610, and it is determined whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611, and “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S1609: YES), or if it is determined in step S1610 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612, and the second “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

<Processing for standby>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 18: S509).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the standby process. In step S1701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), this standby process is terminated.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0. If the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Is determined. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby flag is turned ON, the process proceeds to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the standby process is terminated.

  In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1704, where the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1705, and a transition condition satisfaction command is set. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state, that is, the transition condition is satisfied. After executing step S1705, the standby process is terminated.

A6. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram illustrating mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, an effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step S1801, the process proceeds to Step S1802.

  In step S1802, a command handling process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command response processing will be described later. After executing Step S1802, the process proceeds to Step S1803.

  In step S1803, standby state transition processing for reducing the audio output level (volume) in the standby state or starting a demo video is executed. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing Step S1803, the process proceeds to Step S1804.

  In step S1804, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process in step S1802. After executing Step S1804, the process proceeds to Step S1805.

  In step S1805, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process in step S1802. After executing step S1805, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command processing>
Next, command response processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1802).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command response processing. As described above, in the command handling process, a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether a startup command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1901 that a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1902, and startup command response processing is executed. Details of the startup command response processing will be described later. After executing step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1903 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process advances to step S1904 to execute a hold command response process. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S1904, the process proceeds to Step S1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing step S1904.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1905 that a variation command and a type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1906, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, etc. to be executed in the current game round are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1906, the process proceeds to Step S1907.

  In step S1907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the process advances to step S1908 to execute an opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type are set, and information corresponding to the contents of the effect is set An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, an opening / closing execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode are set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After executing Step S1909, the process proceeds to Step S1910.

  If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

  In step S1910, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1910 that a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 is stored. Set the side condition satisfaction flag to ON. After executing Step S1911, the process proceeds to Step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether an effect overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1912 that an effect overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the process proceeds to step S1913, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 is stored. Set the light side effect overlap flag to ON. After executing Step S1913, the process proceeds to Step S1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that an effect overlap avoidance command has not been received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether an ending command is received. If it is determined in step S1914 that an ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915 to execute an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect in the ending period is set based on the information related to the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON / OFF information of the sound side condition establishment flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1915, the process proceeds to Step S1920.

  If it is determined in step S1914 that an ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

  In step S1916, it is determined whether a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917, and the volume reduction flag is turned ON. The sound volume reduction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned ON at the timing when the process of reducing the sound output level (volume) is started, and at the time when the sound output level (volume) becomes zero. This flag is turned off. After executing Step S1917, the process proceeds to Step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

  In step S1918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1918 that a return condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919, and the return condition establishment flag is turned ON. The return condition establishment flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned ON when starting the process of returning the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demo video, and the audio output level ( This is a flag that is turned off when the (volume) is restored and the demo video ends. After executing Step S1919, the process proceeds to Step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

  In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the production contents corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the open command, and the close command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the command handling process is terminated.

<Startup command support processing>
Next, startup command response processing will be described. The startup command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command response process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1902).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing start command response processing. As described above, the startup command handling process is a process executed when a startup command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the startup command response process will be described.

  In step S2001, a demo video start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The demo video start command is a command for causing the display side MPU 102 to start displaying the demo video. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S2001, the process proceeds to Step S2002.

  In step S2002, the demonstration moving image display flag is turned ON. The demonstration video display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration video is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is turned on when the display of the demonstration video is started, and is turned off when the display of the demonstration video is finished. It is a flag to be set. After executing Step S2002, the process proceeds to Step S2003.

  In step S2003, the cueing determination flag is turned ON. As described above, the cueing determination flag starts output and display from the temporal start positions of the background music and the background video when the return condition is satisfied and the display of the background music and the background video is started. It is a flag for determining whether or not. If the cue detection flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when the background music output and background video display start, the output and display start from the temporal start position of the background music and background video. To do. After executing step S2003, the startup command response process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1904).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S2101, an update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning a prize, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the win to the second start port 34, and these hold A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 is also referred to as “first hold number”, and the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the second start port 34 is referred to as “first hold number”. Also referred to as “second reserved number”, the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing Step S2101, the process proceeds to Step S2102.

  In step S2102, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 identified in step S2101 and the number of hold information acquired based on the win to the second start port 34 Based on the above, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) is controlled by the first hold display unit 37c and the second hold display unit 37d. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process is terminated.

<Renewal process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning a prize will be described. The update process at the time of winning a prize is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the pending command handling process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning a prize. In step S <b> 2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the sound light Update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33. In the update process of the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the number of held items included in the held command that has been read this time. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command to be read this time has not been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that it is transmitted based on the winning to 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the second reserved number counter area update process provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound side RAM 94 is executed. . The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second start port 34. In the update process of the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the reserved number included in the command to be read this time. After executing Step S2203, the process proceeds to Step S2204.

  The reason why the processes in steps S2202 and S2203 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not. For this reason, when the power supply is shut off in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 stores the hold information. While stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if the configuration in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up every time the hold command is received in the sound emission control device 90 is adopted, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold memory. Inconvenience may occur that the number of held information and the number of held information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of hold, and the voice light emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  In step S2204, update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number-of-holds counter area is the sum of the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the first start port 33 and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the second start port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information on the total reserved number counter area is the sum information of the reserved number information measured in the first reserved number counter area and the reserved number information measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of final winning is terminated.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 33: S1906).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect executed in the current game round. . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence / absence of jackpot, jackpot type, presence / absence of reach, and fluctuation time information are read. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the sound side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2303, effect type setting processing is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game times. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing Step S2303, the process proceeds to Step S2304.

  In step S2304, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the big win lottery of this game round is 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit, 16R normal big hit, or 8R normal big hit, the same symbol on the active line L Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as information on the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same An even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big hit lottery for the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the contents of the change command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L and corresponds to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established on the effective line L. Corresponding information is set as information on the current stop symbol. After executing Step S2304, the process proceeds to Step S2305.

  In step S2305, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game time is identified from the contents of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol identified in step S2304 above. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2306.

  In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is won. Specifically, the presence / absence of a jackpot is determined based on the received variation command. If it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process in step S2303 are stored. This process is performed in order to reproduce the effects in the game times won in the big hit lottery. After executing Step S2307, the process proceeds to Step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the big hit lottery relating to the current game round is not won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312, without executing step S2307.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S2308, information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process relating to the previous game round is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, an effect type setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, an effect having the same content as the effect executed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2310.

  In step S2310, stop symbol setting processing is executed based on the information of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, a stop symbol having the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2311, the variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, a variation display pattern having the same content as the variation display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312.

  In step S2312, information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2313, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received effect command. After executing step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314, and after performing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting process is terminated. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update process at the start of change>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2314).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S2401: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2402, and the first reserved number counter stored in the sound side RAM 94 is set. Subtract 1 Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the change command received this time is not the first change command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the second reserved number stored in the sound side RAM 94 is stored. Subtract 1 from the counter. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of a command response process (FIG. 33: S1908).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In this embodiment, as described in case a2 of FIG. 9, an opening effect that is executed only in a special case is prepared as the opening effect in the special gaming state, such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10C). doing. In step S2502, a start effect (normal start effect) to be executed except for a special case such as case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504, and the sound side condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505, an opening effect command is transmitted to display side MPU102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received opening effect command. After executing step S2505, the opening effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for command processing (FIG. 33: S1915).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the sound light side effect duplication flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound side effect overlap flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603. In other words, if it is determined that the effects corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game in the case a1 of FIG. 9 (the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect) are to be executed, step S2603 is performed. move on.

  In step S2603, information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a special gaming state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, an effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game in the case a1 in FIG. 9 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the sound-light-side condition establishment flag is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. That is, if it is determined that an effect (suggested effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game in case a2 of FIG. 9 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2606, the suggestion effect is set as the ending effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound side effect overlap flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, if it is determined that an effect corresponding to the ending period (normal ending effect) in the special game state after the second game operation in case a2 of FIG. 9 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

  In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect suggesting that the special gaming state is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2608.

  In step S2608, the sound side effect duplication flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

  In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2605, step S2606, or step S2607 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command. After executing step S2609, the ending effect setting process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game time are shown as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609. When the sound emission control device 90 stores the information and executes the special game state reproduction effect, the command indicating the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round is a part of the ending command. Is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, thereby causing the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating an effect type, a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern executed in the first game round as a part of the ending command, the MPU 102 receives the command. A pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written to the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at the image update timing in the case of displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game play effect on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the current game effect is defined.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads out an information group corresponding to each frame and instructs the VDP 105 to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 in accordance with a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41 a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially gives drawing instructions to the VDP 105 for the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, so that the effect type and stop symbol executed in the first game round are displayed. The variable display pattern can be executed as a special gaming state reproduction effect.

  In the present embodiment, a special gaming state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above-described processing. In addition, in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, other processing is performed as the special gaming state reproduction effect. You may employ | adopt the process of. For example, instead of the process of storing the information indicating the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the audio emission control device 90 as in the present embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 displays the information. A command instructing to temporarily store the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time is transmitted to the control device 100. In accordance with the command, the display control apparatus 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game round.

  Thereafter, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, the sound emission control device 90 outputs a command indicating that a drawing instruction is to be given to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table to the display control device 100. . The display control apparatus 100 can execute a special gaming state reproduction effect by giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored pattern data table according to the command. As described above, various processes can be employed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special gaming state reproduction effect.

<Standby state transition processing>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 32: S1803).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition process. In step S2701, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S2702: YES), the standby state transition process is terminated.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start wait flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the period is waiting for the start of the demo video, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag that is turned OFF at the timing when 5 seconds have passed without the return condition being satisfied after the sound output level (volume) becomes zero. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo video start wait flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the process proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), the standby state transition process is terminated.

  In step S2705, processing for reducing the output level (volume) of the sound is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set at 3000 levels, and processing for lowering the audio output level by 1 level is executed. In this embodiment, since the standby state transition process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec, the audio output level (volume) becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing Step S2705, the process proceeds to Step S2706.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S2706 that the output level (volume) of the audio has become zero (S2706: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707, the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2708 to wait for the demonstration video to start. Turn on the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), the standby state transition process is terminated.

  In step S2709, a demonstration moving image start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, “2500” (that is, 5.0 sec) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the sound output level (volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. The After executing step S2709, the standby state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo video start wait flag is ON (S2703: YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

  In step S2710, it is determined whether the 5-second demonstration video start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo video start wait timer counter Tx is 0. If the value of the demo video start wait timer counter Tx is 0, the 5-second demo video start wait period ends. It is determined that If it is determined in step S2710 that the demo video start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the demo video start waiting period has not ended, the standby state transition process ends.

  In step S2711, background music output stop processing is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2712, and a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S2712, the process proceeds to Step S2713.

  In step S2713, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2714, where the demonstration moving image display flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2715, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and the standby state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S2701: YES), the process proceeds to step S2716, and it is determined whether the cueing determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the cueing determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the process proceeds to step S2717, and the sound output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing Step S2717, the process proceeds to Step S2718.

  In step S2718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2719, and the volume reduction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), the process proceeds to step S2720 without executing step S2719.

  In step S2720, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demo video start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the process proceeds to step S2721, and the demo video start wait flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2722, and the return condition establishment flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration video start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition establishment flag is turned OFF. After executing step S2722, the standby state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2716 that the cueing determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the process proceeds to step S2723, and a demo video end command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video end command executes a process for ending the display of the demo video. After executing step S2723, the process proceeds to step S2724, and the demonstration moving image display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2725.

  In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2726.

  In step S2726, the audio output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing Step S2726, the process proceeds to Step S2727.

  In step S2727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cueing determination flag is ON, output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2728, and the cueing determination flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2729, the return condition establishment flag is turned OFF, and the standby state transition process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2802.

  In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S3001, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 43) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S3001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp effects such as a notice effect and a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display an effect image corresponding to the effect. Image rendering can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41. Details of the command response processing will be described later.

  In step S3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command handling process (S3001) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3002), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task processing (S3003) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

<Command processing>
Next, command response processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 as a subroutine for the V interrupt process (FIG. 44: S3001).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing command response processing. In step S 3101, it is determined whether or not an effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3101 that an effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102 and an effect display start process corresponding to the effect command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

  In step S3103, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3103 that an opening effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104, and an opening effect display start process corresponding to the opening effect command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, after the opening effect is completed, image drawing and display control is started so that the opening / closing execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3104, the process proceeds to Step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3106, and the ending effect display start process corresponding to the ending effect command is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3106, the process proceeds to Step S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

  In step S3107, it is determined whether or not a demo moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demo video start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute display processing of the demo video. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the demo video specified by the demo video start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demo video is repeated until a demo video end command to be described later is received. After executing Step S3108, the process proceeds to Step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demo video start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

  In step S3109, it is determined whether or not a demo video end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that a demo video end command is stored, the process advances to step S3110 to execute processing for ending the display of the demo video. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demo video end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

  In step S <b> 3111, it is determined whether a background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that a background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After executing Step S3112, the process proceeds to Step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

  In step S3113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-described production operation command is stored, the process in the case where the above-described production operation command is stored is executed. Thereafter, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is out as in the case a1, the notice effect and the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect The result announcement effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, and the player recognizes that the effect is already reproduced. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won as in the case a2, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect which are executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game times reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 was previously viewed, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to expect that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game round, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won by the result announcement effect. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game round are not simply reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery. In this way, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2, the game is given unexpectedness and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation regarding the performance to be performed. Further, by making the second game times in the case a2 unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game times are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further given to the game.

  In addition, in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the reach effect that is executed after the suggestion effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed. Is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, as a case where a reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player an expectation degree regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, a case where it is executed as a reproduction of an already executed effect, Although it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect, in practice, at least three cases are set, which are executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. And when the display control apparatus 100 displays a background moving image on the symbol display apparatus 41, the display control apparatus 100 starts a display from the predetermined temporal position of the said background moving image. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 performs processing for returning the volume of the background music to a volume set in advance by the player, and outputs the background music from a predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position “01” of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which display starts from a position in the middle of the background moving image and output starts from a position in the middle of the background music in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the background video and output is started from the position in the middle of the background music, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background video and the background music are to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or that there is a part of the background video and the background music that is not being viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the user can appreciate all of the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the background music volume is reduced to zero and when the return condition is satisfied before the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is established without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the background music volume is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. The sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to a volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode with a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapses without starting either the special game state or the next game round. The volume of background music can be reduced over time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game turn is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background video, and the background music is displayed. Since the mode of outputting returns to the mode of outputting background music at a volume set in advance by the player, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the game has started and to improve the interest of the game.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round, and the first game round The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game time and the second game time are continuous has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as the case b1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round. A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game time (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game time) between one game time and the second game time will be described. The jackpot lottery in the preceding game round is out of play.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the big hit lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot notification is made as a result notification effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect suggests the opening of the special game state (normal opening effect), and the ending effect indicates the end of the special game state. Perform an ending effect (normal ending effect). That is, unlike the case a2 in FIG. 9B, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect in the special game state.

  When the special game state ends, the preceding game times are executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round. As shown in the figure, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, symbol variation display and stop display are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol change display is executed during the change time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, the suggestion effect is executed in the display area 41aL. Thus, by displaying the symbol variation display and the stop display in a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without causing the player to feel uncomfortable in the preceding game round. Further, the symbol variation display and the stop display may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the symbol variation display and the stop display may be blinked and lit. . Even in this way, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity in the preceding game round.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time after executing the preceding game time. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 in FIG. 46A, the big win lottery is won also in the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time as an effect in the second game time. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (a jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (bonus notification) has a function as a part of the game times reproduction effect and also has a function as a result notification about the second game number jackpot lottery. Then, the second game round ends with the end of the game round reproduction effect.

  Since the big game lottery is won in the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the end of the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes the specific start effect in the opening effect in the special gaming state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in the special game state after the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  The second embodiment can be realized, for example, by the following process.

  When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, similar to the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307), the effect executed in the first game round (in this embodiment, a notice is given) Production, reach production and result announcement production). Note that the stored content is not limited to the performance itself executed in the first game round, but may be other information as long as it is information that can specify the performance executed in the first game round. That is, effects executed in the first game times, such as information indicating the type (pattern) of effects executed in the first game times, and address information of a memory storing the effects executed in the first game times Any information can be used if it can be called again.

  After storing the effect executed in the first game time, the game time (second game time) that is executed after the first game time and wins the big hit lottery is determined by the first determination process. Then, the stored notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, by setting the game times that have been won in the jackpot lottery so that the variation time is the same, the reach effect and the result notification effect that were executed in the first game time can be It can be executed within the variation time in the game times.

  In addition, when the preceding game times exist between the first game times and the second game times, the present embodiment is realized by executing the suggestion effect according to the variation time of each preceding game times. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, an suggestive effect corresponding to each variation time may be executed in each preceding game time, for example, the preceding game times executed immediately before the second game time. The suggestion effect may be executed only at the other game times, and the normal effect may be executed at other preceding game times.

  In addition, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and if there are a plurality of preceding game times continuously between the first game time and the second game time, You may set the upper limit of the number of game times permitted as a preceding game time between 2nd game times.

  FIG. 46B is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when there are a plurality of preceding game times continuously between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, in the case where there are 5 or less preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big win lottery is out after winning the big win lottery in the first game round (FIG. 46 (b )) After that, in the second game round winning the jackpot lottery, a game round reproduction effect that reproduces the performance performed in the first game round is executed, and there are 6 or more preceding game rounds. (Not shown in the figure), the game times reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game time after which the big hit lottery is won. As the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, similar to the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307), the effect executed in the first game round (this embodiment) , The notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect) are stored in the sound side RAM 94.

  In addition, when providing a preceding game number counter that counts the number of preceding game times between the first game number and the second game number, and determining the effect of the second game number to win the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game times counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, an effect executed in the first game time is read from the sound side RAM 94 and the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. When the reproduction effect is executed and the counter value is 6 or more, the normal big hit effect is executed in the second game round. In this way, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. The suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round. More specifically, the preceding game times immediately before the second game time are specified by the first determination process, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times. Then, at the timing when the variation time of the preceding game number is determined, the suggestion effect corresponding to the variation time of the preceding game number is selected and executed. By doing in this way, even if a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed. it can. In this description, among the preceding game times after the first game time won in the jackpot lottery, when there are more than six preceding game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is outside Then, the game number reproduction effect is not executed in the second game number that is won in the jackpot lottery, but the number of preceding game times (threshold value) determined not to execute the game number reproduction effect is limited to six. It can be set to any number.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, By executing the suggestion effect at the time, the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. In addition, even if there are a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) between the first game time and the second game time, a suggestion effect according to the variation time of each preceding game time is provided. By executing it, it is possible to execute the game times reproduction effect in the second game time without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart for explaining processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time (FIG. 48: first preceding game time) is reproduced. In addition, a case will be described in which at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. In the present description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case c1 and the case c2 as examples.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows a case in which, as a case c1, a win-win lottery is won in the first game round, and the pachinko machine 10 is out of the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. Shows processing to be executed. In addition, as shown in the figure, before the first game round winning the big hit lottery, there is a first preceding game round whose lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of place.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect of notifying that a big hit lottery will be won in the first game round. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect informing the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot notification is made as a result notification effect.

  Note that the result notification effect in the first preceding game round in the case where the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. . Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol change display is executed during the change time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, a continuous effect is executed in the display area 41aL. By doing in this way, a series of continuous effects can be executed from the first preceding game times to the first game times without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, after executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special gaming state.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect during the ending period. In the present embodiment, as a special game state reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result notification effect (a jackpot notification) in the first game time are reproduced. To do. In addition, when the variation display and the stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The contents of the design are partly different.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the special end effect after executing the special game state reproduction effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. The jackpot lottery for the second game round is out of play. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (outgoing notice).

  Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48B will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, the first preceding game number in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out is present before the first game number won in the big win lottery. Furthermore, in the case c2, there is a second preceding game number in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out before the second game number for winning the big hit lottery.

  Similarly to the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect informing the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot notification is made as a result notification effect.

  After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special gaming state.

  In the case of case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. Then, the game times reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game times and the second game times. In the case c2, as the game time reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

  After the end of the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes the specific start effect in the opening effect in the special gaming state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  The third embodiment can be realized by, for example, the specific processing shown below.

  In the present embodiment, the effects executed in the four game times already executed are always stored in the RAM 96. Then, every time a winning is made to the first start port 33, the result of the big win lottery in the game times executed by the winning is grasped by the first determination process.

  As a result of the first determination process, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is a jackpot lottery, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held one before the first game round When the result is out of play, the continuous performance is executed over the first preceding game times and the first game times.

  Then, when there are two or more reserved game times after the first game time by the end of the first game time, the result of the big hit lottery of the two game times is grasped by the first determination process, Case c1 is executed when the results of the jackpot lottery of the two game times are both out of succession. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state that is executed after the first game round.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times executed first is out of the two game times and the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times executed later is a jackpot, the case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time, and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game time and the second game time.

  In the case c2, when the second preceding game number does not exist, that is, when the jackpot lottery in the game number executed after the special game state after the first game number is a jackpot, the second game number In this case, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, when the variation time of the second game times is shorter than the time required to reproduce all the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, it is a case where continuous effects are executed from the game times before the first game time to the first game time. However, the continuous effects can be reproduced as a special game state reproduction effect and a game times reproduction effect. Moreover, the player's attention degree with respect to continuous performance can be improved by using the processing of case c1 and case c2 together.

D. Fourth embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart illustrating processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game round executed after the first game round. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case d1 and the case d2 as examples.

  FIG. 49A shows a case d1 where the pachinko machine 10 is out of the jackpot lottery in the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. The process to be executed is shown. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game round. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 makes a miss notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an suggestion effect, a game time reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the suggestive effect, and the notice effect and reach executed in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, a jackpot notification is performed.

  After executing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect as an opening effect. In addition, a normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  Next, the case d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49B, the case d2 is a case where the player wins the jackpot lottery in the first game round, and further, the case d2 falls out of the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. The process which the pachinko machine 10 performs is shown. As shown in the drawing, in the first game round, a notice effect and a reach effect are executed. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 makes a miss notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an suggestion effect, a game time reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the suggestive effect, and the notice effect and reach executed in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, a miss notification is performed.

  The fourth embodiment can be realized, for example, by the specific processing shown below.

  By performing a pre-determination process every time a winning to the first start port 33 occurs, it is determined whether or not the big hit lottery related to the game times that are put on hold. When it is determined that the jackpot lottery in the game times held two or more ahead is won, the game number won in the jackpot lottery (corresponding to the second game number in case d1) In addition to executing the notice effect and the reach effect at the game time (corresponding to the first game time) reserved one time before, the stored notice effect and reach effect are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed notice effect and the reach effect itself, but may be other information as long as the information can be read again. Good.

  The pachinko machine 10 performs a reach effect in the first game round, and then makes a miss notification as a result notification effect. Thereafter, in the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed, and the stored notice effect and reach effect are executed as the game time reproduction effect. The specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game time is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. By executing such processing, the case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized.

  In addition, in the case d2, when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out by executing the first determination process, the case d2 is executed first of the two reserved game times. This can be realized by executing the reach effect at the game time and reproducing the suggestion effect and the play effect and reach effect executed at the previous game time as the game time reproduction effect at the game time to be executed later. . In this case, in the second game time, the variation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In some cases, for example, a part or all of the notice effect executed as the game time reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game time.

  On the other hand, in the second game time, the variation time of the second game time is longer than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. For example, the execution time of the suggestion effect may be set to a long effect according to the variation time of the second game time. Necessary for the suggestion effect and the game times reproduction effect by preparing multiple types of suggestion effects corresponding to the time required for the effect and selecting the optimal suggestion effect according to the variation time of the second game time And the variation time of the second game time can be made the same.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, by executing the processing of the case d1, although the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, Since the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed in the second game round as the game round reproduction effect, the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won. It is difficult for the player to anticipate this. In addition, in the second game round, the first game is executed by executing a suggestion stage that suggests reproducing the stage in the first game round that is out of the jackpot lottery before the game round reproduction stage is executed. It is possible to give the player more recognition that the performance executed at the time is only reproduced. Since the player can recognize that the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won only after notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round by the notification means, the game is unexpected. Sex can be imparted. That is, by making the second game round unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, by executing the processing of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is out, Since the game times reproduction effect is executed, the player can be recognized that the lottery result of the big hit lottery related to the game times for which the game time reproduction effect has been executed is not necessarily a big hit. As a result, when a game times reproduction effect is executed, the player is given a feeling of emotional relaxation and expectation, and the player's attention to the game times in which the already executed effect is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth Embodiment (Example of effect type setting process):
Next, as the fifth embodiment, an example of processing executed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game times in the sound emission control device 90 (sound light side MPU 92). In this description, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Then, details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the setting process of the effect type. When the sound light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the object A display pattern random number counter C11, the object B display pattern random number counter C12, and the object C display pattern random number counter are used to determine the content of the notice effect. A counter value is acquired from each random number counter of C13 at a predetermined timing.

  Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used for determining how to combine a plurality of object images constituting a notice effect in each game time. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect in each game round is configured by combining three types of object images. The object A display pattern random number counter C11, the object B display pattern random number counter C12, and the object C display pattern random number counter C13 are random numbers for determining the display mode of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, the combination method of these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the display timing are determined and set as the notice effect. Here, three types of object images constituting the notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A that is an object image constituting a notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows a behavior of a character representing a person, and is composed of three images, an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. 51A shows the image A1, FIG. 51B shows the image A2, and FIG. 51C shows the image A3. The object A is displayed as an image that changes over time by displaying at least two of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. One of the two images A1, A2, and A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B which is an object image constituting a notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images: an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 52A shows the image B1, FIG. 52B shows the image B2, and FIG. 52C shows the image B3. The object B is displayed as an image that changes over time by displaying at least two of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. One of the images B1, B2, and B3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C that is an object image constituting the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the behavior of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images, an image C1, an image C2, and an image C3. FIG. 53 (a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53 (b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the image C3. The object C is displayed as an image that changes over time by displaying at least two of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. One of the images C1, C2, and C3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the notice effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS.

  The description returns to FIG. When the sound light side MPU 92 obtains the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the display pattern random number counter is referred to by referring to the object A display pattern table, the object B display pattern table, and the object C display pattern table. Collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed, and a display pattern is determined for each object.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for the object A has a jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, when the jackpot lottery result is unsuccessful and a reach effect is executed ("missing (with reach)"). When the lottery result is out of reach and the reach effect is not executed (“out of reach (no reach)”), it is divided into three cases. 54, in this embodiment, as a display pattern of the object A, as a display pattern of the object A, a pattern that does not display the object A (non-display) and a pattern that displays only the image A1 ( A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1 and the image A2, and a pattern for sequentially displaying the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 ( 1-A2 over A3) and is set in advance.

  When setting a notice effect in a predetermined game time, the sound light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game time corresponds to a jackpot, missed (with reach), or missed (without reach). In the display pattern table, the corresponding part of the game times is referred to. For example, when the game time is a big hit, the “big hit” column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by collating with the acquired value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, random numbers are assigned differently for each display pattern in each case of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is a frequency displayed when it is a big hit, a frequency displayed when it is out (with reach), and a frequency displayed when it is out (without reach). Is different. That is, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed is higher in the order of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach). On the other hand, the probability that the display pattern (A1) is displayed is higher in the order of out (no reach), out (with reach), and jackpot. Therefore, in the notice effect in the game times, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed is higher than the case where only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) The display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is set to be more likely to be a big hit than when the display pattern is displayed. That is, the performance by the object A indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot for the player (hereinafter, the expectation degree) Function as a step-up effect.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the objects A, B, and C have different ways of distributing the random number values in the cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach). The expectation degree of jackpot shown by the step-up effect of the object A, the expectation degree of jackpot shown by the step-up effect of the object B, and the expectation degree of jackpot shown by the step-up effect of the object C are different. For example, in the object B, the display pattern random number value in the display pattern for the object B is not displayed in the game times in the case of losing (no reach), but is displayed in the case of losing (with reach) and jackpot. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, if the display pattern is out of reach (no reach), it can be realized by setting “non-display” in all the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing so, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed and the jackpot expectation degree when the object A and the object B are displayed can be made different. That is, in each display pattern table of the object A, the object B, and the object C, by setting different ways of distributing the random number values in the cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the jackpot expectation can be expressed by the presence or absence of display of each object. By doing in this way, the player's attention degree with respect to an object image can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table for each of object A, object B, and object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), and each display pattern random number is divided. For example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of the object B is further divided into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and the effect by the object B is expected for probability variation jackpot You may make it function as a step-up production which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which there is a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode), the effect by the object C is expected to be the expectation of the current game times probability change state. It may function as a step-up effect indicating Thus, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, jackpot expectation degree or The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game (such as the expected degree of probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display pattern for the objects A, B, and C, and then arranges the objects so that the objects are combined and displayed on the display surface 41a. The position and the display timing of each object are set. Specifically, the sound light side MPU 92 determines an arrangement position and a display timing of each object with reference to a preset arrangement / timing setting table.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of an arrangement / timing setting table. As shown in the figure, the arrangement / timing setting table starts display on the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object to be displayed on the display surface 41a, and the display surface 41a of each object. Timing is set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, a display pattern (A1-A2) for the object A, a display pattern (non-display) for the object B, and a display pattern (C1-C2-) for the object C. In the case of C3), since the displayed objects are the object A and the object C, “A · C” in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table is referred to. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement coordinates of the object A and the object C are the center coordinates of the object A at (Xa2, Ya2) of the display surface 41a. The object C is set so that the center coordinates of the object C are positioned at (Xc1, Yc1) of the display surface 41a. Further, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, for object A, display starts ta2 seconds after the start of game play, and for object C, after game start is started. The display is set to start after tc 1 second.

  The coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set so as to change with time. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is displayed. Arrangement of display objects and display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so as not to overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the display surface 41a is in a form in which each object is related. In the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement of display objects (relative arrangement position between objects) and the start timing of display (relative timing between objects) are set. Furthermore, the arrangement of the display objects and the display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so that the objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 change over time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), and FIG. 56 (c). FIG. 56 shows a notice effect in which the object A, the object B, and the object C are combined, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for the object A, and the display pattern (B1-B2) is displayed for the object B. -B3) is displayed, and for object C, the notice effect set to display the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is shown.

  In the notice effect shown in FIG. 56, there is a story that a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog in the box while the weather gradually gets worse, and gives an umbrella to the dog. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are considered, and the objects have relevance. Furthermore, the arrangement of the display objects and the display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so that the display surface 41a is displayed in a manner having a story. In this way, the notice effect that is executed when a plurality of types of object images are displayed in the same period can be made an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and by having a story, It is possible to improve interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56C, the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a in such a manner that there is no image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and processing for displaying only a layer image showing a character representing a person Is running. By doing in this way, the effect which a some object image is displayed can be made into the effect which does not feel uncomfortable with respect to a player.

  In FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed so as not to display the image frame, but the image A1, which is displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3), It is good also as a structure which does not display the image frame of one part or all part of image A2 and image A3. Similar processing may be executed for other object images.

  The sound light side MPU 92 sets the placement position of each object and the display timing of each object in this way, and sets the notice effect.

  Next, the production type setting process described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

  In step S3201, counter values are acquired from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, respectively. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the notice effect is set are jackpot, missed (with reach), or missed (without reach). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, the display patterns for the objects A to C are referred to, and the display pattern for each object is determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3204.

  In step S3204, when a display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the notice effect of the game time. That is, it is determined whether or not the display pattern of all the objects A to C is “non-display”.

  In step S3204, when it is determined that the object display is not none (non-display) in the notice effect in the game time (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205 and is displayed with reference to the arrangement / timing setting table. The coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing for starting display on the display surface 41a are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3204 that there is no object display (not displayed) in the notice effect of the game time (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

  In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing for starting the display of each object are set as the notice effect in the game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3207.

  In step S3207, it is determined whether the game time is a big hit or missed (with reach). That is, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed after the notice effect is executed in the game times.

  If it is determined in step S3207 that the game time is a big hit or missed (with reach) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208, and reach effect setting processing is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game time is not a big hit or missed (with reach) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

  In step S3209, the notice effect and reach effect set in step S3206 and step S3208 are set in the effect command. Thereafter, the effect type setting process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner that is related to each other when each object is displayed as the notice effect in the same period. The effect executed by being displayed during the period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object may be displayed in the same period as other objects, or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object is displayed as a single object). The production can be executed, and the objects can be used effectively.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a manner having a story, so that the plurality of object images are displayed in the same period. The effect executed by being displayed on the screen can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period has a story.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the objects A, B, and C have different random number distribution methods in each case of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). The degree of game advantage / disadvantage and the jackpot expectation shown by the step-up effects of the object images of object A, object B, and object C are different. That is, even if each object is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether other objects are also displayed in the same period, so the player's attention level, interest level, Expectation can be improved.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on how the display pattern table is set, for example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of the object B is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot. By dividing into jackpots, the effect by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the expected degree of probability jackpot. That is, the effect by each object can be made to function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games can be suggested using each object.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when each object image is displayed in the same period, the relative position between the objects is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the arrangement / timing is set so that the relative position between the objects is considered and each object is related. The arrangement of display objects in the setting table and the display start timing are set. In addition, the arrangement of the display objects and the display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so that the objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, there are cases where each object image is displayed during the same period and cases where each object image is not displayed during the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone), so that a plurality of effects are executed using each object image. The object image can be used effectively.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A includes the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). ) May be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, relative positions with other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), the relative position between the object images is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position. The images are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects executed by displaying each object image in the same period do not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effects can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing at which each object starts to be displayed on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement / timing setting table. Accordingly, when each object image is displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing among the object images, so that each object image is displayed at a timing that is not related at all. There is nothing. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and can further improve the quality of the effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each object image is an image (moving image in the present embodiment) that changes with time, so that various effects can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot lottery when the object A is displayed as a notice effect, the probability of winning a jackpot lottery when the object B is displayed as a notice effect, and the object C The probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as the notice effect is different. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as a notice effect is also different. By doing in this way, the player's attention degree with respect to an object image can be improved.

F. Sixth Embodiment (Another example of setting process of effect type):
Next, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described as the sixth embodiment. As described above, the effect type setting process is a process of setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the game times in the sound emission control device 90 (sound light side MPU 92). In this description, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Then, details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above is a method for determining the type of object to be displayed as a notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a combination of a plurality of types of objects to be displayed in the notice effect is set in advance by the display object table, and the sound light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays it. By comparing with the object table, a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect is determined.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position of the object displayed in the notice effect and the display start timing are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table. In the present embodiment, each of the combinations of the displayed objects is determined. Corresponding to the display pattern, the arrangement position of each object and the display start timing are set in advance. This will be specifically described below.

  When the sound light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the sound light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, performs a comparison with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the notice effect. Determine the combination.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the display object table. As shown in the figure, in the display object table, a combination of the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and each object to be displayed as the notice effect is set. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as object images displayed in the notice effect. The display object table in the present embodiment is different in the method of assigning the display object random number value (number of values to be assigned) to the combination of each object displayed as the notice effect. For example, when only object A is displayed as a display object, the value of the display object random number is 0 to 19, and 20 values are allocated. When the object A and the object B are displayed, the display object random number values are 60 to 71, and 12 values are allocated. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the display object random number values are 96 to 99, and four values are allocated. Thus, the frequency with which each object combination is displayed as a notice effect varies depending on the number of display object random numbers assigned to each object combination being different.

  The description returns to FIG. After determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect, the sound light side MPU 92 next acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined display object combination and collates with the counter value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C22. Is executed to determine a display pattern corresponding to the combination of the display objects. FIG. 58 shows a case where it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases: jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). And in each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0-99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed (non-display), the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C are combined. The pattern (A1 / C1) to be displayed, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A in order, the pattern C1 and the image C2 of the object C (A1-A2 / C1-C2), and the image of the object A A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set in which A1 and the image A2 are displayed in order and the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C are displayed in order. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the display start timing are set in advance for each display pattern, and each object in the notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern. The arrangement position and the display start timing are determined.

  For example, when the game time is a big hit, and it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. When the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is “62”, the display pattern of the notice effect is determined as (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), and 54 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are sequentially displayed on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are sequentially displayed. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) includes the arrangement position of the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A and the display start timing, the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C. Since the arrangement position and the display start timing are preset, the mode of the notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  Although the AC display pattern table has been described with reference to FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. In addition, for each display pattern table, a plurality of types of display patterns based on combinations of images of the respective objects are set.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram of a display pattern table for A. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, release (with reach), and release (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), display pattern (A1), respectively. -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are assigned four display patterns. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for A is out (no reach), the display pattern (A1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and is out (with reach). The display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most common among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 is assigned so that the frequency of display is high. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player can use the method when the image A2 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery increases, and when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image A3 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a B display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for B, in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), out (without reach), non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns (B1) (see FIG. 52) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for B is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and is out of reach (reach). Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) is the highest among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 is assigned so that the frequency of display is high. That is, by assigning the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the above-described notice effect by the object A, the player can perform the following after the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is reduced, and after that, the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B1 on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is reduced.

  Next, the C display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1), respectively. -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are assigned four display patterns. As shown in the figure, in the case of detachment (no reach), the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of detachment (with reach), the four displays are displayed. Of the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently among the four display patterns. Thus, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 is allocated. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player can use the method when the image C2 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery increases, and when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image C3 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the AB display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of an AB display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, in the three cases of jackpot, release (with reach), and release (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3), display pattern (A1), respectively. -A2-A3 / B1) and four display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for AB is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. In the case of detachment (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern is displayed among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 is allocated so that the frequency of displaying the pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is the highest.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66 (a), FIG. 66 (b), and FIG. 66 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents a situation in which a walking person gets wet in the rain while the weather changes to clear, cloudy, and rainy.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 66A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and generally a bad impression is Since the game is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses that the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. In general, it gives an impression that it cannot be compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a), and is advantageous to the player regarding the game situation compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a). Give recognition that can not be said. And when the image which consists of image A2 and image B3 shown in FIG.66 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the person who gets wet in the said image is expressed, and generally gives a bad impression, Gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) changes the recognition of the game situation to a disadvantageous recognition for the player as the notice effect is displayed.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 67 (a), 67 (b), and 67 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents that a person walking is clear and he / she is wearing an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and generally a bad impression is Since the game is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who notices that the image is clear is expressed in the image, As with the image of FIG. 67 (a), since generally a bad impression is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A3 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who takes an umbrella and takes measures against sunburn, which is generally bad. Does not give an impression and gives a perception that is not disadvantageous with respect to the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the display of the notice effect is advanced.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 68 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect was that the person who was walking noticed the change in the weather while the weather changed to sunny, cloudy, and rain, and was able to respond appropriately to the worsening weather by holding an umbrella Is expressed.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and generally a bad impression is Since the game is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when the image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses that the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. In general, it gives the player an impression that it cannot be compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a). Gives a perception that cannot be said. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who can appropriately cope with the worsening weather by holding an umbrella. It generally gives a good impression and gives a favorable perception about the gaming situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition that is not disadvantageous with respect to the game situation in the image of FIG. In the image of FIG. 68 (b), the player is given recognition that is not advantageous regarding the game situation, and thereafter, in the image of FIG. 68 (c), the player is given recognition that is advantageous regarding the game situation. . By displaying such a notice effect, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's expectation for the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 67, and 68, the effect set by the AB display pattern table is recognized as the game situation is advantageous or unfavorable to the player as the notice effect progresses. Is configured to give. In particular, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 is compared with the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 (a) and FIG. 68 (a) are the same images, FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 68 (b) are the same images, and all the notice effects are the same images partway through. The player can be given a sense of urgency as to whether the notice effect of FIG. 66 or the notice effect of FIG. 68 changes. More specifically, a person who has noticed a change in weather can give a player a sense of urgency with respect to changes such as whether or not to put on an umbrella at the end. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a BC display pattern table. In the case of the BC display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), the non-display, display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3), display pattern (B2-B3), respectively. / C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the BC display pattern table is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and the display pattern table is out of place. In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of big hit, the display pattern ( The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 is assigned so that the frequency of displaying (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is the highest.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70 (a), FIG. 70 (b), and FIG. 70 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, the weather changes from cloudy to rain, while the box expresses a state where the dog appears and the dog gets wet from the rain.

  When an image composed of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in a cloudy state. Since it does not give a bad impression, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog having a large face from the box gets wet in the image. Is generally expressed, giving a bad impression and giving the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation when the image of FIG. 70 (c) is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents that the weather changes from cloudy to rain, and the box is placed in such weather.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in a cloudy state. Since it does not give a bad impression, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. And when the image which consists of image B3 and image C1 shown in FIG.71 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the said image has not changed from the image of FIG.71 (b), and the said image is also a game. The player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), and FIG. 72 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents the appearance of the dog's face coming out of the box on a sunny day.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in a clear day. Since it does not give a bad impression, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses how the dog looks out from the box while it is sunny. Compared to FIG. 72 (a), the player is given an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect by the C display pattern table of FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning the big hit lottery. Also in the notice effect by the object B and the object C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), the image by the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2. On the other hand, it gives a favorable recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses how the dog makes a large face out of the box while it is clear. In general, a good impression is given, so that the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. As described above, the effect by the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is similar to the notice effect by the C display pattern table of FIG. 64, and the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2, and the image C3. Since an image that gives a bad impression is not displayed, the player can be given an advantageous recognition of the game situation as the advance notice effect progresses.

  Here, among the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. A comparison with the notice effect by -C3) will be described.

  These two notice effects are the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 70 (a) and FIG. 71 (a) are the same images, and FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. 71 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until halfway. However, the recognition of the game situation given to the player depending on the image displayed thereafter is greatly different between the two notice effects. The image in FIG. 70C is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and the image of a dog that gets wet in the rain is generally an image that gives a bad impression. Give adverse recognition about. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 71 (c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and an image in which a box is placed in the rain does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, it does not give a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In other words, in a state in which an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, when the image C1 changes to the image C3 after that, the image is FIG. 70 (c). On the other hand, when the image C1 is not changed in a state where an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed while giving a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation, Since the image is shown in FIG. 71 (c), the player is not adversely recognized about the game situation. Therefore, a game is determined whether or not the image C1 is changed to the image C3 by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and to give the player a sense of urgency.

  64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Is displayed on the display surface 41a, it gives the player a better recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image that shows a dog appearing in the box gives a generally better impression than an image that shows the box being placed, Gives players an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In addition, when a notice effect is set by the C display pattern table of FIG. 64, it is more likely that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3. Regarding the situation of the game for the player, the case where the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 is more than the case where the image C3 is not combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a. Give favorable recognition.

  However, when the image B3 is combined with the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 is displayed when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 71 (c)). Compared with the image B1 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 70 (c)), the player is given more favorable recognition of the game situation.

  That is, when the image B3 (rain image) is not combined with each of the images C1 and C3, the image C3 (in the box) is more effective than the case where the image C1 (box image) is displayed on the display surface 41a. The image B3 (rain image) is displayed on each of the image C1 and the image C3, although the dog image) is displayed on the display surface 41a, although it gives the player a better recognition of the game situation. ) In the case where the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a than the case where the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Give the player a favorable perception of the game situation.

  Therefore, various recognitions about the game situation can be given to the player depending on how the images are combined. In the case of this embodiment, when the predetermined image is combined with the effect image that is stepped up as the probability or expectation of winning the big hit lottery increases, the player recognizes a completely different recognition of the game situation. Can be given to. Even if the player recognizes the image C1 (box image) or the image C3 (dog image in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, the image B3 (rain image) is displayed. Recognize that the game situation is different. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved.

  Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image of the box) is displayed more than the case where the image C1 (box image) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image). Although the image of the dog in the box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image), the image C1 (box image) is displayed even though the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher. The winning combination with image B3 (rain image) wins the jackpot lottery than when image C3 (image of the dog in the box) is displayed with image B3 (rain image). There is a high probability of being. Accordingly, when the object C or a part of the image such as the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed, whether or not the image B3 (rain image) is displayed. The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

  Normally, as the step-up progresses (for example, as the effect image progresses in the order of image P1 → image P2 → image P3), the effect image having a higher probability of winning the jackpot lottery is the image P2 than the image P1, and the image P2 than the image P2. P3 is configured to give an image that gives a better impression to the player. That is, in the image P1, the image P2, and the image P3, the order of the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of good and bad impression given to the player are arranged. By setting it as such a structure, a player's expectation can be improved as an effect image steps up (progress). Displaying [Image P1 + Image Q], [Image P2 + Image Q], and [Image P3 + Image Q] by combining other images (for example, Image Q) with such a normal effect image Even so, [Image P2 + Image Q] is better than [Image P1 + Image Q], and [Image P3 + Image Q] is better than [Image P2 + Image Q]. Configured. That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the images Q are simply combined, the [image P2 + image Q] is more to the player than the [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In this embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the image to be combined. In the present embodiment, the image P1, the image P2, the image P3, and the image Q are devised to combine the image Q, although the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2. In this case, [Image P2 + Image Q] can give a better impression to the player than [Image P3 + Image Q].

  In this way, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. In other words, in the effect image not combined with the image Q, it is recognized that the game situation is more advantageous as the image P1 → image P2 → image P3 progresses, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, [image P1 + image It is possible to give recognition that the game situation is more disadvantageous as the progression proceeds from [Q] → [image P2 + image Q] → [image P3 + image Q].

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), the non-display and display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), respectively. ), Display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3), display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) Yes. As shown in the figure, when the ABC display pattern table is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is the most among the above four display patterns. When the frequency of the display is high and the display is out of reach (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is the most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and the jackpot In the case of the above-mentioned four display patterns, the display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are displayed in a range from 0 to 99 so that the frequency of display is highest. The value of the random number counter C22 is allocated.

  Next, the AC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 74 (b), and FIG. 74 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses how the person who walked and the dog that appeared in the box got wet in the rain while the weather changed to sunny, cloudy, and rainy. Yes.

  When an image composed of an image A1, an image B1, and an image C1 shown in FIG. 74A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a box are expressed in the image while it is clear. Since it does not give a bad impression, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 74B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and the person changes the weather. In addition, the appearance of the dog's face appearing slightly from the box is expressed, and this image also does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 74C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image includes a person who notices a change in weather, It expresses how a dog with a big face gets wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous understanding of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives an inflection to the player's expectation for the game, and at the end of the notice effect, , Give a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75 (a), FIG. 75 (b), and FIG. 75 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents a person who notices a change in the weather while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and a state in which the dog looks out from the box.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 75A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking in a sunny state and a box are placed on the image. Is expressed and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 75B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices a change in the weather in the weather that has changed from sunny to cloudy. A person and a state where a dog shows a little face from the box are represented, and the image also does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog that makes a big face out of the box are expressed in the cloudy state. The image does not give a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation to the player. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76 (a), FIG. 76 (b), and FIG. 76 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses how the person who walked notices the change in the weather while the weather changes to clear, cloudy, and rain, and puts an umbrella on the dog that shows his face out of the box Has been.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking in a sunny state and a box are placed on the image. Is expressed and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 76B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices a change in the weather in the weather that has changed from sunny to cloudy. A person and a state where a dog shows a little face from the box are represented, and the image also does not give the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the image composed of the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a dog with a large face out of the box in the rain and an umbrella on the dog The person to be described is expressed, and the image generally gives a touching impression, and therefore gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the notice effect according to the display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3- / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 74 and those shown in FIG. A comparison with the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) will be described.

  These two notice effects are the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 76 (a) are the same images, and FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 76 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until halfway. However, the recognition of the game situation given to the player depending on the image displayed thereafter is greatly different between the two notice effects. The image in FIG. 74 (c) is a combination of the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3, and the image in which the person and the dog get wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression. On the other hand, it gives disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 76C is an image in which the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person holds an umbrella so that the dog does not get wet in the rain. Since this is an image that gives a good impression, it gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in a state where an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, when the image A2 does not change thereafter, the image is as shown in FIG. 74 (c). The player is given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation, while the image A2 is combined with the image B2, and then the image A2 is displayed as the image A3. 76, the image is shown in FIG. 76 (c), which gives the player an advantageous recognition about the game situation. Therefore, whether or not the image A2 changes to the image A3 by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed. In this respect, it is possible to attract the player's attention and to give the player a sense of urgency.

  Further, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 described above, the appearance of the effect image progresses because the appearance of the weather worsens as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3, and the effect image progress. As the game goes on, it gives the player a disadvantageous understanding of the game situation. In addition, when the notice effect is set by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63, the probability that the big hit lottery is won is set lower when the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3. Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3, and the effect image progress, the player is given a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. That is, the object B gives disadvantageous recognition to the player by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3.

  However, the object B is combined with the object A in which the image advances in the order of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 and the object C in which the image advances in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the effect image to a content that gives inspiration to the player, and it is advantageous for the player regarding the game situation. The image can be changed to give recognition. As described above, the images configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment are displayed as one object by combining the contents of the image and displayed in combination with other objects. In some cases, the impression given by the image can be changed greatly, and the recognition of the game situation given to the player can be changed greatly.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect produced by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or the notice effect produced by a combination thereof is used as an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit lottery is won. That is, although these notice effects are used as effects indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot, it is also possible to use the expectation level of probability variation jackpots or the expectation degree of being in a state of probability variation as an effect indicating the player. Even in this case, as in the present embodiment, the player can be recognized that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on how the images of the objects are combined.

  Next, the production type setting process in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect type in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

  In step S3301, a counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3302, where the display object table is referred to, the obtained counter value of the display object random number counter C21 is collated, and the combination of objects to be displayed as the notice effect is determined. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, a counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3304, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, missed (with reach), or missed (without reach). After executing step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of objects to be displayed as the notice effect is referred to, and the obtained display pattern random number counter C22 is compared to determine the display pattern. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3306, and the determined display pattern is set as a notice effect. After executing Step S3306, the process proceeds to Step S3307.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game time is a big hit. If it is determined in step S3307 that the game time is a big hit (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

  In step S3308, it is determined whether the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern includes three combinations of objects displayed as the notice effect, object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-). B3 / C1-C2-C3). That is, the display pattern shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is a full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

  In step S3309, as the reach effect setting process, the reach effect to be executed after the notice effect of the full display pattern is set to a sequel effect expressing the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), and FIG. 78 (c). As shown in the figure, the sequel effect is an effect showing a person walking in the rain with a dog under the umbrella. By executing such a sequel effect, it is shown to the player that the probability of being a big hit is high, and the player's expectation can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. In step S3309, after setting the sequel effect as the reach effect, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  If it is determined in step S3307 that the game time is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

  In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the game time is reach, that is, whether or not the game is out of reach (with reach). If it is determined in step S3311 that the game times are reach (S3311: YES), or if it is determined that the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3308 is not a full display pattern (S3308: NO). The process proceeds to step S3312.

  In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the reach effect setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is not reach (S3311: NO), the process proceeds to step S3310 without executing step S3312.

  In step S3310, the notice effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set in the effect command. Thereafter, the effect type setting process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the recognition of advantages / disadvantages about the game situation given to the player can be changed depending on how the objects are combined, so various effects using each object can be performed. It is possible to effectively use each object image. For example, even when the object A is displayed, it is advantageous about the game situation to be given to the player depending on how it is combined with another object or whether it is displayed in the same period as the other object. Since recognition about disadvantage is different, various effects using each object image can be executed, and each object image can be used effectively. In addition, for each of various display patterns composed of combinations of object images, the probability of winning a jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed differs, so that the player's attention to the effect constituted by each display pattern, The degree of interest and expectation can be improved.

  Further, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, big hit, missed (with reach), missed (without reach)). Therefore, by adjusting the arrangement position, various recognitions can be given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the timing for starting the display of each object is changed according to the game situation is set, so by adjusting the display start timing for each object The player can be given various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the first to sixth embodiments described above is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90. is there. The RTC 96 includes a backup power source, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires the date information and time information output from the RTC 96 and executes an RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. The process to execute is started. The RTC effect of this embodiment is composed of a 300-second RTC effect moving image and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every hour at 00 minutes.

  FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in-process flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect is started, and is turned off when the RTC effect ends.

  When the RTC effect start condition is satisfied when the time is 00 minutes during display of the background moving image while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background. The mode of displaying the moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the voice preset by the player.

  When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is shifted from the mode to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the display control apparatus 100 shifts to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed, the display control apparatus 100 starts display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode of displaying a background moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound.

  The sound emission control device 90 is capable of outputting a plurality of types of background music, and when performing background music cueing processing (processing for starting output or display from the temporal start position “01”). The type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control apparatus 100 can display and select a plurality of types of background videos corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. It is also possible to select a background video corresponding to the background music and execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow a player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In FIG. 83 to be described later, similarly, when the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the cue processing of the background music and the background moving image, the configuration for selecting the background music and the background moving image from a plurality of types is also the same. Can be adopted.

  FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in a case where the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a demo video.

  When the time is 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration movie, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the demonstration movie. The mode of displaying the RTC is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position “01”, and the sound output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is shifted from the mode to the mode of displaying the demo video. Then, when the display control apparatus 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo video. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode of displaying a demo video (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( (Volume) is reduced to zero.

  FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the transition condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video, and the voice output mode is shifted to the mode in which the volume is zero (silenced state). It is a condition.

  When the time is 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background movie, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background movie. The mode of displaying the RTC is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the voice preset by the player.

  The display control device 100 stops the change of the symbol on the main display unit 45 while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t2), and the transition condition is reached after 15 seconds from the stop of the variation of the symbol. Is established (time t3), the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to a mode for displaying a demo video after a predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect video ends. Transition (time t4). Then, when the display control apparatus 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo video, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo video. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode of displaying a demo video (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( (Volume) is reduced to zero.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the return condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the background music is output with the sound volume set in advance. This is a condition for returning to the mode.

  When the time is 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration movie, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the demonstration movie. The mode of displaying the RTC is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position “01”, and the sound output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  The display control device 100 determines the RTC effect moving image in advance when the change of the symbol in the main display unit 45 starts and the return condition is satisfied (time t2) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. After the display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background video (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound.

  Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processes as those in the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed in the sound light side MPU of the first embodiment is after the command response process (step S1802) is executed and the standby state transition process (step S1803) is executed. The RTC effect processing (step S1802a) is executed before the execution, and the other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment. In the RTC effect process, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect in-progress flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the process proceeds to step S3402, and the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the read time information coincides with a time set in advance as a time for starting execution of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches 00 minutes. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not coincide with the time set in advance as the time for starting the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: NO), the process for the RTC effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time set in advance as the time to start execution of the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404.

  In step S3404, an RTC effect time setting process is executed. Specifically, “150,000” (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405.

  In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. After executing step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406.

  In step S3406, an RTC effect music output start process is executed. Specifically, output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. When background music is being output, output of the background music is stopped and output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3407, and the RTC effect flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3408.

  In step S3408, it is determined whether or not any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image display flag is ON. The situation in which any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo movie start wait flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON is a situation in which the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. I mean. If it is determined in step S3408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image display flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

  In step S3409, the reduced audio output level (volume) is restored to a value preset by the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3410, and the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo video start flag is a flag for starting the demo video after the end of the RTC effect, and when the transition condition is established before the start of the RTC effect, or during the execution of the RTC effect. This is a flag that is turned ON when is established. After executing step S3410, the process proceeds to step S3411, and among the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image display flag, the flag that has been turned ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag are OFF (S3408: NO), the processing from step S3409 to step S3411 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S3412.

  In step S3412, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, the demo video start flag after RTC effect is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S3414, where the return condition is satisfied. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition establishment flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the process for RTC effect is terminated without executing the processes of steps S3413 and S3414.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect in-progress flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, if the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

  In step S3415, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is zero. If it is determined in step S3415 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and the process proceeds when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414 described above. This is because the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S3408 to step S3414.

  In step S3416, the RTC effect flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3417, and an RTC effect music output stop process is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3418.

  In step S3418, it is determined whether the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC demonstration demo video start flag is not ON (S3418: NO), the process proceeds to step S3419, and a background video start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3420, and background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, output starts from the temporal start position of the background music. Thereafter, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC demonstration demo video start flag is ON (S3418: YES), the process proceeds to step S3421, and a demo video start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3422, and the demonstration moving image display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3423.

  In step S3423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because the music to be output together with the demo video is not set in the present embodiment. After executing step S3423, the process proceeds to step S3424, and the cueing determination flag is turned ON. By this process, the cueing determination flag can be turned ON during the display of the demo video. After executing step S3424, the process proceeds to step S3425, and the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a standby state transition process executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the process (step S2701) for determining whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. The process of determining whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON (step S2700) is executed, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. If it is determined that the RTC effect flag is ON (S2700: YES), the standby state transition process is terminated. That is, it is configured not to enter the standby state during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC effect in-progress flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process proceeds to step S2701, and it is determined whether the return condition establishment flag is ON. Since the following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing command response processing executed in the display side MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command handling process (FIG. 45) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is after the process (step S3112) for starting the display of the background moving image and the other process (step S3113). ) Is executed, the processing of step S3112a and step S3112b described later is executed, and the other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In step S3112a, it is determined whether or not an RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3112b, and processing for starting display of the RTC effect moving image is executed. Specifically, image drawing and display control are started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After executing Step S3112b, the process proceeds to Step S3113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. Since the following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the mode of displaying the background video is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and then the predetermined display of the RTC effect video is performed. When the period is over, the mode for displaying the background video is shifted from the mode for displaying the RTC effect video to the mode for displaying the background video. Start display. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed when the background moving image is displayed. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts when moving to the mode of displaying the background moving image changes, for example, when a predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect is displayed. Transition from a mode of displaying the background video from the temporal position of the background video displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the mode of displaying the video or a mode of displaying the background video from the mode of displaying the RTC effect video The RTC effect moving image is displayed from the configuration in which the temporal position of the background moving image to start display is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the mode for displaying the background moving image. Even after shifting to the mode, the playback of the background video is continued as an internal process, and the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is switched to the mode of displaying the background video. Configuration or the like for displaying a background video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of displaying the demo video is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and then the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video is ended. In some cases, the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video, and the display of the demo video is started from a predetermined time position when the mode of displaying the demo video is shifted. . Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the time position at which the display of the demo video starts is changed when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video. In addition, as a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the demo video is started fluctuates when shifting to a mode in which the demo video is displayed, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, the RTC effect Transition from a mode of displaying the demo video from the time position of the demo video displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the mode of displaying the video or a mode of displaying the demo video from the mode of displaying the RTC effect video The RTC effect moving image is displayed from the configuration in which the time position of the demo moving image to start display is determined based on the elapsed time since shifting to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Even after shifting to the mode, the playback of the demo video continues as an internal process, and the mode for displaying the RTC effect video shifts to the mode for displaying the demo video. Configuration and the like for displaying the demonstration video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the display of the RTC effect moving image, the RTC effect moving image is interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. First, since the demo video is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video is over, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even if the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the RTC effect moving image is interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. First, since the background moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially simultaneously in each pachinko machine 10. While shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying from a predetermined temporal position of the background moving image when displaying the background moving image, and thus is displayed on each pachinko machine 10. Background video can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. For this reason, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the background video displayed on each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized. As a result, the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal leading position of the background moving image is displayed. Since the display is started from the beginning, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player as compared to the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the background video when the background video is displayed. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display starts from a position in the middle of the background video when the background video is displayed, the player can view the background video from the middle of the time. As a result, you may feel a sense of incompatibility, or you may feel that there is a part of the background video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, so that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the background video can be reduced. It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the user can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the predetermined time position is changed. Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music starts is changed. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which background music output is started fluctuates, for example, in FIG. 80, when a predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the mode shifts to a mode in which RTC effect music is output. Starts output when shifting from a configuration in which the background music is output from the temporal position of the background music that was output at the timing immediately before the start, or from a mode in which RTC production music is output to a mode in which background music is output Even after the transition to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music from the mode of outputting the background music from the configuration of determining the temporal position of the background music to be performed based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music While continuing to play background music as an internal process, when shifting from a mode of outputting RTC effect music to a mode of outputting background music, Configuration and the like for outputting the background music being played continuously Te.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the background music is displayed. Since the output is started from the beginning, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the background music in the time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a position in the middle of the time of the background music, the player will appreciate the background music from a position in the middle of the time, You may feel unsatisfactory that there is a part of the background music that you have not appreciated. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background music can be viewed from the beginning position by the player, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the background music can be reduced. It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the user can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially simultaneously in each pachinko machine 10. While shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the demo video from a predetermined time position when displaying the demo video, so that it is displayed on each pachinko machine 10. Demo videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. For this reason, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the demo moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the demo moving image is displayed. The display starts from the beginning, so when moving to the mode of displaying the demo video and displaying the demo video, the discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration where the display starts from the mid-temporal position of the demo video Can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the demo video when the demo video is displayed by moving to a mode in which the demo video is displayed, the player may Since you will be watching from an intermediate position, you may feel uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there are parts of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the demo video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, so that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the demo video can be displayed. It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the user can appreciate everything from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eighth embodiment, and then the details of the process will be described. Note that the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

H1. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) shows a display surface 41a included in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a provided in the pachinko machine 10. In the first hold display area Ds1, hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 are displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 are displayed. Each hold display corresponds to a jackpot random number counter C1 that is acquired and stored based on a game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. The maximum number of hold displays is four (Dm11 to Dm14) in the first hold display area Ds1 and four (Dm21 to Dm24) in the second hold display area Ds2.

  For each hold display displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is the target of the big win lottery in the order of the hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14. Similarly, for each hold display displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is the target of the jackpot lottery in the order of the hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24.

  The display mode of each hold display suggests the possibility that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each hold display will win the jackpot lottery, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower corresponding to the level of the possibility Is set. As the display mode of the hold display becomes higher (ranks up) in a plurality of stages, it is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is likely to win the jackpot lottery.

  FIG. 88 (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold display set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending display is set to display in a plurality of stages from the upper level to the lower level corresponding to the possibility of winning the big hit lottery. The display mode of the hold display is set in order from the top in five levels: an actual display level Lvr5, an actual display level Lvr4, an actual display level Lvr3, an actual display level Lvr2, and an actual display level Lvr1. The display mode corresponding to the higher actual display level Lvr is set as the probability of winning the big hit lottery is higher, and the display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the big hit lottery is lower. .

  In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is expressed in color. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr5 is expressed in yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is red, the actual display level Lvr3 is green, the actual display level Lvr2 is blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is white. In addition, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to a mode expressed in color, but in a mode that can be recognized by the player, such as a mode expressed in a pattern or a mode expressed in a character. If the difference of each actual display level Lvr is expressed, various display modes can be adopted.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display to blue, an effect of changing the blue hold display to red, or the like is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, the display mode changes as the order in which the change hold display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery is later. An effect is executed so that the number of stages in which the actual display level Lvr is increased between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display is increased. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the later jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display The step width (before the change of the display mode) in a plurality of stages of the display mode (the actual display level Lvr1 to the actual display level Lvr5) between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display, The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference in the actual display level Lvr between the change display and the change display is increased.

  Specifically, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is displayed as the upper display based on the difference between the level before and after the change (the difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to the higher display mode. The difference between the pre-change stage and the post-change stage (difference in actual display level Lvr) when changing to a mode is larger, and before and after the change when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 to a higher-level display mode The difference between the stage before change and the stage after change (difference in actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode is larger than the difference in level (difference in actual display level Lvr). The display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the upper display mode based on the difference (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. Case Difference change before and a later stage changes as towards the (actual differential display level Lvr) increases, changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the next higher level. That is, there is one difference between the stage before the change and the stage after the change (the difference in the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to the upper display mode. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the upper two stages. In other words, there are two differences (differences in the actual display level Lvr) between the stage before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode. When the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of three higher levels. That is, there are three differences (differences in actual display level Lvr) between the stage before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode. When the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the upper four levels. That is, there are four differences (differences in the actual display level Lvr) between the stage before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the upper display mode.

  In the case of the hold display Dm11, for example, when the hold display Dm11 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to blue (actual display level Lvr2) which is the display mode of the next higher level, and the hold display Dm11. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode of the next higher level. In the case of the hold display Dm12, for example, when the hold display Dm12 is white (actual display level Lvr1), the display mode is changed to green (actual display level Lvr3), which is the display mode of the next higher level, and the hold display Dm12. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), the display mode is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5) which is the display mode of the two upper stages. In the case of the hold display Dm13, for example, when the hold display Dm13 is white (actual display level Lvr1), the display is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4) which is the display mode of the three higher levels, and the hold display Dm13. Is blue (actual display level Lvr2), the color is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the upper three stages. In the case of the hold display Dm14, for example, when the hold display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), the display is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the upper four levels.

  When changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 is changed. In addition, the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display as the order in which the jackpot lottery is selected changes the display mode of the subsequent hold display in the displayed hold display The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepped width in the plurality of stages is increased.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggested effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggested effects according to the target whose display mode is to be changed among the displayed hold displays. Hereinafter, an effect composed of an effect and a suggestion effect that change the display mode of the hold display is also referred to as a hold effect.

  FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 89A shows a suggestion effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11. In the suggestion effect (pattern 1), the gun W1 having a short range is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode is the hold display Dm11.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. In the suggestion effect (pattern 2), the gun W2 whose range is longer than the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 and hits the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm11 or hold display Dm12) on which the bullet is hit changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode is the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12.

  FIG. 90A shows a suggestion effect (pattern 3) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. In the suggestion effect (pattern 3), a tank W3 having a cannon having a longer range than the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a shell is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) on which the shell is hit changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the hold display to be changed in display mode is the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13.

  FIG. 90B shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. In the suggestion effect (pattern 4), a missile W4 whose range is longer than the cannon of the tank W3 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, the missile W4 is fired and hits any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12, hold display Dm13, or hold display Dm14) on which the missile W4 hits changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the hold display whose display mode is to be changed is any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, and also displays the displayed hold display. Among them, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the object whose display mode is to be changed.

  For example, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90B), the hold display whose display mode may change is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. The number of stages in which the actual display level Lvr increases before and after the change of the display mode is greater when the hold display on which the missile W4 that has been hit is the hold display Dm13 than the hold display Dm12 and the hold display Dm14 rather than the hold display Dm13. growing. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes which range of the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, when the suggestion effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14 The display mode of any hold display in the range is recognized to be changed), and the hold display display mode of the hold display in the range is guessed to give the player a sense of expectation or urgency. can do.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing contents of the update process at the time of winning (first embodiment: FIG. 36) and the effect setting process (first embodiment: FIG. 37). Therefore, in this description, the update process and the effect setting process at the time of winning in this embodiment will be described, and the description of the other processes will be omitted.

<Renewal process at the time of winning>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning a prize is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the pending command handling process.

  In the update process at the time of winning a prize, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) is that a hold effect parameter setting process is added to this embodiment as step S3505. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the winning update process of the present embodiment and steps S2201 to S2204 (FIG. 36) in the winning update process of the first embodiment are the same process. Therefore, the description of the processing in steps S3501 to S3504 is omitted.

  The hold effect parameter setting process in step S3505 is a subroutine executed for setting various parameters necessary for executing the suggestion effect and changing the display mode of the hold display. Details of the hold effect parameter setting process will be described later.

  Here, the storage area for holding effect used for the parameter setting process for holding effect will be described. The parameters set by the hold effect parameter setting process are stored in the hold effect storage area included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The storage area for holding effect is a storage area provided in the sound side RAM 94 provided in the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area for holding effects. The storage area for holding effects includes a storage area for first holding effects and a storage area for second holding effects. FIG. 92A shows the first hold effect storage area, and FIG. 92B shows the second hold effect storage area.

  The storage area for the first hold effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 that are the hold display of the first hold display area Ds1. The storage area for the second holding effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the holding displays Dm21 to Dm24 that are the holding display of the second holding display area Ds2. Since the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area have the same configuration, the first hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) will be described and shown in FIG. 92 (b). The description of the second reserved effect storage area is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first hold effect storage area stores various parameters and flags for each hold game number (n) for the first start opening. The reserved game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first start port shown in the figure correspond to the hold display Dm11 to the hold display Dm14. That is, the reserved game times are executed in the order of the reserved game times (n = 1) at the first start port to the reserved game times (n = 4) at the first start port.

  As shown in the drawing, the storage area for the first holding effect includes the additional level Lva, the display level upper limit value Lvm, the actual display level Lvr, and the holding changeable flag for each holding game number (n) for the first start opening. Remember.

  The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each reserved game number (n = 1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the holding game number (n = 1) at the first starting port is fixed at 1, and the additional level Lva of the holding game number (n = 2) at the first starting port is fixed at 2. The additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 3) at the first start opening is fixed at 3, and the additional level Lva of the reserved game times (n = 4) at the first start opening is fixed at 4. Yes. When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the additional level is a display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order in which the jackpot lottery is selected among the displayed hold displays. It is possible to increase the stepwise width (difference in actual display level Lvr) in a plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display as the display mode is changed. Is a parameter corresponding to the number of stages of the actual display level Lvr that rises when the display mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger as the hold display corresponding to the value of the later jackpot random number counter C1 is the order of the jackpot lottery. In other words, it is a level value that is potentially given to each reserved game round.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each reserved game round, and each time the game round is executed, the area to be stored is adjacent. Shift to the memory area of the reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the reserved game number (n = 4) at the first start port. When each game time is executed once, the parameter is shifted to the memory area of the reserved game times (n = 3) at the first start opening in the first hold effect storage area, and the game times are executed once. If it does, it will shift to the memory area of the reserved game times (n = 2) of the 1st start opening in the memory area for the 1st reservation effect.

  The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines an upper limit value for how much the actual display level Lvr can be changed when the display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, the hold display whose display level upper limit Lvm is 5 can change the actual display level Lvr to 5. In the hold display whose display level upper limit Lvm is 3, the actual display level Lvr can be changed to 3, but the actual display level Lvr can be changed to an actual display level Lvr higher than 3, such as 4 or 5. Can not.

  The actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display as described with reference to FIG.

  The display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values stored in correspondence with the reserved game times when a game ball enters the start port and there are reserved game times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), for example, there is a reserved game number for the second start port (n = 3) and a reserved game number for the second start port (n = 4) at a certain point in time. If not, the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the reserved game times are not stored.

  The hold changeable flag is used when executing a process of changing the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, the hold change possible flag is turned ON in the hold game times that satisfy the condition that the display mode of the hold display can be changed, and is turned OFF after the hold display that changes the display mode is determined. The Hereinafter, the flowchart of the parameter setting process for hold | maintenance effects performed using the storage area for hold | maintenance effects is demonstrated.

<Holding effect parameter setting process>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the hold effect parameter setting process. The on-hold effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the update process at the time of winning (FIG. 91: S3505).

  In step S3601, display level upper limit setting processing is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit setting process will be described later. After executing the display level upper limit setting process in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

  In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the current game ball entry. The on-hold effect parameter setting process is executed every time a game ball enters the start opening. In step S3602, each time a game ball enters the start opening, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the incoming game in the storage area for one holding effect or the storage area for second holding effect. In this process, since 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the incoming game, the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the start port, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the ball. For example, When the acquired reach random number counter C3 is scheduled to execute the reach effect by the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2, or the big hit random number counter C1 acquired by the entry Is the value corresponding to the big hit lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set based on the values of various counters acquired by entering the starting port, such as setting the actual display level Lvr to a value of 2 or more. May be determined. After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, an additional level Lva is set. As described above, the value of the additional level Lva is fixed corresponding to each reserved game number. Therefore, when the reserved game number corresponding to the current game ball entry is the reserved game number (n = 1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, and the reserved game number (n = 2). In this case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and when it is a reserved game number (n = 3), 3 is set as the additional level Lva, and when it is a reserved game number (n = 4), 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

  After executing step S3603, the on-hold effect parameter setting process is terminated.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the display level upper limit setting process. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold effect parameter setting process (FIG. 93: S3601).

  In step S3701, the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

  In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the pending game round corresponding to the current game ball entry has won the jackpot lottery. Specifically, based on the information related to the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the destination determination process executed when the ball enters the starting port this time. Judgment.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game number corresponding to the current game ball entry has won the big win lottery (S3702: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit value table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the jackpot upper limit value table.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit value table. FIG. 95 (a) shows a jackpot upper limit table.

  The big hit upper limit table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. The sound light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

  As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit value table, 80 values 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 5 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm Ten values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 4, and five values of 5 to 9 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 3 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. As the value setting counter Cm, five values of 0 to 4 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 2, and 0 values of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 1. Is set. That is, in the on-hold game times that are won in the big hit lottery, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 5 is the highest.

  FIG. 95 (b) shows a reach upper limit table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3705 to be described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit value table, the reach upper limit value table is a table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are recorded in association with each other. It is. In the reserved game times where the reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that it is 5 or 3 is the highest.

  FIG. 95 (c) shows a reach non-occurrence upper limit table. The reach non-occurrence upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3706 described later. The reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is also recorded in association with each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm, similarly to the big hit upper limit value table. It is table data. In the non-reach reserved game times, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 1 is the highest, and then the probability that it is 2 is high.

  The description returns to FIG. In step S3703, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game number corresponding to the current game ball entry has not been won in the big win lottery (S3702: NO), the process proceeds to step S3704.

  In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the pending game number corresponding to the current game ball entry corresponds to a game number that causes reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game number corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Specifically, based on the information regarding the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the destination determination process executed when the ball enters the starting port this time. judge.

  If it is determined in step S3704 that the reserved game number corresponding to the current game ball entry corresponds to a game number that generates a reach (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In step S3705, the reach upper limit table is referenced. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the reach upper limit value table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3704 that the pending game number corresponding to the current game ball entry does not correspond to a game number that generates a reach (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

  In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm extracted in any of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is stored in the first hold effect storage area or the second hold effect storage area this time. Is set in the storage area of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the number of times. Thereafter, the display level upper limit value setting process is terminated.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing in the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 33: S1906).

  In the effect setting process, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) is that a hold effect setting process is added as step S3801 in the present embodiment. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of the present embodiment and steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment are the same process. Therefore, description of the processing in steps S3802 to S3815 is omitted.

  The hold effect setting process in step S3801 is executed in order to determine the reserved game times to be executed for the hold effect (the effect that changes the display mode of the suggestion effect and the hold display) and to set the content of the hold effect. Subroutine. Details of the hold effect setting process will be described below.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the hold effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

  In step S3901, a holding effect execution lottery process is executed. The holding effect execution lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the holding effect by lottery. Specifically, a value is acquired from a random number counter for lottery, and whether there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number counter among a plurality of numbers stored in preset table data for lottery. Determine whether. If there is a number corresponding to the acquired random number value among the numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the hold effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the acquired random number value, it is held It is decided not to execute the production. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

  In step S3902, it is determined whether to execute the hold effect based on the result of the hold effect execution lottery process. If it is determined in step S3902 that the holding effect is to be executed (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is not to be executed (S3902: NO), the hold effect setting process is terminated.

  In step S3903, the display level upper limit Lvm of each reserved game number is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit value of each reserved game number stored in the first reserved effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (a)) and the second reserved effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (b)). Read Lvm. After executing Step S3903, the process proceeds to Step S3904.

  In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game number is read. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game time stored in the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area is read. After executing Step S3904, the process proceeds to Step S3905.

  In step S3905, the additional level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each reserved game number, and the added value at each reserved game number is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3906.

  In step S3906, a pending game number of display level upper limit Lvm ≧ actual display level Lvr + addition level Lva is extracted. Specifically, a comparison between the added value of the actual display level Lvr calculated in step S3905 and the additional level Lva and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm is executed in each pending game round, and the added value is displayed at the display level. The reserved game times below the upper limit Lvm are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr does not reach the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is higher by the level value (addition level Lva) determined for each reserved game number. Extract pending game times that have room to change. The actual display level Lvr is not limited to the above-described extraction method, and the actual display level Lvr does not reach the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm). Other extraction methods may be used as long as it is possible to extract the reserved game times that have room to be changed higher by (addition level Lva). After executing Step S3906, the process proceeds to Step S3907.

  In step S3907, the hold change possibility flag of the hold game times which satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm ≧ actual display level Lvr + addition level Lva is turned ON. That is, the hold change possibility flag of the hold game times that can change the display mode of the hold display is turned ON. After executing Step S3907, the process proceeds to Step S3908.

  In step S3908, a hold effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the hold effect content determination process will be described later. After executing Step S3908, the process proceeds to Step S3909.

  In step S3909, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information regarding the content of the hold effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Thereafter, the hold effect setting process is terminated.

<Holding effect content determination process>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the hold effect content determination process. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 97: S3908).

  In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a pending game number for which the pending change possible flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area. To do.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the hold change enable flag is not ON (S4001: NO), the hold effect content determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4001 that the hold change possible flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the hold change enable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4002 that the hold change enable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4002: YES), the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, among the on-hold game times in which the on-hold change possible flag is ON in the first on-hold effect storage area, the on-hold game times to be executed first are determined as targets for changing the display mode of the hold display. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed first is changed as much as possible. After executing Step S4003, the process proceeds to Step S4005.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4002 that the hold change enable flag is not ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

  In step S4004, among the on-hold game times in which the on-hold change possible flag is ON in the second on-hold effect storage area, the on-hold game times to be executed first are determined as targets for changing the display mode of the hold display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  In step S4005, the value of the hold effect counter Ce is acquired. The holding effect counter Ce is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the contents of the holding effect. The holding effect counter Ce is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, after executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006.

  In step S4006, the table for determining the hold effect corresponding to the hold game number that is the target of changing the display mode of the hold display is referred to.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a hold effect determination table. The holding effect determination table is set separately for each holding game.

  In FIG. 99 (a), the game times determined as the targets for changing the hold display are the reserved game times for the first start opening (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second start opening. On-hold game determination (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, on-hold effect determination used when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed. It is a table for. In the case of n = 1, 80 values of 22 to 99 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the suggestion effect pattern 1 (see FIG. 89A) is selected. In addition, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce from which the suggestion effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 89B) is selected. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed, the probability that the suggestive effect pattern 1 is executed is high.

  In FIG. 99 (b), the game times determined to change the hold display are the reserved game times for the first start port (n = 2) or the reserved game times for the second start port (n = 2). That is, that is, the hold effect determination table used when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed. In the case of n = 2, suggestion effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 89B) is selected, and 70 values of 30 to 99 are set as the value of the counter effect counter Ce. The suggestion effect pattern 3 (see FIG. 90A) is selected, and 20 values of 10 to 29 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. Further, the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B) is selected, and ten values of 0 to 9 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed, the suggestion effect pattern 2 is most likely to be executed, and then the suggestion effect pattern 3 is executed. Probability is high.

  In FIG. 99 (c), the game times determined as the targets for changing the hold display are the reserved game times for the first start port (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (a)) or the second start port. On-hold game determination (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, on-hold effect determination used when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed. It is a table for. In the case of n = 3, 80 values of 20 to 99 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce from which the suggestion effect pattern 3 (see FIG. 90A) is selected. In addition, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the counter for suspension effect Ce from which the suggestive effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B) is selected. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88A is changed, the probability that the suggestive effect pattern 3 is executed is high.

  FIG. 99 (d) shows that the game times determined to change the hold display are the reserved game times for the first start port (n = 4) or the hold game times for the second start port (n = 4). That is, that is, the hold effect determination table used when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed. In the case of n = 4, 0 to 99 (100 pieces), which are the values of all the counters for holding effects Ce, are set in the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B). That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88A, the suggestive effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

  By setting the hold effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 2 is displayed, the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22) The display mode of changes. When the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises to one higher level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes Depending on the value of the additional level Lva, the actual display level Lvr goes up by two levels.

  For example, when the missile W4 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or the hold display Dm14 (Dm24) is displayed. Change. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr increases by two levels according to the value of the additional level Lva, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 changes, the additional level Depending on the value of Lva, the actual display level Lvr rises to a level higher by three, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr increases by four according to the value of the additional level Lva. Go up to the level.

  Therefore, by executing the suggestion effect, the player is roughly guessed which display mode of the hold display changes. Moreover, since the number of levels to which the actual display level Lvr increases differs depending on the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation.

  After executing Step S4006, the process proceeds to Step S4007.

  In step S4007, the contents of the determined hold effect are set in the hold effect command. For example, when it is determined to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the suggestion effect to be executed is the suggestion effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Is set as a command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4008.

  In step S4008, all the hold changeable flags set to ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4009.

  In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times whose display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr is changed (increased) by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for hold effect is changed to the actual display level after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of the display level Lvr. Thereafter, the on-hold effect content determination process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display is the latter As the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of is changed, the hold display is increased so that the stepwise width in the multiple stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display is increased. The display mode of is changed. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes such a process, the following effects can be obtained.

  Normally, when the hold display is displayed, the display mode is less likely to change as the remaining time until the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display becomes the target of the big win lottery becomes shorter. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display is the order in which the jackpot lottery is selected in the displayed hold display. However, the remaining display time is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the later jackpot random number counter C1, and the display mode is unlikely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially displays from the hold display corresponding to the previous jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display. I hope that will change. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display is later As the display mode is changed, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display increases. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, even if the display mode of the subsequent hold display changes relatively in the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display, the hold display Since the step-wise width in multiple stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the player is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and more A feeling can be imparted.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when determining the display mode of the hold display, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the target hold display for determining the display mode, The display mode of the display is determined. Therefore, the information about the reserved game times corresponding to other hold displays can be suggested to the player using the hold display of the target whose display mode is determined.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target to change the display mode Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display to be changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest information about the reserved game turn corresponding to the other reserved display to the player using the reserved display whose display mode is to be changed.

  Note that when determining the display mode of the hold display, a process of determining the display mode of the hold display based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is to be determined. As another example, the following processing can be executed.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold display is determined, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is to be determined is the jackpot random number counter that is the target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is advantageous to the player over the value of C1, the display mode of the hold display, which is the target for determining the display mode, is determined as a specific display mode. In addition, information about other hold indications can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the return for one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, but also executed before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the return of the reserved game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new gameability by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency more than before and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display whose display mode is changed As another example of the process for determining the display mode after the display is changed, the following process can be executed.

  For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is changed, the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed The display mode after the change of can be determined. As a result, the following playability can be realized. For example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 to be determined by the determination unit is preceded by the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is to be changed. It is possible to change to a display mode at a higher level than the display mode (a display mode that is advantageous to the player). In this way, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, so the change of the display mode of the hold display On the other hand, a player can be noticed and a sense of expectation can be given. In other words, the player can recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be noticed. In other words, in addition to the effect of executing the suggestion effect such as giving a sense of expectation or tightness, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a sense of expectation or tightness to the subsequent game times By changing the display mode of the hold display after the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency synergistically with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display. be able to.

  Moreover, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment selects a suggestion effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects in accordance with the object whose display mode is to be changed among the displayed hold displays, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, and to give the player a sense of expectation as to which of the hold displays that are targets for changing the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is executed, stepped widths in a plurality of stages of the set display mode before and after the change of the hold display to be changed (before the change of the display mode) Depending on the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the change after the change, a process of selecting a suggested effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggested effects may be employed. By doing in this way, in addition to being able to give a player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, A sense of expectation can be given to the player even for the type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to one higher level, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, two higher levels are displayed. When the display mode is changed and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the upper three levels. When the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the display mode of the four higher levels is displayed. , But before and after the change of the hold display to be changed, the stepped width in the multiple stages of the set display mode (actual display before and after the change of the display mode Another aspect may be adopted as the magnitude of the level Lvr difference).

  For example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of one higher level, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to four higher levels. When the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the six higher levels, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the 10 higher levels. When the display mode of is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the subsequent jackpot random number counter C1 in the displayed hold display is changed relative to the later. In particular, step widths (tables) in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display. As the difference between the actual display level Lvr) increases between the front change aspects and after the change, if the mode changing the display mode of the hold display, may be employed other aspects. The value of the additional level in the storage area for the first holding effect shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the storage area for the second holding effect shown in FIG. It can be realized by setting so that the order of the lottery game times becomes a relatively large value as compared to the previous reserved game times. In this case, the upper limit of the possible actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm may be set to a value larger than the maximum value of the possible additional display level Lva, such as 15 or 20. In addition, the display mode pattern of the hold display may be set corresponding to each value of the actual display level Lvr that can be taken.

  Furthermore, the number of additional-level patterns in which the order in which the jackpot lottery is to be held later becomes a relatively large value in comparison with the previous held game times in the order of the jackpot lottery is provided. It is good. That is, as in the present embodiment, a pattern in which the value of the additional level Lva corresponding to the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 is (1, 2, 3, 4) or (2, 4 , 6, 10) and a pattern of (1, 5, 8, 10), etc., and a plurality of additional level Lva patterns may be determined, and which pattern is applied may be determined by lottery.

  Further, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the processing described in the above embodiment may be applied to change the display mode of the hold display. Further, the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed by applying the process described in the above embodiment and the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed without applying the process described in the above embodiment are determined by lottery. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, but the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, etc. The determination may be made based on various parameters associated with each reserved game round. Also, the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters among these various parameters. For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the probability of setting the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr to a higher value than in the case of losing is higher, and the jackpot type counter Based on the value of C2, the probability variation jackpot may be set higher than the normal jackpot. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, when the reach occurs, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be set higher than when the reach does not occur.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the ninth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. Note that the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

I1. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
A feature of the present embodiment is that, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a holding effect (an effect that changes the display mode of the holding display and a suggestion effect) is executed. The difference from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the value of the later jackpot random number counter C1 is the order of the jackpot lottery in the displayed hold display. When the display mode of the display mode is changed, the step-wise widths in the multiple stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (actual before and after the change of the display mode). The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference in the display level Lvr is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the upper hold is higher than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display to be changed. Change to display. More precisely, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. The display mode is changed to a higher-level display mode than the display mode.

  When a specific example is shown using FIG. 88A, for example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is green and the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher display mode than green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11 that is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm12. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode is changed to a red or yellow display mode that is a display mode higher than green.

  As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is green, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, The display mode is changed to blue, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11 that is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm13, and the display mode higher than green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm12. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode is changed to a red or yellow display mode that is a display mode higher than blue and green.

  In addition, when changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 is changed. Similarly, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode is changed to a higher hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the held game times executed before the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, as in the eighth embodiment. . In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggested effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggested effects according to the target whose display mode is to be changed among the displayed hold displays.

  FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 100, the suggestion effect (pattern 1), the suggestion effect (pattern 2), and the suggestion effect that are executed prior to changing the display modes of the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14. (Pattern 3) and suggestive effects (Pattern 4) are shown.

  This suggestion effect is an effect imitating long jump. For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed. The suggestion effect (pattern 1) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running up and falls on the hold display Dm11. After the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed. The suggestion effect (pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running up and falls on the hold display Dm14. After the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes.

  In addition, also when changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, effects similar to the suggested effects described above are executed, and then the hold display Dm21, the hold display Dm22, The display mode of the hold display Dm23 or the hold display Dm24 changes.

  The suggestion effect is an effect in which the hold display that changes the display mode is determined according to the jump distance after the character Ch runs. Therefore, for example, by increasing the flight time after the character Ch jumps, it is possible to cause the player to guess which hold display is to be landed and to give a sense of expectation and tension.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, differences from the processing in the eighth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area for reserved effects in the ninth embodiment. The storage area for holding effects in the ninth embodiment includes a storage area for first holding effects and a storage area for second holding effects, as in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 101 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 101 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area.

  The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first reserved effect storage area and the second reserved effect storage area of the present embodiment do not include a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each holding game time, but in the process of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the holding display, (See FIG. 104: Step S4305). Since the other points of the storage area for holding effects of the ninth embodiment are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

<Holding effect parameter setting process>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the hold effect parameter setting process in the ninth embodiment. The on-hold effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the update process at the time of winning (FIG. 91: S3505).

  The difference between the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment and the hold effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment is the addition performed in the eighth embodiment to the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment. There is no processing for setting the level Lva in the hold information storage area 64b (FIG. 93: S3603). As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each reserved game time in the reserved information storage area 64b, but is determined in the course of a series of processes that change the display mode of the reserved display. Is done. Therefore, the process for setting the additional level Lva is not executed in the hold effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment.

  Since the other processes are the same as the hold effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Since the processing content of the display level upper limit setting process, which is a subroutine executed in step S4101, is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

<Holding effect setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the hold effect setting process in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

  Steps S4201 to S4204 of the hold effect setting process in the present embodiment and steps S3901 to S3904 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, the processing after step S4205 will be described.

  The processing in steps S4205 to S4209 is processing executed to extract a pending display that can change the display mode. That is, it is a process of extracting a hold display that can be changed to a higher hold display than the hold display display mode of the hold game times executed before the hold display to be changed.

  In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm of each reserved game time recorded in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are read, and any hold executed first. The reserved game times in which the display level upper limit value Lvm having a value larger than the actual display level Lvr value of the game times is recorded are extracted.

  The first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) will be described as an example. The display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) of the hold game number (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the hold game number ( Since n = 3) is greater than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any pending game times executed prior to n = 3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the pending game times (n = 3) are game times extracted in step S4205.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 1) of the reserved game times (n = 2) (hold display Dm12) is the value of the reserved game times (n = 1) executed before the reserved game times (n = 2). Since the actual display level is lower than Lvr (= 2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Accordingly, the reserved game times (n = 2) are game times that are not extracted in step S4205.

  Note that, among the pending game times, there is no game time to be executed prior to the reserved game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21. That is, there is no game time to be executed prior to the reserved game number (n = 1) in the first hold effect storage area. Further, there is no game time to be executed prior to the reserved game number (n = 1) in the second reserved effect storage area. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21 satisfy the condition of step S4205. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the on-hold game times corresponding to the on-hold display Dm11 and the on-hold display Dm21, if the on-hold game times exist, it is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205. Extracted in this process. After executing Step S4205, the process proceeds to Step S4206.

  In step S4206, the pending game times where the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is extracted from the held game times extracted in step S4205. That is, the reserved game times with room for changing the display mode are extracted.

  Referring to the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) as an example, the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the display level upper limit value Lvm ( = 4) Less than. Accordingly, in this case, the reserved game times (n = 3) satisfy the condition in step S4206 and are extracted by the processing.

  After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  In step S4207, the hold change possibility flag of the hold game times extracted in the process of step S4206 is turned ON. After executing Step S4207, the process proceeds to Step S4208.

  In step S4208, a hold effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the hold effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information regarding the content of the hold effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Thereafter, the hold effect setting process is terminated.

<Holding effect content determination process>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the hold effect content determination process in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold effect parameter setting process (FIG. 103: S4208).

  In step S4301, it is determined whether or not there is a pending game number for which the pending change possible flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area. To do.

  If it is determined in step S4301 that the hold change possible flag is not ON (S4301: NO), the hold effect content determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that the pending change possible flag is ON (S4301: YES), the process proceeds to step S4302.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the hold change enable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4302 that the hold change enable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4302: YES), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4303, among the held game times whose hold change possible flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the held game number that is executed most recently is determined as a target for changing the display mode of the hold display. In the eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), among the held game times whose hold change possibility flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the held game times executed first are held and displayed. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed for the held game times executed most recently. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, It is automatically assumed that the condition in step S4205 is satisfied, and extraction is performed in this processing. Therefore, in the on-hold game times corresponding to the on-hold display Dm11 and the on-hold display Dm21, there is a high possibility that the on-hold changeable flag is turned ON. In step S4303, as in the process in the eighth embodiment, the first Of the on-hold game times in which the on-hold changeable flag is ON in the on-hold effect storage area, the on-hold game times to be executed first are determined as targets for changing the display mode of the on-hold display. Further, the hold display Dm21 becomes a target for changing the display mode, and even if the display mode of the hold display is changed, it is difficult to give the player a sense of expectation or a sense of urgency. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the pending game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area, the last held game number is determined as a target for changing the display mode of the hold display. To do. After executing step S4303, the process proceeds to step S4305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the hold change enable flag is not ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

  In step S4304, among the pending game times in which the hold change possible flag is ON in the second hold effect storage area, the last held game number to be executed is determined as a target for changing the display mode of the hold display. After executing step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305.

  In step S4305, the additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, how much the display mode is changed to the upper display mode is determined. More specifically, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display is determined.

  Specifically, the difference value between the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. To do. For example, when the reserved game times corresponding to the hold display Dm13 shown in the first hold effect recording area in FIG. 101 (a) are determined to be changed, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) and a difference value (= 3) between the actual display level Lvr (= 1). Then, one value is determined from 1 to 3 which is the difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining one value, it may be determined using a random number, or the maximum possible value (3 in this specific example) may always be adopted. In this way, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process proceeds to step S4306.

  In step S4306, the content of the hold effect is determined. Specifically, the content of the suggestive effect according to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed and the display mode of the hold display after the change are determined. For example, when the object whose display mode is to be changed is the hold display Dm11, the suggested effect is determined to be the suggested effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. Similarly, when the target whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14, the suggestion effect (pattern 2), the suggestion effect (pattern 3), or the suggestion effect ( Pattern 4) is determined.

  Further, when determining the display mode of the hold display after the change, an addition value between the actual display level Lvr and the additional display level Lva of the hold display whose display mode is to be changed is calculated, and the display value corresponding to the addition value is calculated. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence between the actual display level Lvr and the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. For example, it is a case where the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm13 shown in the first hold effect recording area of FIG. 101 (a) is determined as the target whose display mode is to be changed, and the additional display level Lva is set to 2. In this case, since the added value of the actual display level Lvr (= 1) and the additional display level Lva (= 2) is 3, the display mode of the actual display level Lvr and the hold display shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold display after the change is determined to be green based on the correspondence relationship with. After executing Step S4306, the process proceeds to Step S4307.

  In step S4307, the contents of the determined hold effect are set in the hold effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4308.

  In step S4308, all the hold changeable flags set to ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4309.

  In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the reserved game times whose display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the hold effect storage area is changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of. Thereafter, the on-hold effect content determination process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that is the target to change the display mode. The display mode is changed to a higher-level display mode than the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes such a process, the following effects can be obtained.

  For example, when there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed and the player desires a change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player can change the display mode of a specific hold display. You may want to change. However, contrary to the player's wish, the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the target of the jackpot lottery after the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode The display mode of may change. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the predetermined hold display is changed, the big hit random number counter C1 that is the target of the big hit lottery is preceded by the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined hold display. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the corresponding hold display mode. Accordingly, the display of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the target of the jackpot lottery after the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode contrary to the player's desire. Even if the mode is changed, the hold display whose display mode has changed is changed to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Can be suppressed, and more expectation can be given.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment respond | corresponds to the other hold display different from the hold display of the object which determines a display mode, when determining the display mode of a hold display similarly to the said 8th Embodiment. Based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the display mode of the hold display is determined. Therefore, the information about the reserved game times corresponding to other hold displays can be suggested to the player using the hold display of the target whose display mode is determined.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target to change the display mode Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display to be changed is determined. Therefore, the information about the reserved game times corresponding to other hold displays can be suggested to the player using the hold display of the target whose display mode is to be changed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, as in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, the player can recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be noticed. In other words, in addition to the effect of executing the suggestion effect such as giving a sense of expectation or tightness, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a sense of expectation or tightness to the subsequent game times By changing the display mode of the hold display after the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency synergistically with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is executed, stepped widths in a plurality of stages of the set display mode before and after the change of the hold display to be changed (before the change of the display mode) Depending on the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the change after the change, a process of selecting a suggested effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggested effects may be employed. By doing in this way, in addition to being able to give a player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, A sense of expectation can be given to the player even for the type.

J. et al. Tenth embodiment:
It is also possible to employ suggestive effects different from those in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, other suggested effects that can be adopted will be described.

<Another example 1 of suggestion production>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the suggestion effect of this another example, the player selects a hold display that is a target for changing the display mode. Specifically, a display prompting the player to select a hold display whose display mode is to be changed within the time limit by operating the effect operation button 24 at the same time as the game times are started is displayed on the display surface 41a. To do. The time limit is set to a time that allows the player to select the hold display within the fluctuation time of the game time being executed, such as a time shorter by one second than the fluctuation time of the game time to be executed. To do.

  Each time the player operates the effect operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed on the hold display moves to the left, and the effect operation button 24 operates after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing hold display. If it is, the arrow YJ is moved again on the hold display Dm11.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (b), when the time limit expires, the hold display located under the arrow YJ is temporarily displayed as another object (in FIG. 105 (b), “smoke” object X1). This prevents the player from seeing the hold display.

  Thereafter, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105C, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  Hereinafter, the process for realizing the suggestive effect in the different example 1 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 106 shows a storage area for holding effects in the first example. FIG. 106 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area in another example 1, and FIG. 106 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area in another example 1. The storage area for holding effects in another example 1 includes a storage area for storing the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to each holding game time. The method for determining the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr for each reserved game round is the same as that in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, and is determined in the parameter setting process for hold effect.

  In the suggestion effect, when the time limit has elapsed and the reserved game number selected by the player is determined, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the selected reserved game number, and the display level upper limit value is determined. When Lvm> actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, when the reserved game number selected by the player is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is such that the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. The display mode is changed to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed, the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change aspects. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  If the reserved game number selected by the player is not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr (for example, the hold display Dm11 in FIG. 106 (a)), the display mode of the selected hold display is Do not change.

  In addition, the suggestion effect in the different example 1 can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above.

  First, a case where the suggestive effect in the different example 1 is applied to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the above-described eighth embodiment, when determining the hold display for changing the display mode, the first hold effect among the hold game times whose hold change enable flag is ON in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98). The hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed first in the storage area for storage or the second hold effect storage area is determined to be a target for changing the display mode. When the hold changeable flag for the hold display selected by the operation of the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold display hold changeable flag selected by the player by the operation of the effect operation button 24 is not ON. In such a case, a process of not changing the hold display may be applied.

  Then, by applying the suggestion effect of another example 1 and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located under the arrow is temporarily displayed with another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105B). By displaying it, the player cannot see the hold display.

  Thereafter, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105C, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  In this way, a new gameability is created in which the player selects a hold display whose display mode is to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable. Such a sense of urgency can be given to the player. Further, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, the order in which the hold display selected by the player among the existing hold displays is the target of the jackpot lottery is later. In addition, the number of stages in the display mode to be increased before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display, which is the display mode change target, is increased, and the same effect as in the eighth embodiment is achieved, and the game A sense of expectation can be given to a person.

  Next, the case where the suggestion effect in the different example 1 is applied to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment described above, when determining the hold display for changing the display mode, the first hold effect among the hold game times whose hold change enable flag is ON in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104). The hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed most recently in the storage area for storage or the second hold effect storage area is determined as a target for changing the display mode. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player operating the effect operation button 24 is not ON A process of not changing the hold display may be applied.

  Then, by applying the suggestion effect of another example 1 and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located under the arrow is temporarily displayed with another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105B). By displaying it, the player cannot see the hold display.

  Thereafter, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105C, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  In this way, a new gameability is created in which the player selects a hold display whose display mode is to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable. Such a sense of urgency can be given to the player. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, it is higher than the display mode of the hold display of the held game times executed before the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the same effects as those of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and a player can be given expectation.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to another example 1 can create new game characteristics such as allowing the player to select the hold display in the suggestion effect. Further, as described above, the suggestion effect that causes the player to select the hold display in the different example 1 can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above. Specifically, whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display is determined depending on whether or not the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is ON. Therefore, it is possible to create new game characteristics such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player himself changes.

  In this case, when the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, after the suggestion effect is executed, the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display changes can be reversed, and an unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that, as described in the eighth embodiment, also in another example 1, when the suggestion effect is executed, a plurality of display modes set before and after the change of the hold display to be changed are changed. Select a suggested effect to be executed from among multiple types of suggested effects according to the size of the stepwise width (difference in actual display level Lvr before and after the change of the display mode) You may employ | adopt the process to do. By doing in this way, in addition to being able to give a player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, A sense of expectation can be given to the player even for the type.

<Example 2 of suggestion production>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 107 (a) shows a suggestion effect in this example. FIG. 107 (b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in this example is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the suggestion effect of this another example is a suggestion effect that is fired toward a hold display that is a target for which the missile W5 changes the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this another example, the missile W5 explodes without hitting any hold display even though the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is a target to change the display mode. And as shown in FIG.107 (b), although the suggestion effect in this example is performed, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the said suggestion effect is complete | finished. . Specific processing will be described below.

  This second example also uses the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. And the hold display used as the object which changes a display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined reserved game times, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, then FIG. Like the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in b), the suggestion effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. To change.

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display whose display mode is to be changed is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. The suggestion effect similar to the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed, the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change aspects. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, when the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is to be changed, it is shown in FIG. Perform suggestive effects.

  By executing the suggestion effect in the alternative example 2 in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the player's display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. Recognition can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Another example 3 of suggestion production>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 108A shows a suggestion effect in this example. FIG. 108 (b) shows the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect in this example is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the suggestion effect of this another example is a suggestion effect that is fired toward the hold display, which is a target for which the missile W5 changes the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this separate example, the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is a target to change the display mode, and although it hits the hold display, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect ends is not changed.

  The suggestion effect can be realized by executing the same process as in the second example. Specifically, the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106 are used. And the hold display used as the object which changes a display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined reserved game times, it is determined whether the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. If the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, the process is shown in FIG. 90 (b) of the eighth embodiment. Like the suggested effect (pattern 4) shown, the suggested effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. .

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display whose display mode is to be changed is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 satisfies the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr. The suggestion effect similar to the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed, the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change aspects. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, if the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is to be changed, the suggestion effect in FIG. Execute.

  By executing the suggestion effect in the third example in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the player's display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. Recognition can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Example 4 of suggestion production>
After executing the suggestion effect, the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays may be changed. For example, in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106, when the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in two or more adjacent holding game times, The display modes of the two or more adjacent hold displays are changed substantially simultaneously.

  Prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays, for example, the following suggestive effects can be executed.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the suggestion effect. FIG. 109 (a) shows a suggestion effect in this example. FIG. 109 (b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestive effect in this example is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the suggestion effect of this another example is a suggestion effect that is fired toward a hold display that is a target for which the missile W5 changes the display mode. In the suggestion effect of this another example, the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is a target for changing the display mode, and hits two adjacent hold displays. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the display modes of two adjacent hold displays change.

  By executing the suggestion effect as described above, a player can be given a sense of expectation as to how many display modes of the hold display change after the suggestion effect is executed.

K. Eleventh embodiment:
K1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is used and demonstrated to the component provided with the same function as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of the big win or at the time of reaching. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. In this way, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

  FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning port 48. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first start port 33 is a ball entrance where a game ball can enter. The first start port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as an opportunity for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port 34 and is second. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the grand prize winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the main control device 60 executes a big hit lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable prize-winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36, 15 paying balls are paid out by the payout device 71.

  The V winning opening 48 is a entrance that allows a game ball to enter, and is a entrance that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. The V prize opening 48 is provided with an opening / closing door 48a. The open / close door 48a is opened from a closed state at a predetermined timing in a round game that occurs in an open / close execution mode that is executed in response to the jackpot lottery after winning the jackpot lottery. Return. If a game ball enters the V winning opening 48 while the open / close door 48a is open, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the round game ends. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes 120 gaming times in the gaming state of the high probability mode, the lottery mode is subsequently shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Although illustration is omitted, sorting pieces are provided on a path through which game balls from the opening / closing door 48a to the V winning opening 48 circulate. The game balls that have entered from the open / close door 48 a are distributed by the sorting pieces into a path that enters the V winning opening 48 and a path that does not enter the V winning opening 48. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 except when the opening / closing door 48a is controlled to be opened as internal control and the sorting piece is controlled in the direction to enter the V winning opening 48. Is determined to be an illegal prize, and a notification that an illegal prize has occurred is issued. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output and the LED lamp is blinked.

  Further, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is configured as a display mode until a segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a big hit lottery is performed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33. Then, the first symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first start port 33 are also referred to as first start port game times.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When the big winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second start port 34 are also referred to as second start port game times.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first holding display part 37c and a second holding display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b.

  The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first start port 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 are held.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification member opening lottery is performed with the passage of the through gate 35 as an opportunity, the universal map unit 38 causes the light emitting display to be turned on, blinked, or displayed in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. A game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is provided is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic EL display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol variation display or predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol variation display or the predetermined display triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but when a big hit is won The effect display during the opening / closing execution mode is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 112 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 112 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the drawing, a main display area MA and a first sub display area SA1 are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the first sub display area SA1, similarly to the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Specifically, when the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA, the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the first sub display area SA1, and the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA. Is displayed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. That is, the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub display area SA1 are switched and displayed in a predetermined case.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, symbols 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 112 (a). A variable display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L1. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal design in the main display area MA and the 2nd liquid crystal design is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Various modes can be adopted.

  In the first sub display area SA1, three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z4 to Z6, symbols 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as symbols for the first liquid crystal or symbols for the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 112 (a). A variable display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L2.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6, and the symbol row Z5, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the symbol change display is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L2. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal design and the 2nd liquid crystal design in 1st sub display area SA1 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol such as the number of symbol rows in the first sub-display area SA1, the number of effective lines, the direction of variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Various modes can be adopted as the mode.

  In the present embodiment, the same type of symbol is employed as the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, symbols having the numbers 1 to 8 were employed as the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design. In this way, by making the symbol displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol the same as the symbol displayed as the second liquid crystal symbol, for example, the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed. When the display area is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the display switching of the liquid crystal symbols. In addition, the player can recognize whether the liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 is the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. Can be difficult. In this way, for example, from the state where the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, the second display area MA is displayed in the main display area MA. When switching to a state in which the two liquid crystal symbols are displayed and the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, natural display switching can be performed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Further, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, the display is performed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. Regardless of the type of symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol), the player is concentrated on the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA, or the main display area MA or the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. It is possible to add a game characteristic that allows the player to guess whether the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the one sub-display area SA1 is the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol.

  Moreover, a different kind of design can also be employ | adopted between the design for 1st liquid crystals, and the design for 2nd liquid crystals. For example, eight symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 may be employed as the first liquid crystal symbols, and eight symbols indicating alphabets A to H may be employed as the second liquid crystal symbols. In this way, the player can determine which of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in each of the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. It can be easily identified. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the game situation.

  Also, different types of symbols can be employed between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. For example, eight symbols indicating numerals 1 to 8 are adopted as the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA, and eight alphabet letters A to H are displayed as the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. You may adopt the design. Furthermore, a display mode for displaying different types of symbols (the symbols 1 to 8 and the symbols A to H of the alphabet) between the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, and the main display area MA You may combine with the display mode which displays a symbol of a different kind between 1st sub display area SA1. Thus, various display modes can be adopted as the display mode of the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the liquid crystal general-purpose display area NA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the liquid crystal general symbol display area NA, a symbol corresponding to the universal symbol unit 38 is displayed. Specifically, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the electric-powered object opening lottery performed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 is displayed. In the present embodiment, three numbers 1 to 8 are vertically displayed in the liquid crystal normal display area NA. The three numbers arranged vertically vary with periodicity. After the variable display, a set of three numbers vertically is displayed in a stopped state.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls held in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four each.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights in synchronization with the first symbol change display and the stop display displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 that performs display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37 Part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, The 1-synchronization display section Sync1 is turned on. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 is blinking, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronous display is performed. The part Sync2 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first sub display area SA1, the first synchronous display section Sync1, and the second synchronous display section Sync2. A configuration may be employed in which 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

K2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning holes such as a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, a V winning port 48, Various detection sensors provided in the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, The open / close door drive unit 48b for opening / closing the open / close door 48a and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 44b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. The drive control of the opening / closing door drive unit 48b is executed so that the opening / closing door 48a to be closed is opened / closed. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first start opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 is specified. The main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are variably displayed are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 45, the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, a jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the first start port 44, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of the incoming ball are stored in the hold information. Stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b in time series. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in time series.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / failure table stored in the hit / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not a big hit is made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is used as the first value in the determination processing execution area 64c. A process of moving to the execution area, checking with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and determining whether or not it is a big hit, and a game ball has entered the second start port 34 In this case, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and the determination table stored in the determination table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 The process of collating and determining whether or not to win is executed in parallel. In the following, it is determined whether or not a big hit is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 33, and is a big win triggered by the entrance of a game ball into the second start opening 34? A pachinko machine capable of executing the determination process of whether or not in parallel and simultaneously performing the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display unit 37b. Also called.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the second starting port 34 is updated. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 112 (b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol is displayed in the symbol row Z2, and a reach is achieved. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  As another specific example, in the first sub-display area SA1 of the display surface 41a in FIG. 112B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbol as Z4 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z6. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z5 is subjected to the variable display of the symbol to reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 465, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. A lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, when C4 = 0 to 463, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and when C4 = 464 and 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb are also called holding information.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery. When the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the case of jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. And a success / failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when a game ball enters the second start port 34, and storing them as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first start / failure table (low probability mode), a first start / fail table (high probability mode), and a second start / fail table (low probability mode). The four success / failure tables for the probability mode and the second start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success / failure table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first start opening determination table. FIG. 115 (a) shows a first start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 115 (b) shows a first start port success / failure table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot, in the first startup pass / fail table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the five values 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are out of place. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the first start / failure table (for high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values 0 to 15 are out of place. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table for the second start port. FIG. 116 (a) shows a second start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 116 (b) shows a second start port success / failure table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the success / failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode). . Also, 500 values from 5 to 504 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 as the first small hit, and 50 values from 505 to 554 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 as the second small hit. Then, 50 values of 555 to 604 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the third small hit. And values other than 605 values of 0 to 604 are out of the values of 0 to 1199.

  Here, the “small winning” is a trigger result for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing of the variable winning device 36 is performed, but is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode to be described later. is there. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit, the second small hit, and the third small hit are set as the small hits. In the first small hit, as the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 1.6 sec is released once. In the second small hit, as the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 60 msec is opened six times. In the third small hit, as the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 60 msec is opened eight times.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the second start opening / failing table (for high probability mode). . Also, 500 values of 16 to 515 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 as the first small hit, and 50 values of 516 to 565 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 as the second small hit. Then, 50 values 566 to 615 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than 616 values 0 to 615 are out of place.

  As described above, in the success / failure table for the second start port, similarly to the success / failure table for the first start port, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode. ing. Further, in the success / failure table for the second start port, in both of the success / failure table for the low probability mode and the success / failure table for the high probability mode, the small hit (the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit) If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to 500, and the jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port, the jackpot number will be 500/1200 with a probability of 500/1200. It is set to become.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door 36b of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after opening / closing execution mode ends

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball (winning) in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. In the present embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is continued until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. Is set as follows. On the other hand, two types of low frequency winning modes are set. The first is a low frequency that is set so that one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds elapses or the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten. It is a winning mode. The second is a low frequency that is set so that one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode continues until 0.06 seconds elapses or the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten. It is a winning mode.

  Note that the opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the occurrence of entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sorting table in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 117A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 117B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to when the big hit lottery based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to in the case of lottery lottery based on the entrance of game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the sorting table for the first starting port, as the jackpot type based on the game ball entering the first starting port 33, the 8R type 1 jackpot and the 8R number Two types of big hits are set.

  In the 8R type 1 big hit, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened eight times (8 rounds), and the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. It is. In addition, the 8R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the V prize opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When a game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of executions of the first start port game times and the second start port game times executed in the high probability mode is limited. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, if the winning ball is further won and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, in the high probability mode executed so far The number of game times is reset, and after a round game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity, a count of 120 game times is executed again from the game times in the high probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, when a big win is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  In the 8R type 2 big hit, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed 8 times (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. It is. In addition, the 8R type 2 big hit is a big hit that the V winning opening 48 is opened for 0.006 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, but the opening time of the V winning opening 48 is 0.006 seconds. The probability that a game ball wins the V winning opening 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is substantially the low probability mode.

  In this way, the first type jackpot is longer than the second kind jackpot, because the open time of the V winning opening 48 during the round game is longer, and it is easier for a game ball to enter the V winning opening 48. The probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end becomes the high probability mode is high. On the other hand, the second type jackpot is shorter than the first type jackpot because the opening time of the V winning opening 48 during the round game is short, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V winning opening 48. The probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery becomes the high probability mode is very low.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 19” corresponds to the 8R type 1 jackpot, and “20 to 39” corresponds to the 8R second jackpot. It is set to correspond to the seed hit.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the sorting table for the second starting port, as the jackpot type based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34, 16R type 1 jackpot and 8R number One kind of big hit is set.

  In the 16R type 1 big hit, the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened and closed 16 times (16 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. It is. Also, the 16R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot where the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the 13th round of the round game. When a game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of executions of the first start port game times and the second start port game times executed in the high probability mode is limited. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, if the winning ball is further won and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, in the high probability mode executed so far The number of game times is reset, and after a round game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity, a count of 120 game times is executed again from the game times in the high probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, when a big win is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  As described above, the 8R type 1 big hit is 8 times (8 rounds) of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode, and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is as follows. Is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, the 8R type 1 big win is a lottery lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends on the condition that the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game and a game ball enters the V winning opening 48 The lottery mode is a big hit that becomes a high probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of executions of the first start port game times and the second start port game times executed in the high probability mode is limited. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

  In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 19” corresponds to the 16R type 1 jackpot, and “20 to 39” is the 8R first jackpot. It is set to correspond to the seed hit.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, 2 The difference between the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 34 and a clear difference in the advantage for the player are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball in the same mode is continued in the same mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of becoming an electrification opening win in the electric accessory release lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the time for opening the electric utility item 34a once is set longer when the power combination is won than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the electrification state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next one after the completion of the one disengagement state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric actor release lottery is performed after the first electric agent release lottery than in the low-frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball enters the second start port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success / failure table (electricity accessory release lottery success / failure table) used when executing the electrical accessory release lottery.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode), 464 values of 0 to 463 are set as the values of the electric agent release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. Two values of 464 and 465 are set as the values of the electric component release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electrified product release lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electrified role is won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the high-frequency support mode, the electrical accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows an electrical accessory release lottery acceptance / rejection table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the values of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electrified role release lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electrified role is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

K3. Gaming machine playability:
Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 114, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not a big hit is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, and the second start opening 34. This is a simultaneous variable machine that executes in parallel a determination process for determining whether or not a big hit is triggered by the entry of a game ball. Therefore, a game ball triggered by the game ball launched by the player operating the operation handle 25 entering the first start port 33 (first start port game cycle), and the game ball 2. The game times (second game times for starting) triggered by entering the starting hole 34 are executed in parallel.

  In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electrified object release lottery is executed, and in the high frequency support mode, the power combination is won with a probability of 232/233, and the low frequency support mode is selected. At the time, the winning role is elected with a probability of 231/233. Therefore, when a game ball is distributed to the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electric accessory 34a is opened with a high probability. That is, when the game ball is distributed to the right side of the game board 30, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second start port 34 with a high probability. Accordingly, the player adjusts the launch strength of the game ball using the operation handle 25, distributes the game ball to the left side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), and causes the game ball to enter the first start port 33. At the same time, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111) to enter the game ball into the second start port 34, and the first start port game times and the second start port game times are arranged in parallel. Can be executed automatically.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the second start opening game times is very long compared to the variation time of the first start opening game times. Is set. Specifically, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of one game time for the first start opening game time is in the range of 5 seconds to 2 minutes, and the variation of one game time for the second start opening game time. The time is set to 10 minutes.

  On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of the second start opening game times is set to be shorter than the variation time of the first start opening game times. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of one game time of the first start opening game time is 1 minute, and the variation time of one game time of the second start opening game time is 0.5. Seconds.

  Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment distributes the game ball on the left side of the game board 30 and enters the game ball into the first start port 33 to perform the first start port game. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, there is a flow of a game in which a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and a game ball is inserted into the second start port 34 to execute the second start port game. , It has a playability that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as shown in the success / failure table for the second starting opening in FIG. 116 (b), in the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the probability is ½. Win a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit). In the case of winning a small hit, the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the opening / closing door 36b is opened, the game ball enters the big winning opening 36a, and the prize ball is paid out to the player. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player distributes the game ball to the right side of the game board 30, thereby adding a small hit (first small hit, In some cases, it is possible to obtain a prize ball based on the entrance to the big prize opening 36a opened by the second small hit and the third small hit).

  As described above, the standard game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as follows.

  During the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball enters the first start port 33.

  Win a jackpot lottery based on game balls entering the first starting port 33. If the jackpot is a type 2 jackpot, 100 rounds of game play are executed in the high frequency support mode after a round game. Is possible. In this case, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, an electrification opening winning is generated based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the electric starter 34 a is opened to the second start opening 34 in a state where the electrification accessory 34 a is opened. A game ball is entered, and a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port is executed. Even if the big win lottery based on the game ball entering the second start opening 34 is not a big hit, if the lottery result is a small hit, the open / close door 36b is opened, so that the game ball is inserted into the big winning port 36a. In some cases, a prize ball can be obtained.

  If the jackpot lottery is not won in the jackpot lottery during 100 games in the high frequency support, the mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The lottery mode is a low probability mode. When the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 33 again.

  In the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 to enter the first start port 33, and a big hit based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 If a lottery is won and the jackpot is a first-class jackpot, and a game ball enters the V winning port 48 during a round game, the high probability mode and high frequency will be played after the round game. 120 games can be executed in the support mode. In this case, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, an electrification opening winning is generated based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the electric starter 34 a is opened to the second start opening 34 in a state where the electrification accessory 34 a is opened. A game ball is entered, and a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port is executed. Even if the big win lottery based on the game ball entering the second start opening 34 is not a big hit, if the lottery result is a small hit, the open / close door 36b is opened, so that the game ball is inserted into the big winning port 36a. In some cases, a prize ball can be obtained.

  If the jackpot lottery is not won during the 120 games in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode and from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Migrate to When the mode is shifted to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 33 again.

  In the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, when the jackpot lottery is won in 120 game rounds and the jackpot is the first type jackpot, the game ball is placed in the V winning port 48 during the round game. When a player enters the game, 120 games can be executed again in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the round game.

If you win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery during 120 games in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot is a type 2 jackpot, then after the round game, the low probability mode and the high frequency support 100 games can be executed in the mode.
In the above, the playability of this game machine was demonstrated.

K4. Process overview:
<Result image>
FIG. 119 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. In this time chart, the first start opening game times, the second start opening game times, the special 2 main display flag, the high probability mode flag, and the display mode in the symbol display device 41 are shown.

  The numbers (115 to 125) indicated on the convex portions of the waveform indicating the execution of the first start opening game times and the waveform convex portions indicating the execution of the second start opening game times are the latest type 1 hits The number of game times that have been executed since the high probability mode was started as a trigger (hereinafter also referred to as “game number of times after probability change”) is shown. That is, the time chart of FIG. 119 shows a state in which 120 game times in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are completed (time Tm4), and the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  In the example shown in the time chart of FIG. 119, in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the player causes the second start port 34 to enter a game ball for the second start port (see FIG. 119). 119, the number of game times after the probability change is 115 to 120), and the first start opening game time by entering the first start opening 33 with the transition to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. (Game times after probability change game times of 121 to 125 in FIG. 119). As described in the gaming characteristics of the above gaming machine, the variation time of the second start game times when the number of game times after probability change is 115 to 120 is 0.5 seconds (eg, times Tm1 to Tm2 = 0.5 seconds).

  The special 2 main display flag is a flag used for switching between the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. The special 2 main display flag is turned ON when the high-frequency support mode is started, and turned OFF when the low-frequency support mode is started. However, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, a game ball is inserted into the second start port 34 to execute the second start port game round and win the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as “special jackpot”). The special 2 main display flag is not turned ON when the high-frequency support mode is started at the timing of the above.

  As can be seen from the correspondence between the special 2 main display flag shown in FIG. 119 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41, when the special 2 main display flag is ON, the game for the second start port is displayed in the main display area MA. The second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the time is displayed, and the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game time is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. On the other hand, when the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second sub display area SA1 has the second A second liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the start opening game times is displayed.

  As described in the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment distributes the gaming balls to the left side of the gaming board 30 in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the gaming balls are the first. The first start opening game is executed by entering the start opening 33, and in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (including the low probability mode), the game balls are distributed on the right side of the game board 30. Thus, the flow of the game in which the game ball is caused to enter the second start port 34 and the game times for the second start port are executed has a game property that is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the player executes the first start game and the second start game according to the game of the game machine, in accordance with the game. A liquid crystal symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the game time to be executed is displayed in the main display area MA. In the chart showing the display mode of the symbol display device shown in FIG. 119, the second sub display area SA2 is shown. The second sub display area SA2 will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last game time (hereinafter also referred to as the final specific game time) executed before the end of the high probability mode. The fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time. More specifically, using FIG. 119, immediately after the start of the last game time to be executed before the end of the high-probability mode (the game time for the second start port is the 120th game time after the probability change). The game time execution time after the probability change is 121 game times change time (time Tm5 to Tm7), and the game time change time after game change is 122 times (time Tm8 to Tm9). Are set to 12 seconds.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 displays a result image, which is an image indicating information related to the privilege given to the player during the high probability mode, during the execution of the two game times with the variation time set to 12 seconds in the main display area. Display on MA for 10 seconds.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a result image in the symbol display device 41. FIG. 120 (a) shows a display mode of the symbol display device 41 until the game number of the 120th game number after the probability change is completed. FIG. 120 (b) shows a period in which the two game times executed immediately after the last game time (hereinafter referred to as the last specific game time) executed before the end of the high probability mode is executed. The display mode of the symbol display apparatus 41 in the period when the result image is displayed is shown. FIG. 120C shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after the display of the result image is completed. 120 corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 up to time Tm4 (FIG. 119), and FIG. 120 (b) shows the time relationship from time Tm4 to time Tm4. Corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 up to Tm6, FIG. 120 (c) corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after time Tm6.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), until the number of game times after probability change is up to 120, the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 (display surface 41a) has a symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times. The second liquid crystal symbol is displayed, and in the first sub-display area SA1, the first liquid crystal symbol that is the symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed.

  The symbol display device 41 displays a guidance display GD1. The guidance display GD1 is a guidance display indicating that it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30. As described above, since the number of game times after probability change is up to 120 times, it is in the high-frequency support mode, and it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the right side of the game board 30. 41 displays a guidance display GD1. By displaying the guidance display GD1, it is possible to guide the player about a gaming method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time (in this embodiment, the game time after probability change is 120th game time) is started. In the period in which the result image is displayed, the result image is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and in the first sub-display area SA1, the game time for the second start opening is displayed. A second liquid crystal design which is a corresponding design is displayed. As described with reference to FIG. 119, since the special 2 main display flag is turned off at the end of the last specific game time (the game time after the probability change is 120th game time), the main display area MA includes The basic process is to display a first liquid crystal symbol that is a symbol corresponding to the game time for one start opening. However, since the result image is displayed in the main display area MA, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second sub display area SA2 is provided at the upper left portion of the display surface 41a, and the second sub display area The first liquid crystal design is displayed at SA2. By doing in this way, the fall of the visibility of the pattern for 1st liquid crystals when a result image is displayed can be suppressed.

  The symbol display device 41 displays a guidance display GD2. The guidance display GD2 is a guidance display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the left side of the game board 30. As described above, after completion of the 120th game number of times after the probability change, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, since it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the left side of the game board 30, the guidance display GD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By displaying the guidance display GD2, the player can be guided to a gaming method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120C, after the display of the result image is completed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. The second liquid crystal symbol is displayed on the screen.

  Here, the result image will be described. As described above, the result image is an image indicating information related to the privilege granted to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when the first type jackpot is shifted to the high probability mode, the first type jackpot may be won again during the high probability mode, and the high probability mode may continue. During the high probability mode, the number of times that the first type jackpot was won and the high probability mode was won again, and information on prize balls that were paid out by winning the jackpot were given to the player during the high probability mode. Information about the privilege is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a result image.

  Next, another example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  FIG. 121 is a time chart for explaining another example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. The time chart shown in FIG. 121 shows that the number of times of game play after probability change is 121th, even though the game time for the second start opening with the 120th game turn after probability change has ended and the high probability mode has ended. The case where the game start time for 2nd opening is performed as game times is shown. Such a time chart is obtained when there is a reserved game number for the second start port at the time when the second start port game number of the 120th game number of times after the probability change is completed, or after the probability change This is a case where the game ball enters the second start port 34 before and after the game start for the second start port whose game times have been executed 120 times.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first start game time and the second start game time are executed in parallel. Therefore, as shown in the time chart of FIG. During the execution of the second start opening game number of 121 times, the first start opening game number of 122 times of post-probability game number execution may be executed in parallel.

  Even in such a case, as in the example described with reference to FIG. 119, the two times executed immediately after the start of the last game round (final specific game round) to be executed before the end of the high probability mode. The variation time in the game times is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time. That is, the variation time of the second start opening game number of 121 times the probability change game times and the first start opening game number of 122 times the probability change game times is set to 12 seconds. Then, after the final specific game round is completed, the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for 10 seconds.

  That is, as shown in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in the time chart of FIG. 121, the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 includes up to 120 game times after the probability change (final specific game times). A second liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times is displayed, and a first liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. Is displayed.

  In the period in which the last two game times are executed after the start of the last specific game time and the result image is displayed, the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 is displayed in the main display area MA. A result image is displayed, and in the first sub-display area SA1, a second liquid crystal symbol that is a symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times is displayed.

  After the display of the result image is completed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. .

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays the result image which shows the information regarding the privilege provided to the player at the time of high probability mode on the symbol display apparatus 41, when high probability mode is complete | finished. Since the player needs several seconds to visually recognize the information displayed as the result image and understand the displayed content, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment displays the result image for a certain time of 10 seconds. indicate.

  For this purpose, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment predetermines the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after starting the last specific game time in order to display the result image on the symbol display device 41. Set the time to 12 seconds.

  In the case of a simultaneous variable machine, either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time is executed during the period of executing either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time. May be executed. Accordingly, during the period in which the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, for example, the first start opening game round is ended and a new first start opening game round is started, or the second start opening game is started. In some cases, the game ends and a new second start game time is started. Hereinafter, the start timing of game times and the end timing of game times are also referred to as “game time breaks”.

  If “separation of game times” occurs during the period in which the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player may have a complicated impression. Further, there is a possibility that the player cannot concentrate on the result of the big hit lottery at each game round.

  When displaying a result image on the symbol display device 41, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment displays a variation time of a plurality of game times executed in parallel or in parallel to display the result image (this embodiment). 10 seconds) or longer (12 seconds), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of game time breaks during the period in which the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, since the game times in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, are the two game times executed most recently after the start of the last specific game time, a result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is possible to minimize the number of game times set to a variation time equal to or longer than the time during which the result image is displayed while suppressing the occurrence of game time breaks during the current period.

<Demo image>
FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a demo image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The demo image is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the game times are not started for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, a moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a demo moving image) is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a demo image. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment displays a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 when the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time is not started for a predetermined period or more.

  Specifically, when the first start opening game times are not started for a predetermined period or longer, the display area (the first liquid crystal design) corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed at that time ( In the main display area MA or the first sub display area SA1), a demonstration video for the area is displayed. In addition, when the second start opening game times are not started for a predetermined period or longer, a display area (main display area) displaying a symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times (second liquid crystal design). In the MA or the first sub display area SA1), a demonstration video for the area is displayed.

  Normally, in a pachinko machine, a demo video is displayed on the entire display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when neither the first start opening game time nor the second start opening game time is started for a predetermined period or longer. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first start opening game time and the second start opening game time are set with a time until the demonstration video is displayed separately, and the main display Demo videos are displayed in the area MA and the first sub display area SA1, respectively.

  In FIG. 122 (a), a demo video is displayed in the main display area MA, and the game times (first start port game times or second start ports) corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 are displayed in the first sub display area SA1. The game pattern is displayed (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol).

  The state shown in FIG. 122A when the special 2 main display flag is OFF is as follows. The first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game time is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start opening game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In the case where the game ball does not enter the first start opening 33 and the first start opening game turn is not started for a predetermined period, the demonstration video set for the main display area MA in the main display area MA Is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the second start opening game times are being executed, the second liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the second start opening game times are displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  The state shown in FIG. 122A when the special 2 main display flag is ON is as follows. A second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In the case where the game ball does not enter the second start opening 34 and the second start opening game turn is not started for a predetermined period, the demonstration video set for the main display area MA is set in the main display area MA. Is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the first start opening game times are being executed, the first liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first start opening game times are displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  FIG. 122 (b) shows the main display area MA of the game times (first start port game times or second start port game times) corresponding to the main display area MA (first liquid crystal pattern or second A liquid crystal symbol) is displayed, and a demonstration moving image is displayed in the first sub display area SA1.

  The state shown in FIG. 122B when the special 2 main display flag is OFF is as follows. The first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In this case, when the game ball does not enter the second start opening 34 and the second start opening game turn is not started, the first sub display area SA1 is set for the first sub display area SA1. The demo video is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the first start opening game times are being executed, the first liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first start opening game times are displayed in the main display area MA.

  The state shown in FIG. 122B when the special 2 main display flag is ON is as follows. A second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start opening game time is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In this case, when the game ball does not enter the first start port 33 and the first start port game turn is not started, the demonstration set for the first sub display region SA1 in the first sub display region SA1. A moving image is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the second start opening game times are being executed, the second liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the second start opening game times are displayed in the main display area MA.

  In FIGS. 122A and 122B, a demo video is displayed in either the main display area MA or the first sub display area SA1, and a symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in the other. Although the displayed example is shown, if each of the game times corresponding to both display areas does not start for a predetermined period or longer, both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 The corresponding demo video is displayed. That is, the demo video for the main display area MA shown in FIG. 122A is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. 122B is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. Demo video for is displayed.

  In addition, when the game times corresponding to the display area in which the demo video is displayed are started during the display of the demo video, the display area displays the symbols corresponding to the game times from the display of the demo video. Return to.

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect moving image and a demo moving image.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a case where an RTC effect moving image is displayed when a symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. . In this case, the symbols corresponding to the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a layer image higher than the layer image corresponding to the RTC effect moving image.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a case where the RTC video effect is started in a state where the demo video can be displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the main display area MA is in a state where a demo video can be displayed, when the RTC effect video is displayed, the RTC effect video is displayed with priority. Display of the demo video starts after the RTC effect video ends. On the other hand, the demo video is preferentially displayed in the first sub display area SA1 even when the RTC effect video is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if a game turn corresponding to the main display area MA is started, the main display area MA is displayed as in the main display area MA shown in FIG. 123 (a). The corresponding game times symbol is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game turn corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is not started, the first sub display area SA1 is maintained in the state where the demo moving image is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if a game turn corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is started, the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. The game times corresponding to one sub display area SA1 is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game times corresponding to the main display area MA are not started, the main display area MA maintains the state in which the RTC effect video is displayed with priority over the demo video, Display of the demo video will start after the end.

K5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S5101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. Specifically, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (entrance detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5102.

  In step S5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5103.

  In step S5103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, a start-up entrance process for entering the game balls into the first start-up opening 33 and the second start-up opening 34 is executed. Details of the ball entry processing for the start port in step S5104 will be described later. After executing Step S5104, the process proceeds to Step S5105.

  In step S5105, a through gate entry process for entering (passing) a game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through gate entry process in step S5105 will be described later. After executing step S5105, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pick-up processing for starter>
Next, the ball entering process for the start port will be described. The starting ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 124: S5104).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a start port. In step S5201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (start winning prize). If it is determined in step S5201 that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5203.

  In step S5203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5204.

  In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S5204, when the first start reserved number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S5204: NO), the starting process for the start port is ended.

  On the other hand, if the first start hold number RaN is less than the upper limit in step S5204 (S5204: YES), the process proceeds to step S5205, and 1 is added to the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5206.

  In step S5206, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reserved area, that is, step In S5205, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start hold number RaN obtained by adding 1. After executing Step S5206, the process proceeds to Step S5207.

  In step S5207, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, whether or not the jackpot lottery determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach This is a process of determining whether or not there is a hold before the hold information becomes a target of a big win lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. After executing Step S5207, the process proceeds to Step S5208.

  In step S5208, processing for setting the first hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the first hold command.

  The first hold command indicates that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 and that the hold information is the main control based on the determination result by the pre-determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball. This is a command for the control device on the sub-side to recognize before being a target of the big hit lottery by the device 60. The first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of a normal process described later.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the first hold command transmitted based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the sound emission control device 90 in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5209, and whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S5209 that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5211. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5209 that the game ball has not entered the second start port 34 (S5209: NO), the start process for the start port is terminated.

  In step S5211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5212.

  In step S5212, it is determined whether or not the second start reserved number RbN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S5212, when the second start reserved number RbN is not less than the upper limit value (S5212: NO), the starting processing for the start port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S5212, if the second start reserved number RbN is less than the upper limit value (S5212: YES), the process proceeds to step S5213, and 1 is added to the second start reserved number RbN in the second reserved area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5214.

  In step S5214, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reserved area, ie, step In S5213, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1. After executing Step S5214, the process proceeds to Step S5215.

  In step S5215, a destination determination process is executed. As described above, the first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which the determination of the type, the presence / absence of reach, etc. is executed before the hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. After executing Step S5215, the process proceeds to Step S5216.

  In step S5216, processing for setting the second hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the second hold command.

  The second hold command indicates that the game ball has entered the second start port 34 and the determination result by the pre-determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the received ball, the hold information is the main control. This is a command for the control device on the sub-side to recognize before being a target of the big hit lottery by the device 60. The second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of a normal process described later.

  In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the second hold command transmitted based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After step S5216 is executed, the ball entry process for the start port is terminated.

<Through gate entry processing>
Next, a through gate entry process for the through gate will be described. The through gate entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 124: S5105).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a through gate. In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S5301 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S5301: YES), the process proceeds to step S5302, and whether the number of reserved items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. It should be noted that the number of held articles SN is a value indicating the number of balls entering the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric combination opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory reserve number SN (S5302: YES), the process proceeds to step S5303, and 1 is added to the accessory reserve number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5304.

  In step S5304, the value of the motor combination release counter C4 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 124) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the power combination holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Subsequently, the through gate entry process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5301 that a game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S5301: NO), and in step S5302, it is determined that the value of the reserved item number SN is not less than the upper limit value. (S5302: NO), the entry process for the through gate is terminated without storing the value of the electric charge release counter C4 in the electric charge holding area 64d of the RAM 64.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S5401, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5402.

  In step S5402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a change command and a hold command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5404.

  In step S5404, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, setting of symbol change display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S5405, the process proceeds to Step S5406.

  In step S5406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5407.

  In step S5407, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the motor combination 34a provided at the second start port 34 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5408.

  In step S5408, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing Step S5408, the process proceeds to Step S5409.

  In step S5409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (after the second round, the start of the command output process in step S5402). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached.

  If it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S5409: NO), in steps S5410 and S5411, the next normal process execution timing is reached. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S5410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S5411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S5409: YES), the process returns to step S5402, and the processes from step S5402 to step S5408 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S5402 to step S5408 changes according to the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 127: S5405).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing. In step S5501, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5501 that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed (S5501: YES), the game turn control process is terminated without executing any processes after step S5502. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed (S5501: NO), the process proceeds to step S5502.

  In step S5502, it is determined whether or not the special 1 changing flag is ON. The special 1 changing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is changing in the first symbol display portion 37a. The first flag is triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33. It is turned on when the symbol on the symbol display section 37a starts to change, and turned OFF when the symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S5502 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S5502: NO), the process proceeds to step S5503.

  In step S5503, a variation start process for the first symbol display unit is executed. The variation start process for the first symbol display unit is a process for starting the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a. Details of the variation start process for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S5503, the process proceeds to Step S5504.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5502 that the special 1 variation flag is ON (S5502: YES), the process proceeds to step S5504 without executing the variation start process for the first symbol display unit in step S5503. move on.

  In step S5504, it is determined whether or not the special 2 changing flag is ON. The special 2 changing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is changing in the second symbol display section 37b. The second flag is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a flag that is turned on when the symbol on the symbol display unit 37b starts to change and turned OFF when the symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 changing flag is not ON (S5504: NO), the process proceeds to step S5505.

  In step S5505, the variation start process for the second symbol display unit is executed. The variation start process for the second symbol display unit is a process for starting the variation of the symbol in the second symbol display unit 37b. Details of the variation start process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S5505, the process proceeds to Step S5506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 variation flag is ON (S5504: YES), the process proceeds to step S5506 without executing the variation start process for the second symbol display unit in step S5505. move on.

  In step S5506, change stop processing is executed. The fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Details of the change stop process will be described later. After executing step S5506, the game times control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first symbol display section>
Next, the variation start process for the first symbol display unit will be described. The variation start process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 128: S5503).

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first symbol display unit. In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the value of the first start suspension number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S5601: NO), the process proceeds to step S5602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is 0 (S5601: YES), the variation start process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  In step S5602, a game number counting process is executed. The game number counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (design fluctuations) executed after the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode is started. Details of the game count processing will be described later. After executing step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, a hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is executed. The hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is a process for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Details of the hold information shift processing for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S5603, the process proceeds to Step S5604.

  In step S5604, determination processing for the first symbol display unit is executed. In the determination process for the first symbol display unit, the big hit lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. , Distribution determination for allocating the jackpot type, and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the first symbol display unit will be described later. After executing Step S5604, the process proceeds to Step S5605.

  In step S5605, a variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is executed. In the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit, a variation time that is a time from when the symbol of the first symbol display unit starts to stop until the symbol is stopped is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S5605, the process proceeds to Step S5606.

  In step S5606, high probability mode end processing is executed. The high-probability mode end process is a process for ending the high-probability mode when a predetermined number of times (120 in this embodiment) determination processing (big hit lottery) is executed after shifting to the high-probability mode. Details of the high probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing Step S5606, the process proceeds to Step S5607.

  In step S5607, a special 1 variation command is set. The special 1 variation command includes information indicating that the game time started this time is related to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 33. , Information on presence / absence of jackpot, information on type of jackpot, information on presence / absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation time set in step S5604. The set special 1 variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). Based on the received special 1 variation command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S5607, the process proceeds to Step S5608.

  In step S5608, the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5609, and the special 1 changing flag is turned ON. After step S5609 is executed, the variation start process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

<Game count processing>
Next, the game number counting process will be described. The number-of-games count process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5602) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the game count processing. In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the ST game frequency count flag is ON. The ST game frequency count flag is a flag referred to for determining whether or not it is necessary to count the number of game times after the high probability mode is started. If it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game count flag is ON (S5701: YES), the process proceeds to step S5702, and 1 is added to the value of the ST game count counter PNC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game count flag is not ON (S5701: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing the processes of steps S5702 to S5704.

  In step S5703, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 123 or not. If it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 123 (S5703: YES), the process proceeds to step S5704, and the ST game number count flag is turned OFF. This is because in this embodiment, it is not necessary to count the number of game times after the high probability mode is started after 123 times. After executing Step S5704, the process proceeds to Step S5705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not 123 (S5703: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing step S5704.

  In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the electric support game number count flag is ON. The game support count flag for electric support needs to count the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started when the high frequency support mode is started without the transition to the high probability mode. It is a flag referred to for determining whether or not. If it is determined in step S5705 that the electric support game count flag is ON (S5705: YES), the process proceeds to step S5706, and 1 is added to the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5705 that the electric support game count flag is not ON (S5705: NO), the process of counting the number of games is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5706 to S5708.

  In step S5707, it is determined whether the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is 100 or not. If it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is 100 (S5707: YES), the process proceeds to step S5708, and the electric support game number count flag is turned OFF. This is because, in this embodiment, when the high frequency support mode is started without the transition to the high probability mode, the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started is 100 or more. This is because there is no need to count. After executing step S5708, the game number counting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is not 100 (S5707: NO), the present game number counting process is terminated without executing step S5708.

<Holding information shift process for the first symbol display section>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit will be described. The hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the first symbol display unit (FIG. 129: S5603).

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process for the first symbol display section. In step S5801, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5802.

  In step S5802, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5803.

  In step S5803, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S5803, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

<Determination processing for the first symbol display section>
Next, the determination process for the first symbol display unit will be described. The determination process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the variation start process for the first symbol display unit (FIG. 129: S5604).

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first symbol display unit. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the game is given to the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode related to the jackpot winning. When a ball enters, it is turned ON when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode related to the big win, or the high probability mode In the jackpot lottery in the middle, it is turned OFF when the execution of 120 jackpot lotteries is completed without winning the jackpot. If it is determined in step S5901 that the mode is the high probability mode (S5901: YES), the process proceeds to step S5902.

  In step S5902, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the first startup opening / failure table (for the high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the first start opening success / failure table (for high probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S5901: NO), the process proceeds to step S5903.

  In step S5903, the determination of success / failure is performed with reference to the first start / failure table (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the first start / failure table (for low probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5904.

  In step S5904, it is determined whether the determination result in step S5902 or step S5903 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S5904: YES), the process proceeds to step S5905.

  In step S5905, the special per-use flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special 1 hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 is “big hit”. After executing Step S5905, the process proceeds to Step S5906.

  In step S5906, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first start port. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type value range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included. After executing Step S5906, the process proceeds to Step S5907.

  In step S5907, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S5906 (the jackpot type) is the first type jackpot. If it is determined in step S5907 that the assigned jackpot type is the first kind jackpot (S5907: YES), the process proceeds to step S5908.

  In step S5908, the special type 1 type first big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, since the type of first type jackpot set is only the 8R first type jackpot, the special 1R 8R first kind jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing Step S5908, the process proceeds to Step S5909.

  In step S5909, the first symbol jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first type jackpot, in the current game round that is the first type jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) with any stop result displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the first type jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S5909, the process proceeds to Step S5910.

  In step S5910, if the special jackpot flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the determination process for the first symbol display unit is terminated. As will be described later, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot lottery is won in the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 during the period when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Flag to be

  If it is determined in step S5907 that the assigned jackpot type is not the first kind jackpot (S5907: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is the second kind jackpot, the process proceeds to step S5911.

  In step S5911, the special type 2 type big hit flag (hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, since the type of the second type big hit that is set is only the 8R second type big hit, the special 8R second type big hit flag is set to ON. After executing Step S5911, the process proceeds to Step S5912.

  In step S5912, a stop symbol setting process for type 2 big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, in the current game round that is the second type jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stopped display) with any stop result displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. Execute the process to set Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for type 2 jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S5912, the process proceeds to Step S5910 described above, and the special jackpot flag that is in the ON state is turned OFF in this processing. Thereafter, the determination process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the determination in step S5902 or S5903 is not a big win (S5904: NO), the process proceeds to step S5913, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. With reference to the determination table, reach determination is made as to whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table. Determine. The process of step S5913 is executed when the result of the determination of success / failure (big hit lottery) in step S5904 is not a big win. That is, in step S5913, it is determined whether or not the game times in which the reach is generated among the game times in which the result of the determination is not a big hit. After executing Step S5913, the process proceeds to Step S5914.

  In step S5914, it is determined whether or not the reach determination result in step S5913 is a reach occurrence. If it is determined in step S5914 that a reach has occurred (S5914: YES), the flow advances to step S5915 to turn on the special 1 reach generation flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing Step S5915, the process proceeds to Step S5916. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5914 that no reach has occurred (S5914: NO), the process proceeds to step S5916 without executing step S5915.

  In step S5916, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for detachment, in this game game that becomes detachment, in order to set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c by referring to the stop result table for removal in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S5916, the determination process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

<Variation time setting process for the first symbol display section>
Next, the process for setting the variation time for the first symbol display section will be described. The variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for variation start processing for the first symbol display unit (FIG. 129: S5605).

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variation time for the first symbol display section. In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “121”. If it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not “121”, the process proceeds to step S6002, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “122”. . If it is determined in step S6002 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not “122”, the process proceeds to step S6003.

  In step S6003, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6003 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6003: NO), the process proceeds to step S6004.

  In step S6004, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6005.

  In step S6005, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game is successful is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 1R 8R type 1 big hit flag or the special 1R 8R type 2 big hit flag is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S6005: YES) ), The process proceeds to step S6006.

  In step S6006, with reference to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6006, the process proceeds to step S6010, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6005 that the determination result of the current game round is not a big hit (S6005: NO), the process proceeds to step S6007, and the reach determination result related to the current game round is reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON. If it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S6007: YES), the process proceeds to step S6008.

  In step S6008, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S6008, the process proceeds to step S6010, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6007 that the reach determination result relating to the current game round is not a reach occurrence (S6007: NO), the process proceeds to step S6009, and no reach is stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for use. After executing step S6009, the process proceeds to step S6010, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6003 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6003: YES), the process proceeds to step S6011, and it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6011 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6011: YES), the process proceeds to step S6004 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6011 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6011: NO), the process proceeds to step S6012, and the value corresponding to 1 min is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Set. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “121” (S6001: YES), and in step S6002, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “122”. In the case (S6002: YES), the process proceeds to step S6013, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the first symbol display unit is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN is larger. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the first start hold number RaN may be used, and the variation time is set shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN is smaller. May be.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the variation time table for 1st type big hits and the variation time table for 2nd type big hits are each set individually.

<High probability mode end processing>
Next, the high probability mode termination process will be described. The high probability mode end processing is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5606) of variation start processing for the first symbol display section.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the high probability mode end processing. In step S6101, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S6101: NO), the high probability mode end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S6101: YES), the process proceeds to step S6102.

  In step S6102, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 120 or not. If it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not 120 (S6102: NO), the high probability mode termination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 120 (S6102: YES), the process proceeds to step S6103, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S6104. Turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6105.

  In step S6105, it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6105: NO), the process proceeds to step S6106, and the final specific game turn flag is turned ON. The final specific game times flag is a flag for specifying the game times (120th game times) related to the last jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. After executing Step S6106, the high probability mode termination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6105: YES), the process proceeds to step S6107, and the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the high probability mode termination process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second symbol display section>
Next, the variation start process for the second symbol display unit will be described. The variation start process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 128: S5505).

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second symbol display section. In step S6201, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start hold number RbN is zero. If it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6201: NO), the process proceeds to step S6202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second start hold number RaN is 0 (S6201: YES), the variation start process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

  In step S6202, a game number counting process is executed. As described above, the game number counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (design fluctuations) executed after the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode is started. After executing Step S6202, the process proceeds to Step S6203.

  In step S6203, a hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is executed. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is a process for shifting the hold information stored in the second hold area Ra. Details of the hold information shift processing for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S6203, the process proceeds to Step S6204.

  In step S6204, determination processing for the second symbol display unit is executed. In the determination process for the second symbol display unit, the big hit lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. , Distribution determination for allocating the jackpot type, and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second symbol display unit will be described later. After executing Step S6204, the process proceeds to Step S6205.

  In step S6205, a variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is executed. In the variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit, a variation time, which is a time from when the symbol of the second symbol display unit starts to stop until it stops, is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing Step S6205, the process proceeds to Step S6206.

  In step S6206, high probability mode end processing is executed. In the high probability mode end processing, as described above, the high probability mode is ended when the predetermined number of times (120 in this embodiment) determination processing (big hit lottery) is executed after the transition to the high probability mode. It is processing. Details of the high probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing Step S6206, the process proceeds to Step S6207.

  In step S6207, a special 2 variation command is set. The special 2 variation command includes information indicating that the game time started this time is related to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 33. , Jackpot information, jackpot type information, reach occurrence information, and variation time information set in step S6204. The set special 2 variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). Based on the received special 2 variation command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game times and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S6207, the process proceeds to Step S6208.

  In step S6208, the symbol variation display on the second symbol display unit 37b is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6209, and the special 2 changing flag is turned ON. After executing step S6209, the variation starting process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

<Holding information shift process for the second symbol display section>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit will be described. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the second symbol display unit (FIG. 135: S6203).

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process for the second symbol display section. In step S6301, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second start hold number RbN in the second hold area Rb. Then, it progresses to step S6302.

  In step S6302, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6303.

  In step S6303, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S6303, the hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

<Determination processing for the second symbol display section>
Next, the determination process for the second symbol display unit will be described. The determination process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the variation start process for the second symbol display unit (FIG. 135: S6204).

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second symbol display unit. In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is the high probability mode (S6401: YES), the process proceeds to step S6402.

  In step S6402, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the second start port success / failure table (for high probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S6401: NO), the process proceeds to step S6403.

  In step S6403, whether or not the vehicle is determined is determined by referring to the determination table for the second start port (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the second start port success / failure table (for low probability mode). It is determined whether or not they match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6404.

  In step S6404, it is determined whether the determination result in step S6402 or step S6403 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S6404 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S6404: YES), the process proceeds to step S6405.

  In step S6405, the special 2 hit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special 2 winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start port 33 is “big hit” or “small hit”. . After executing Step S6405, the process proceeds to Step S6406.

  In step S6406, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second start port. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical value range contains the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing Step S6406, the process proceeds to Step S6407.

  In step S6407, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S6406 (big hit type) is the first type big hit. If it is determined in step S6407 that the distributed jackpot type is the first kind jackpot (S6407: YES), the process proceeds to step S6408.

  In step S6408, the special type 1 type big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S6407 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, when the assigned jackpot type is 8R type 1 big hit, the special 2R 8R type 1 big hit flag is set to ON, and when the assigned jackpot type is 16R type 1 big hit, special 2 Set the 16R type 1 big hit flag for ON. After executing Step S6408, the process proceeds to Step S6409.

  In step S6409, the first symbol jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first type jackpot, in the current game round that is the first type jackpot, the variation display is terminated (stop display) with any stop result displayed on the second symbol display unit 37a. Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the first type jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S6409, the process proceeds to Step S6410.

  In step S6410, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6410 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 and the special jackpot flag is turned ON. That is, as described above, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the second starting port 34 during the period in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Flag to be After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated without executing step S6411.

  If it is determined in step S6407 that the assigned jackpot type is not the first kind jackpot (S6407: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is the second kind jackpot, the process proceeds to step S6412. In the present embodiment, since the second type jackpot is not set in the success / failure table for the second start port, the processes of step S6412 and step S6413 described below are not executed.

  In step S6412, the special type 2 second type big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S6407 is turned ON. After executing Step S6412, the process proceeds to Step S6413.

  In step S6413, the second symbol jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, in the current game round that is the second type jackpot, the variation display is terminated (stopped display) with any stop result displayed on the second symbol display unit 37a. Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the second type jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S6413, the process proceeds to Step S6410 described above, and it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S6410 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 and the special jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated without executing step S6411.

  If it is determined in step S6404 that the determination result in step S6402 or step S6403 is not a big win (S6404: NO), the process proceeds to step S6414, and the determination result in step S6402 or step S6403 is a small hit. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the determination is a small hit (S6414: YES), the process proceeds to step S6415, and the special 2 hit flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6416, and the small hit flag corresponding to the result of the determination is turned ON. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first small hit flag is set to ON when the result of the determination is a first small hit, and the second small value is determined when the result of the determination is a second small hit. The winning flag is turned ON, and if the result of the determination is a third small hit, the third small hit flag is turned ON. After executing Step S6416, the process proceeds to Step S6417.

  In step S6417, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, in the current game round that is a small hit, it is set in the second symbol display section 37a which stop result is displayed and the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the determination result in step S6402 or step S6403 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6417, the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the determination is not a small hit (S6414: NO), the process proceeds to step S6418.

  In step S6418, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for detachment, in this game game that is detachment, the second symbol display section 37a is set to indicate which stop result is displayed (stop display) in the state of displaying the stop result. Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the stop result corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6418, the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

<Change time setting process for the second symbol display section>
Next, the process for setting the variation time for the second symbol display section will be described. The variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for variation start processing for the second symbol display unit (FIG. 135: S6205).

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing processing for setting the variation time for the second symbol display section. In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “121”. If it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not “121” (S6501: NO), the process proceeds to step S6502, and whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “122”. Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S6502 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not “122” (S6502: NO), the process proceeds to step S6503.

  In step S6503, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6503 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6503: NO), the process proceeds to step S6504, and a value corresponding to 10 min is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Set. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6503 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6503: YES), the process advances to step S6505 to determine whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the process proceeds to step S6504 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6505: NO), the process proceeds to step S6506.

  Here, if it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the reason for proceeding to step S6504 is as follows. In the low frequency support mode, when a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and a game ball is inserted into the second start port 34, the game start for the second start port is executed and the big hit lottery is won. It becomes. Due to the gaming nature of the gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player to distribute game balls to the left side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the game is placed on the left side of the game board 30. It is desirable to guide the player to distribute the ball. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the second start port 34, thereby executing the second start opening game times and winning the jackpot lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 33 to execute the first start port game round and win the jackpot lottery. It is desirable that the setting be advantageous. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is distributed on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the second start port 34 to execute the second start port game round and win the big win lottery (special jackpot) In this case, the internal control shifts to the high-frequency support mode, but the second start is executed by circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and causing the second start port 34 to enter the game ball. By setting the variation time of the game time for the mouth to 10 minutes, the game act of circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and entering the game ball at the second start port 34 during the low frequency support mode is not advantageous. I am doing so. In addition, the effect and sound in the symbol display device 41 when the special jackpot is shifted to the high frequency support mode are set to the same as those in the low frequency support mode, so that the player can accidentally insert the game ball. It may not be distributed on the right side of the game board 30.

  In step S6506, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6507.

  In step S6507, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game is successful is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the special 2R 1st type jackpot flag or the special 2R 16R first kind jackpot flag is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S6507: YES) ), And the process proceeds to step S6508.

  In step S6508, referring to the big hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6508, the process proceeds to step S6509, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6507 that the result of the determination regarding the current game round is not a big hit (S6507: NO), the process proceeds to step S6510, and the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set. A value corresponding to 0.5 sec is set. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “121” (S6501: YES), and in step S6502, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “122”. In the case (S6502: YES), the process proceeds to step S6511, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variation time setting process for the second symbol display unit is terminated.

<Fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the fluctuation stop process will be described. The variation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 128: S5506).

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the change stop process. In step S6601, it is determined whether or not the special 1 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being displayed in the first symbol display section 37a. If it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S6601: YES), the process proceeds to step S6602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S6601: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described later.

  In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation time in the first symbol display section 37a has ended. If it is determined in step S6602 that the symbol variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a has expired (S6602: YES), the process proceeds to step S6603, and the symbol variation in the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6602 that the symbol variation time in the first symbol display section 37a has not ended (S6602: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6620 described later.

  In step S6604, the special 1 changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6605, and it is determined whether or not the special 1 use flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display in the first symbol display section 37a is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6605 that the special per-use flag is not ON (S6605: NO), the process proceeds to step S6606.

  In step S6606, it is determined whether or not the final specific game times flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game number flag is ON (S6606: YES), the process proceeds to step S6607, and a final specific game number end command is set. The final specific game times end command is used for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the last game time in the high probability mode (in this embodiment, the 120th game time after shifting to the high probability mode) ends. It is a command. The set final specific game round end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing step S6607, the process proceeds to step S6608, and the final specific game times flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game turn flag is not ON (S6606: NO), the process proceeds to step S6609 without executing steps S6607 and S6608.

  In step S6609, it is determined whether or not the value of the first start hold number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start hold number RaN is 0 (S6609: YES), the process proceeds to step S6610, and a special customer waiting command is set. The special 1 customer waiting command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a has stopped and the value of the first start reserved number RaN has become zero. . The special customer 1 waiting command that has been set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing Step S6610, the process proceeds to Step S6619 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described later without executing step S6610.

  If it is determined in step S6605 that the special per-use flag is ON (S6606: YES), the process proceeds to step S6611, and the special per-use flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6612.

  In step S6612, it is determined whether or not the final specific game times flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6612 that the final specific game times flag is ON (S6612: YES), the process proceeds to step S6613, and the final specific game times flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6614. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6612 that the final specific game turn flag is not ON (S6612: NO), the process proceeds to step S6614 without executing step S6613.

  In step S6614, it is determined whether or not the special 2 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being displayed in the second symbol display section 37b. If it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 changing flag is ON (S6614: YES), the process proceeds to step S6615. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 variation flag is not ON (S6614: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6637, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON, and then the variation stop process is terminated. .

  In step S6615, the fluctuation of the symbols in the second symbol display section 37b is stopped at the symbols for removal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6616, and the special 2 changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6617.

  In step S6617, it is determined whether the special 2 use flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display in the second symbol display section 37b is a jackpot or a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6617 that the special 2 hit flag is ON (S6617: YES), the process proceeds to step S6618, the special 2 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 2 type 1 big hit flag or Among the small hit flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6637, where the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to ON, and then the variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6617 that the special 2 winning flag is not ON (S6617: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6618, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. The fluctuation stop process is terminated.

  As described above, if it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 variation flag is not ON (S6601: NO), in step S6602, the symbol variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended. When it is determined (S6602: NO), when it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), and in step S6610, a special customer waiting command is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6619 described below.

In step S6619, it is determined whether or not the special 2 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being displayed in the second symbol display section 37b. If it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 changing flag is ON (S6619: YES), the process proceeds to step S6620. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 variation flag is not ON (S6619: NO), the variation stop process is terminated.

  In step S6620, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation time in second symbol display portion 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S6620 that the symbol variation time in the second symbol display unit 37b has expired (S6620: YES), the process proceeds to step S6621 and the symbol variation in the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6622. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6620 that the symbol variation time in the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S6620: NO), the variation stop processing is terminated.

  In step S6622, the special 2 changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6623, and it is determined whether or not the special 2 use flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display in the second symbol display section 37b is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6623 that the special 2 hit flag is not ON (S6623: NO), the process proceeds to step S6624.

  In step S6624, it is determined whether or not the final specific game times flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game number flag is ON (S6624: YES), the process proceeds to step S6625, and a final specific game number end command is set. The final specific game times end command is used for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the last game time in the high probability mode (in this embodiment, the 120th game time after shifting to the high probability mode) ends. It is a command. The set final specific game round end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing step S6625, the process proceeds to step S6626, and the final specific game times flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6627. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game turn flag is not ON (S6624: NO), the process proceeds to step S6627 without executing steps S6625 and S6626.

  In step S6627, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start hold number RbN is zero. If it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start hold number RbN is 0 (S6627: YES), the process proceeds to step S6628, and a special 2 customer waiting command is set. The special 2 customer waiting command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the variation of the symbol in the second symbol display unit 37b has stopped and the value of the second start reserved number RbN has become zero. . The set special 2 customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing step S6628, the fluctuation stopping process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start hold number RbN is not 0 (S6627: NO), this variation stop process is terminated without executing step S6628.

  If it is determined in step S6623 that the special 2 per-use flag is ON (S6623: YES), the process proceeds to step S6629, and the special 2 per-use flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6630.

  In step S6630, it is determined whether or not the final specific game times flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6630 that the final specific game times flag is ON (S6630: YES), the process proceeds to step S6631 and the final specific game times flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6632. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6630 that the final specific game turn flag is not ON (S6630: NO), the process proceeds to step S6632 without executing step S6631.

  In step S6632, it is determined whether the special 1 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being displayed in the first symbol display section 37a. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S6632: YES), the process proceeds to step S6633. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 variation flag is not ON (S6632: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6637, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON, and then the variation stop process is terminated. .

  In step S6633, the fluctuation of the symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped at the symbol for detachment. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6634, and the special 1 changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6665.

  In step S6635, it is determined whether or not the special 1 use flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display in the first symbol display section 37a is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6635 that the special 1 hit flag is ON (S6635: YES), the process proceeds to step S6636, the special 1 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 1 type 1 big hit flag or Of the special type 1 type 2 big hit flag, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6635 that the special 1 hit flag is not ON (S6635: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6636, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. The fluctuation stop process is terminated.

  As described in this processing, in the variation stop processing of the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 variation flag is ON (S6614: YES), the second symbol display unit in step S6615. The change of the symbol in 37b is stopped at the symbol for detachment. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 variation flag is ON (S6632: YES), in step S6633, the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped at the off symbol. That is, when both of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are in a variable display, one of the two symbol display units is stopped before the other. If the result of the big win lottery in the game times corresponding to the one symbol display portion is a big hit or a small win, the variation of the other symbol display portion is removed and stopped at the symbol. Therefore, the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display section where the symbol variation stops first may be given priority. By doing in this way, the following subjects can be solved.

  Normally, in the simultaneous variable machine, when both the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b start to change, the result of the big hit lottery corresponding to one of the symbol display units is a big hit or When it is determined that it is a small win, the other symbol display unit is automatically stopped and displayed with a symbol for losing without executing the big hit lottery corresponding to the other symbol display unit. However, when the process is executed, the following problem occurs.

  When the player switches from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode and the player switches from a game in which the game balls are distributed to the right side of the game board 30 to a game in which the game balls are distributed to the left side of the game board 30, Even if the reserved game times corresponding to the game times for the second starter port remaining after the game balls are inserted into the second starter port 34 just before the end of the frequency support mode are transferred to the low frequency support mode, Executed. The player switches from the game in which the game ball is distributed to the right side of the game board 30 to the game in which the game ball is distributed to the left side of the game board 30, and enters the first start port 33 to cause the game ball to enter the first start port. If the game time for the second start opening of the reserved game times is executed first and the big hit lottery is won, the above-mentioned normal simultaneous variable machine processing Is executed, the jackpot lottery of the first start game is not executed. At this time, since the support mode has already shifted to the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the game times for the second start opening is 10 minutes. As a result, for 10 minutes until the second symbol display unit 37b stops at the big hit or small hit symbol, the player enters the first start port 33 to play the first start port game. Even if it is executed, the jackpot lottery itself is not executed. That is, the player is substantially forced to interrupt the game for 10 minutes until the second symbol display unit 37b stops at the big win or small win symbol, which is a great disadvantage to the player. Will be given.

  In this regard, as in the present embodiment, when the process in which the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display unit where the variation of the symbol stops first is adopted, the game game for the second start opening of the reserved game times is executed. Even if a big win or a small win is won in the big win lottery and the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b is set to 10 minutes, a game ball enters the first start port 33 after that. When the ball is played, the big hit lottery as the first start opening game is executed. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the change of the symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a stops before the change of the symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b, the first start The lottery result of the game times for mouth is given priority, the symbol on the first symbol display unit 37a stops at the jackpot symbol, and at the same time, the symbol on the second symbol display unit 37b stops at the symbol for removal. That is, the 2nd symbol display part 37b stops a symbol earlier than 10 minutes which is the initially set fluctuation time. Therefore, the game is interrupted until the second symbol display unit 37b stops at the big win or the small win symbol (10 minutes) as in the case of adopting the normal simultaneous variable machine processing. It is possible to avoid the problem of being forced to.

  For this reason, in the variation stop process according to the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 variation flag is ON (S6614: YES), the second symbol display unit 37b in step S6615. If the variation of the symbol is stopped at the symbol for removal and it is determined in step S6632 that the special variation flag is ON (S6632: YES), the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a is determined in step S6633. A process of stopping at the symbol for removal is adopted.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 127: S5406).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. In step S6701, it is determined whether an ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the ending period, and is turned on at the start of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is not ON (S6701: NO), the process proceeds to step S6702, and it is determined whether the opening / closing process period flag is ON. The opening / closing process period flag is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not it is an opening / closing process period, and is turned ON at the start of the opening / closing process period and turned OFF at the end of the opening / closing process period. The opening / closing process period is a period for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36.

  If it is determined in step S6702 that the opening / closing process period flag is not ON (S6702: NO), the process proceeds to step S6703, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not it is an opening period, and is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is not ON (S6703: NO), the process advances to step S6704 to determine whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6704 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S6704: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6704 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S6704: YES), the process proceeds to step S6705.

  In step S6705, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6.0 sec) or “0” (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S6705, the process proceeds to Step S6706.

  In step S6706, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This opening command includes information on the set opening time. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S6706, the process proceeds to step S6707, where the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is ON (S6703: YES), the process proceeds to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area To is “0”. If it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has not ended (S6708: NO), the gaming state transition process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has ended (S6708: YES), the process proceeds to step S6709, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6710.

  In step S6710, a round display start process is performed to notify the type of the current opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Check. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S6710, the process proceeds to Step S6711.

  In step S6711, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2R 8R stored in the RAM 64 is stored. 1 type big hit flag) and small hit flag (first small hit flag, second small hit flag, third small hit flag) and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag are provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 Is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S6711, the process proceeds to step S6712.

  In step S6712, an open / close process command is set. The set opening / closing process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This open / close processing command includes information on the number of rounds executed during the current open / close processing period. Based on the received opening / closing process command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing Step S6712, the process proceeds to Step S6713.

  In step S6713, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6702 that the opening / closing process period flag is ON (S6702: YES), the process proceeds to step S6714, and the big prize opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. This opens the door 36b. Further, when the open / close door 36b is being opened, a variable prize is awarded on the condition that the open limit time has elapsed since the open / close door 36b was opened or that the open limit number of game balls have been entered. The drive state of the drive unit 36c is stopped, and the open / close door 36b is closed. Details of the big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S6714, the process proceeds to Step S6715.

  In step S6715, a V winning opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of opening the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 once in a predetermined round is executed. Details of the V prize opening opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S6715, the process proceeds to Step S6716.

  In step S6716, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S6716: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S6716: YES), the process proceeds to step S6717, and the opening / closing process period flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S6717, the process proceeds to Step S6718.

  In step S6718, a round display end process is executed. In the round display end process, the round display unit 39 is controlled so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S6718, the process proceeds to Step S6719.

  In step S6719, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6.0 sec) or “0” (that is, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S6719, the process proceeds to Step S6720.

  In step S6720, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This ending command includes information on the set ending time. Based on the received ending command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing process period, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and the effect of the determined content is executed. Control various devices. After executing Step S6720, the process proceeds to Step S6721.

  In step S6721, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is ON (S6701: YES), the process proceeds to step S6722.

  In step S6722, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S6719) is “0”. If it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not “0” (S6722: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is “0” (S6722: YES), the process proceeds to step S6723.

  In step S6723, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6724, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6725, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S6725, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6705) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S6801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 1 8R second kind jackpot flag, special 2 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 2R 16R stored in the RAM 64 is stored. If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S6801 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot (S6801: YES), the process proceeds to step S6802, and “3000” (ie, 6.0 sec) is entered in the timer counter area To. Set. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S6801: YES), that is, when the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, The process proceeds to step S6803.

  In step S6803, “0” (ie, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is small. If it is a win, the opening effect is not actually performed. After executing step S6803, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6711) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the round number setting process. In step S6901, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 1 8R second kind jackpot flag, special 2 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 2R 16R number stored in the RAM 64) If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit (S6901: YES), the process proceeds to step S6902, and the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is the first type of 16R. Determine if you are a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 2R 16R type 1 big hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S6902 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is 16R type 1 big hit (S6902: YES), the process proceeds to step S6903, and “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. set. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6902 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the 16R type 1 big hit (S6902: NO), that is, the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is 8R first. If it is a seed hit or 8R type 2 hit, the process advances to step S6904 to set “8” in the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S6901: YES), that is, the opening / closing execution mode for this time triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is a small win, the process proceeds to step S6905.

  In step S6905, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the first small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6905 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first small hit (S6905: YES), the flow advances to step S6906 to set “1” in the first round counter area RC1. To do. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6905 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the first small hit (S6905: NO), the process proceeds to step S6907.

  In step S6907, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the second small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6907 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the second small hit (S6907: YES), the flow advances to step S6908 to set “6” in the first round counter area RC1. To do. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S6907, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not the second small hit (S6907: NO), that is, the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is the third small hit. If YES in step S6909, the flow advances to step S6909 to set “8” in the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the round number setting process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6714) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process. In step S7001, it is determined whether or not the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S7001 that the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is not open (S7001: NO), the process proceeds to step S7002, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is. If it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S7002: YES), the big prize opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S7002: NO), the process proceeds to step S7003.

  In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S7003: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S7003: YES), the process proceeds to step S7004, where the open / close door 36b provided at the special winning opening 36a is opened. In order to do so, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to the drive state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7005.

  In step S7005, the entrance counter setting process is executed. In the entry counter setting process, the entry counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to a value that permits entry of a game ball during one open (one round) of the big winning opening 36a. set. Details of the entrance counter setting process will be described later. After executing Step S7005, the process proceeds to Step S7006.

  In step S7006, a special winning opening open limit time setting process is executed. In the big winning opening opening limit time setting process, an opening limiting time that is a limit of one opening time of the open / close door 36b provided in the big winning opening 36a is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. The details of the opening limit time setting process for the big prize opening will be described later. After executing Step S7006, the process proceeds to Step S7007.

  In step S7007, a special winning opening release command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. It should be noted that the special winning opening release command is used for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a has started. This command includes information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 36b for one round is started based on the received winning prize opening opening command, and displays the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46. The content is updated to correspond to the start of the opening of 36b. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the special winning opening release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 36b for one round has been started based on the received winning prize opening opening command, and displays the effect on the symbol display device 41 by opening the opening / closing door 36b. Update to the content corresponding to the start of.

  If it is determined in step S7001 that the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is open (step S7001: YES), the process proceeds to step S7008, and whether or not the special winning opening open limit time has elapsed. Determine whether. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S7008: NO), the process proceeds to step S7009.

  In step S7009, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S7009 that no game ball has entered (S7009: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7009 that a game ball has entered (S7009: YES), the process proceeds to step S7010, and the value of the entrance counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7011.

  In step S7011, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S7011: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S7008: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0” in step S7011. (S7011: YES), the process proceeds to step S7012, and the special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7013.

  In step S7013, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7014, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S7014: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S7014: NO), the process proceeds to step S7015.

  In step S7015, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed. The closing time setting process for the big prize opening is a process for setting the closing time of the big prize opening 36a, and specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit, “1000” (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In addition, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, “30” (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing Step S7015, the process proceeds to Step S7016.

  In step S7016, a special winning opening closing command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The special winning opening closing command is information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub-side, to recognize that the opening of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a has ended. And is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing of the opening / closing door 36b for one round has been completed based on the received winning prize opening closing command, and displays the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the opening / closing door 36b. Is updated to the content corresponding to the end of the release of. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned special winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 36b for one round has been completed based on the received winning prize opening closing command and displays the effect on the symbol display device 41 by opening the opening / closing door 36b. Update to the content corresponding to the end.

<Entry counter setting process>
Next, the entrance counter setting process will be described. The winning counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 143: S7005).

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the entrance counter setting process. In step S7101, “10” is set in the entrance counter area PC. Thereafter, the present ball counter setting process is terminated.

<Open limit time setting process for big prize opening>
Next, the opening limit time setting process for the special winning opening will be described. The opening limit time setting process for the big prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 143: S7006).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the opening limit time setting process for the special winning opening. In step S7201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 1 8R second kind jackpot flag, special 2 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 2R 16R stored in the RAM 64 is stored. If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit (S7201: YES), the process proceeds to step S7202 and “15000” (ie, 30.30) is displayed in the first timer counter area T1. 0 sec) is set. Thereafter, the opening limit time setting process for the grand prize winning opening is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7201: NO), the process proceeds to step S7203, and the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is the first. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, when the first small hit flag is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is the first small hit.

  If it is determined in step S7203 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first small hit (S7203: YES), the process proceeds to step S7204, and the first timer counter area T1 is set to “800” (that is, 1.6 sec). Thereafter, the opening limit time setting process for the grand prize winning opening is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7203 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the first small hit (S7203: NO), that is, the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the second small hit. Alternatively, if it is the third small hit, the process proceeds to step S7205, and “30” (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Thereafter, the opening limit time setting process for the grand prize winning opening is ended.

<V prize opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the V prize opening opening / closing process will be described. The V prize opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6715) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the V prize opening opening / closing process. In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 1 8R second kind jackpot flag, special 2 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 2R 16R stored in the RAM 64 is stored. If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7301 that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7301: NO), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, V Since the opening / closing door 48a provided at the winning opening 48 is not opened, the V winning opening opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S7301: YES), the process proceeds to step S7302.

  In step S7302, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “3”. If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “3” (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7303.

  In step S7303, it is determined whether or not the open / close door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the opening / closing door driving unit 48b. If it is determined in step S7303 that the open / close door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 is not open (S7301: NO), the process proceeds to step S7304, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “4”. It is determined whether or not there is. If it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “4” (S7304: NO), the V prize opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “4” (S7304: YES), the process proceeds to step S7305.

  In step S7305, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opened flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The V winning opening opened flag is a flag for recognizing whether or not the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 has already been opened in the current opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 48a is configured to open only once in one opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined in step S7305 that the V winning opening opened flag is not ON (S7305: NO), the process proceeds to step S7306, and the door is driven to open the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. The unit 48b is set in the driving state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7307. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7305 that the V winning opening opened flag is ON (S7305: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  In step S7307, a V winning opening opening limit time setting process is executed. In the V winning opening opening limit time setting process, an opening limiting time that is a limit of one opening time of the open / close door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the third timer counter area T3. In this case, the third timer counter area T3 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. The value set in the third timer counter area T3 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the V winning opening opening limit time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S7307, the process proceeds to Step S7308.

  In step S7308, a V winning opening release command is set. Thereafter, the V prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. It should be noted that the V prize opening command is used for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 which are the control devices on the sub side to recognize that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V prize opening 48 is started. This command includes information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a is started based on the received V prize opening opening command, and displays the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 by opening the opening / closing door 48a. Update to the content corresponding to the start. Also, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the V prize opening opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a has been started based on the received V prize opening opening command, and the opening of the opening / closing door 48a for the effect contents in the symbol display device 41. Update to the corresponding content.

  If it is determined in step S7303 that the open / close door 48a provided at the V prize opening 48 is open (step S7303: YES), the process proceeds to step S7309, where a game ball has entered the V prize opening 48. Whether or not is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 48. If it is determined in step S7309 that a game ball has entered (S7309: YES), the process proceeds to step S7310, and whether the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S7310 that the V winning flag is not ON (S7310: NO), the process proceeds to step S7311, the V winning flag is turned ON, and the process proceeds to step S7312 to set a V winning command. The V winning command is a command including information for making the sub-side control device 90 and the display control device 100 recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning slot 48, and is a normal process. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by command output processing (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 based on the received V winning command, and plays the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the V winning opening 48. Update to the content corresponding to the ball entering. After executing Step S7312, the process proceeds to Step S7313. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7309 that no game ball has entered (S7309: NO) and in step S7310, it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (S7310: YES). The process proceeds to step S7313 without executing steps S7311 and S7312.

  In step S7313, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening open limit time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is “0”. If it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is not “0” (S7313: NO), the V prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is “0” (S7313: YES), the process proceeds to step S7314.

  In step S7314, a V winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the V winning opening 48, the open / close door drive unit 48b is set to a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7315, and the V winning opening open flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7316.

  In step S7316, a V winning opening closing command is set. Thereafter, the V prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. The V winning opening closing command is information for causing the audio light emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has ended. And is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a has ended based on the received V prize opening closing command, and ends the opening of the opening / closing door 48a for the contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46. Update to the content corresponding to what you did. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the V winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a has ended based on the received V prize opening closing command, and displays the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 that the opening of the opening / closing door 48a has ended. Update to the corresponding content.

  If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “3” (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7317, and it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opened flag is ON. To do. If it is determined in step S7317 that the V winning opening open flag is ON (S7317: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7318, and the V winning opening open flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7317 that the V prize opening open flag is not ON (S7317: NO), the V prize opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing step S7318.

<V limit opening time limit setting process>
Next, a V winning opening opening limit time setting process will be described. The V winning opening opening limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a V winning opening opening / closing process subroutine (FIG. 146: S7307).

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating the V winning opening opening limit time setting process. In step S7401, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the first type big hit. Specifically, when any one of the special 1R 8R type 1 big hit flag, the special 2R 8R type 1 big hit flag, and the special 2R 16R type 1 big hit flag is ON, the current opening / closing execution mode It is determined that the opportunity for transition to is a first-class jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7401 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the first type big hit (S7401: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7402 and “5000” (ie, “3” is set in the third timer counter area T3). 10.0 sec) is set. Then, the V winning opening release limit time setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7401 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not the first type big hit (S7401: NO), that is, the present time opening / closing execution mode is the second type big hit. If YES, the flow advances to step S7403 to set “3” (that is, 0.006 sec) in the third timer counter area T3. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second type jackpot, it is substantially impossible for a game ball to enter the V winning opening 48. Yes. After executing step S7403, the V winning opening opening limit time setting process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6719) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 1 8R second kind jackpot flag, special 2 8R first kind jackpot flag, special 2R 16R stored in the RAM 64 is stored. If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a big hit (S7501: YES), the process proceeds to step S7502, and “3000” (ie, 6.0 sec) is entered in the timer counter area Te. Set. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S7501: NO), that is, when the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, The process proceeds to step S7503.

  In step S7503, “0” (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is small. If it is a win, the ending effect is not actually performed. After executing step S7503, the ending time setting process ends.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6725).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R flag stored in the RAM 64 is specifically described. If any one of the 1 type jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7601 that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S7601: YES), the process proceeds to step S7602, and it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7602 that the V winning flag is ON (S7602: YES), the process proceeds to step S7603.

  In step S7603, among the special 1R 8R type 1 big hit flag, special 1R 8R type 2 big hit flag, special 2R 8R type 1 big hit flag, special 2R 16R type 1 big hit flag is ON. Turn off the flag. After executing Step S7603, the process proceeds to Step S7604.

  In step S7604, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing Step S7604, the process proceeds to Step S7605.

  In step S7605, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing Step S7605, the process proceeds to Step S7606.

  In step S7606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thus, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7607.

  In step S7607, the ST game count flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7608, and "0" is set to the ST game number counter PNC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7609 and the V winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7610.

  In step S7610, it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S7610: NO), the process proceeds to step S7611, and the special 2 main display command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the special 2 main display command causes the symbol display based on the game ball to enter the second start port 34 to be displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 to perform the first start. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so as to display the symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the mouth 33 in the first sub-display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step S7611, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S7610: YES), the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated without executing step S7611.

  If it is determined in step S7602 that the V winning flag is not ON (S7602: NO), the process proceeds to step S7612, and the special 1R 8R type 1 big hit flag, special 1R 8R type 2 big hit flag, special 2 Of the 8R type 1 big hit flag for special use and the 16R type 1 big hit flag for special 2 type, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing Step S7612, the process proceeds to Step S7613.

  In step S7613, when the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. After executing Step S7613, the process proceeds to Step S7614.

  In step S7614, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode. After executing Step S7614, the process proceeds to Step S7615.

  In step S7615, if the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thus, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7616.

  In step S7616, the electric support game count flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7617, and “0” is set in the electric support game number-of-times counter PNC2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7610.

  If it is determined in step S7601 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big win (S7601: NO), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, step In S7618, the flag that is ON among the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, and the third small hit flag is turned OFF. After executing step S7618, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric role support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 127: S5407).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S7701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is started and turned off when the opening / closing process is finished. If it is determined in step S7701 that the supporting flag is not ON (S7701: NO), the process proceeds to step S7702.

  In step S7702, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state winning is determined in the electric agent opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric agent 34a is in an open state. If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is not ON (S7702: NO), the process proceeds to step S7703.

  In step S7703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S7703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S7703: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7703: YES), the process proceeds to step S7704.

  In step S7704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S7704 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S7704: YES), the process proceeds to step S7705, and after setting the out-of-display, the main role support process is terminated. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S7704: NO), the process proceeds to step S7706.

  In step S7706, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reservation number SN is larger than “0”. If it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S7706: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S7706: YES), the process proceeds to step S7707.

  In step S7707, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S7708 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S7707 (S7707: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is in step S7708 (S7708: YES), the process proceeds to step S7709, and an electric-powered article opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Winning. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the electrification winning combination lottery is won with a probability of 232/233. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7710.

  In step S7710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S7709 is a support win. In step S7710, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment is support winning (S7710: YES), the process proceeds to step S7711, the support winning flag is turned on, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2 that has been set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7712. On the other hand, in Step S7710, when it is determined that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S7710: NO), the process proceeds to Step S7712 without executing the process of Step S7711.

  In step S7712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S7712 that the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode (S7712: YES), the process proceeds to step S7713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7712 that the winning lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S7712: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is.

  In step S7713, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is “100”. If it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is not “100” (S7713: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the electric support game number counter PNC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S7714, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, and the special jackpot flag is ON. In some cases, the special jackpot flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7715.

  In step S7715, the low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S7715 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  If it is determined in step S7707 that the opening / closing execution mode is set (S7707: YES), or if it is determined in step S7708 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S7708: NO), the process proceeds to step S7716, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Winning. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the electric winning combination open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7717.

  In step S7717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S7716 is a support win. If it is determined in step S7717 that the support is not won (S7717: NO), the main character support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7717 that the support win is selected (S7717: YES), the process proceeds to step S7718, after the support win flag is turned ON and “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the main power support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is ON (S7702: YES), the process advances to step S7719 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S7719: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main character support process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7719: YES), the process proceeds to step S7720.

  In step S7720, a win display is set. As a result, the symbol variation display in the universal map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7721 where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S7701 that the supporting flag is ON (S7701: YES), the process advances to step S7722 to execute an electric combination opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric combination 34a. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electric role opening / closing process will be described. The power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the power combination support process (FIG. 150: S7722).

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process. In step S7801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S7801: YES), the process proceeds to step S7802.

  In step S7802, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S7802: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric utility item 34a has not ended, the main electric character opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7802: YES), the process proceeds to step S7803, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 34a is “0”, the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S7803, the process proceeds to Step S7804.

  In step S7804, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S7805, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S7805: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S7805: YES), the process proceeds to step S7806, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S7801 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S7801: NO), the process proceeds to step S7807, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S7807: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7807: YES), the process proceeds to step S7808, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state is executed. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7809.

  In step S7809, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect (S7809: NO), the process proceeds to step S7810 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

  If it is determined in step S7810 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S7810: YES), the flow advances to step S7811 to set “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7809 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S7809: YES), or if it is determined in step S7810 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S7810: NO), the process proceeds to step S7812. “700” (that is, 1.4 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 127: S5408).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing game ball launch control processing. In step S7901, it is determined whether the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operation handle 25. If it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S7901: YES), the process proceeds to step S7902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S7901: NO), the gaming ball launch control process is terminated.

  In step S7902, it is determined whether or not the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S7902: NO), the process proceeds to step S7903.

  In step S7903, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. If it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S7903: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S7903: NO), the process proceeds to step S7904.

  In step S7904, it is determined whether or not the wait button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S7904 that the wait button is ON (S7904: YES), the game ball launch control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7904 that the wait button is not ON (S7904: NO), the process proceeds to step S7905.

  In step S 7905, a control signal is transmitted to the firing control device 80 so that the game ball is fired with the firing strength corresponding to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing Step S7905, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S7902: YES), the process proceeds to step S7906. In step S7906, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the right-handed launch intensity. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch a game ball with the same launch strength as that when the operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball to the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Thereafter, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

K6. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 153 is a block diagram illustrating mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 and an RTC 96 are mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) outputs date information and time information. The RTC 96 includes a backup power source, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The MPU 92 acquires date information and time information output from the RTC 96, and executes an RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. The process to execute is started. The RTC effect of this embodiment is composed of a 300-second RTC effect moving image and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every hour at 00 minutes.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the rendering operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

K7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (4 msec in this embodiment). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S8001, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step S8001, the process proceeds to Step S8002.

  In step S8002, display mode switching processing is executed. In the display mode switching process, the variation of the symbol based on the game ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the main display area MA and the variation of the symbol based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. The display mode displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 (hereinafter also referred to as “special 1 main display mode”) and the variation of the symbols based on the game balls entering the second starting port 34 are displayed in the main display area MA. In addition, a process for switching the display mode (hereinafter also referred to as “special 2 main display mode”) in which the variation of the symbol based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is executed. To do. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing Step S8002, the process proceeds to Step S8003.

  In step S8003, special 1 game times effect processing is executed. The special 1 game times effect process is a process of setting the contents of effects to be executed in the game times based on the game balls entering the first start port 33. Details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S8003, the process proceeds to Step S8004.

  In step S8004, special 2 game times effect processing is executed. The special 2 game times effect process is a process of setting the contents of effects to be executed in the game times based on the game balls entering the second start port 34. The details of the special 2 game times effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S8004, the process proceeds to Step S8005.

  In step S8005, a standby process for causing the display control apparatus 100 to start displaying a demo video (main demo video) and a sub-demo video is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. After executing Step S8005, the process proceeds to Step S8006.

  In step S8006, an RTC effect process is executed. In the RTC effect processing, processing related to the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below. After executing Step S8006, the process proceeds to Step S8007.

  In step S8007, a result display process is executed. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when 120 game rounds are completed without winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. Details of the result display processing will be described later. After executing Step S8007, the process proceeds to Step S8008.

  In step S8008, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing Step S8008, the process proceeds to Step S8009.

  In step S8009, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the various processes in steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8009, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8002).

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. In step S8101, it is determined whether or not a special 2 main display command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command has been received (S8101: YES), the process proceeds to step S8102, and the special 2 main display stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. Turn on the flag. The special 2 main display flag displays, in the main display area MA, changes in symbols based on the game balls entering the second start port 34, and changes in symbols based on the game balls entering the first start port 33. Is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the display mode (special 2 main display mode) is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. After executing Step S8102, the process proceeds to Step S8103.

  In step S8103, the special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The special 2 main display command is a command for instructing the display control apparatus 100 to switch from the special 1 main display mode to the special 2 main display mode. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command executes processing for switching from the special 1 main display mode to the special 2 main display mode. After executing Step S8103, the process proceeds to Step S8104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command has not been received (S8101: NO), the process proceeds to step S8104 without executing steps S8102 and S8103.

  In step S8104, it is determined whether a final specific game turn end command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game round end command has been received (S8104: YES), the process proceeds to step S8105, and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S8105, the process proceeds to Step S8106.

  In step S 8106, the special 1 main display command A is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The special 1 main display command A is a command for instructing the display control apparatus 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode via the display of the result image. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the special 1 main display command A executes processing for switching from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode via the display of the result image. After executing Step S8106, the process proceeds to Step S8107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game turn end command has not been received (S8104: NO), the process proceeds to step S8107 without executing steps S8105 and S8106.

  In step S8107, it is determined whether or not a low frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8107 that a low-frequency support command has been received (S8107: YES), the flow advances to step S8108 to turn off the special 2 main display flag. After executing Step S8108, the process proceeds to Step S8109.

  In step S8109, the special 1 main display command B is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The special 1 main display command B instructs the display control device 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the change of the symbol in the 100th game time after the high frequency support mode is started. It is a command to instruct. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the special 1 main display command B switches from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the change of the symbol in the 100th game time after the high frequency support mode is started. Execute the process for After executing step S8109, the display mode switching process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8107 that the low frequency support command has not been received (S8107: NO), the display mode switching process is terminated without executing steps S8108 and S8109.

<Special game processing for special 1>
Next, the special 1 game round effect process will be described. The special 1 game round effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8003).

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game times effect processing. The special 1 game times effect processing is for setting the content of the effect in the game times executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 when the special 1 variation command is received. It is processing. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 1 game round effect process will be described.

  In step S8201, it is determined whether a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8201 that the special 1 variation command has not been received (S8201: NO), the processing of the special 1 game round effect is performed without executing the processing of steps S8202 to S8210 described below. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8201 that the special 1 variation command has been received (S8201: YES), the process proceeds to step S8202.

  In step S8202, the special 1 variation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of reach, and variation time is read from the command. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8203.

  In step S8203, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8203: NO), the process proceeds to step S8204, and the effect display pattern setting process for the main display area is executed. In the effect display pattern setting process for the main display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA are set based on the information read in step S8202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8203: YES), the process advances to step S8205 to execute the effect pattern setting process for the sub display area. In the effect display pattern setting process for the sub display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the first sub display area SA1 are set based on the information read in step S8202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8206.

  In step S8206, a liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, when the result of the big hit lottery of this game is 16R type 1 big hit, 8R type 1 big win, 8R type 2 big win, the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, when the result of the big hit lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 big hit or 8R type 1 big win, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination. At the same time, the same even symbol combination can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R type 1 big hit. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 8R type 2 jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big game lottery for the current game round is out of play, whether or not a reach has occurred is determined from the contents of the special 1 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing Step S8206, the process proceeds to Step S8207.

  In step S8207, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game times is specified from the contents of the special 1 variation command received this time, information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal symbol identified in step S8206. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S8207, the process proceeds to Step S8208.

  In step S8208, the information on the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal design, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the special 1 game round presentation command. Then, the process proceeds to step S8209, and the special 1 game round effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received special 1 game round effect command. After executing Step S8209, the process proceeds to Step S8210.

  In step S8210, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the first hold number counter area is updated so that the first hold number stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing Step S8210, the special game play effect processing for special 1 is terminated.

<Special game processing for special game 2>
Next, the special 2 game times effect processing will be described. The special game play effect processing for 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 154: S8004).

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing special 2 game times effect processing. The special 2 game times effect process is for setting the content of effects in the game times that are executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 when the special 2 variation command is received. It is processing. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 2 game round effect process will be described.

  In step S8301, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8301 that the special 2 variation command has not been received (S8301: NO), the processing of the special 2 game round effect is performed without executing the processing of steps S8302 to S8310 described below. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8301 that the special 2 variation command has been received (S8301: YES), the process proceeds to step S8302.

  In step S8302, the special variation command received at this time is read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, and variation time are read from the command. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8303.

  In step S8303, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8303: YES), the process advances to step S8304 to execute the effect display pattern setting process for the main display area. In the effect display pattern setting process for the main display area, the content of the notice effect displayed in the main display area MA is set based on the information read in step S8302. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8306. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8303: NO), the process advances to step S8305 to execute the effect display pattern setting process for the sub display area. In the effect display pattern setting process for the sub display area, the content of the notice effect to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is set based on the information read in step S8302. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8306.

  In step S8306, a liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, when the result of the big hit lottery of this game is 16R type 1 big hit, 8R type 1 big win, 8R type 2 big win, the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, The same even symbol combination may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R type 1 big hit. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 8R type 2 jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  When the result of the big hit lottery of the current game round is out of play, the presence / absence of a small win is determined from the contents of the special 2 variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the predetermined line on the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the small hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2) is used as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. Set. After executing Step S8306, the process proceeds to Step S8307.

  In step S8307, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game times is specified from the contents of the special 2 variation command received this time, the information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal symbol identified in step S8306 above. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S8307, the process proceeds to Step S8308.

  In step S8308, the information on the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the special 2 game round effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8309, and the special 2 game round effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received special 2 game times effect command. After executing Step S8309, the process proceeds to Step S8310.

  In step S8310, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the second hold number counter area is updated so that the second hold number stored in the second hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S8310, the special 2 game times effect process is terminated.

<Processing for standby>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for timer interrupt processing (FIG. 154: S8005).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the standby process. The standby process is a process for causing the display control apparatus 100 to start displaying a demo video (main demo video) or a sub-demo video when a special 1 customer wait command or a special 2 customer wait command is received. Hereinafter, specific processing of the standby processing will be described.

  In step S8401, special 1 migration preparation processing is executed. The special 1 migration preparation process is a process for executing preparation for starting a demo video (main demo video) or a sub-demo video when a special 1 customer waiting command is received. Details of the special 1 migration preparation process will be described later. After executing Step S8401, the process proceeds to Step S8402.

  In step S8402, special 2 migration preparation processing is executed. The special 2 migration preparation process is a process for executing preparation for starting a demo video (main demo video) or a sub-demo video when a special 2 customer waiting command is received. Details of the special 2 migration preparation process will be described later. After executing step S8402, the process proceeds to step S8403.

  In step S8403, a main demo migration process is executed. The main demo transition process is a process for displaying a demo video (main demo video) in the main display area MA. Details of the main demo migration process will be described later. After executing Step S8403, the process proceeds to Step S8404.

  In step S8404, a sub demo migration process is executed. The sub demo transfer process is a process for displaying a sub demo video in the first sub display area SA1. Details of the sub demo migration process will be described later. After executing Step S8404, the process proceeds to Step S8405.

  In step S8405, return processing is executed. The return process is a process for ending the demo video (main demo video) or the sub-demo video and returning to the normal state when the special 1 variation command or the special 2 variation command is received. Details of the return processing will be described later. After executing step S8405, the standby process is terminated.

<Special 1 migration preparation process>
Next, the special 1 migration preparation process will be described. The special 1 migration preparation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the standby process (FIG. 158: S8401).

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the special 1 migration preparation process. In the special 1 migration preparation process, when the special 1 customer wait command is received, the special 1 customer wait flag is turned ON. When the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned on, if the special 1 main display mode is in effect, the state shifts to the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds. When the standby state for special 1 for 15 seconds is completed, the volume reduction flag is turned on, and the process for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. Thereafter, when the sound volume becomes zero, display of a demo video (main demo video) is started in the main display area MA in a main demo transition process to be described later. On the other hand, when the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned ON, if the special 2 main display mode is in effect, the sub-demo start flag is turned ON. Thereafter, in the sub demo transition process described later, display of the sub demo video is started in the first sub display area SA1. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 1 migration preparation process will be described.

  In step S8501, it is determined whether a special customer waiting command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8501 that a special customer waiting command has been received (S8501: YES), the process advances to step S8502 to store special flags stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. Turn on the customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8501 that the special customer waiting command has not been received (S8501: NO), the process proceeds to step S8503 without executing step S8502.

  In step S8503, it is determined whether or not the special 1 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 standby state flag is not ON (S8503: NO), the process proceeds to step S8504, and it is determined whether or not the special 1 customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8504 that the special 1 customer waiting flag is not ON (S8504: NO), the special 1 migration preparation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8504 that the special customer waiting flag is ON (S8504: YES), the process proceeds to step S8505.

  In step S8505, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8505: NO), the process proceeds to step S8506, and the special 1 standby state flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8507, and the special 1 standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0se) is set in the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the special 1 standby state flag is turned ON, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. The After executing step S8507, the process proceeds to step S8508 to turn off the special customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 1 is finished.

  If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8505: YES), the flow advances to step S8509 to set the sub-demo start flag to ON. As a result, the sub-demo video display is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demo transition process described later. After executing step S8509, the process proceeds to step S8510 and the special customer waiting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 1 is finished.

  If it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8503: YES), the process advances to step S8511 to determine whether or not the special 1 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0. If the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0, the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds is determined. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8511 that the special 1 standby state period has not ended (S8511: NO), the special 1 migration preparation process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8511 that the special 1 standby state period has ended (S8511: YES), the process proceeds to step S8512, and the volume reduction flags stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 are displayed. Set to ON. As a result, a main demo transition process, which will be described later, is executed, whereby a process for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8512, the process proceeds to step S8513, and the special 1 standby state flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 1 is finished.

<Special 2 migration preparation process>
Next, the special 2 migration preparation process will be described. The special 2 migration preparation processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for standby processing (FIG. 158: S8402).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing special 2 migration preparation processing. In the special 2 migration preparation process, when the special 2 customer wait command is received, the special 2 customer wait flag is turned ON. When the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned on, if the special 2 main display mode is in effect, the state shifts to the special 2 standby state for 15 seconds. When the standby state for special 2 for 15 seconds is completed, the volume reduction flag is turned on, and the process for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. Thereafter, when the sound volume becomes zero, display of a demo video (main demo video) is started in the main display area MA in a main demo transition process to be described later. On the other hand, when the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned on, if the special 1 main display mode is in effect, the sub-demo start flag is turned on. Thereafter, in the sub demo transition process described later, display of the sub demo video is started in the first sub display area SA1. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 2 migration preparation process will be described.

  In step S8601, it is determined whether a special customer waiting command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8601 that the special 2 customer waiting command has been received (S8601: YES), the process proceeds to step S8602, and the special 2 special data stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. Turn on the customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8603. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8601 that the special customer waiting command has not been received (S8601: NO), the process proceeds to step S8603 without executing step S8602.

  In step S8603, it is determined whether or not the special 2 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 standby state flag is not ON (S8603: NO), the process advances to step S8604 to determine whether or not the special 2 customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8604 that the special 2 customer waiting flag is not ON (S8604: NO), the special 2 migration preparation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8604 that the special customer waiting flag is ON (S8604: YES), the process proceeds to step S8605.

  In step S8605, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8605: YES), the process advances to step S8606 to set the special 2 standby state flag to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8607, and the special 2 standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0se) is set in the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the special 2 standby state flag is turned ON, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. The After executing step S8607, the process proceeds to step S8608 to turn off the special 2 customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 2 is finished.

  If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8605: NO), the process proceeds to step S8609, and the sub-demo start flag is turned ON. As a result, the sub-demo video display is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demo transition process described later. After executing step S8609, the process proceeds to step S8610, and the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 2 is finished.

  If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8603: YES), the process advances to step S8611 to determine whether or not the special 2 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0. If the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0, the special 2 standby state for 15 seconds is determined. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8611 that the special 2 standby state period has not ended (S8611: NO), the special 2 migration preparation process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8611 that the special 2 standby state period has ended (S8611: YES), the process proceeds to step S8612 and the volume reduction flags stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 are displayed. Set to ON. As a result, a main demo transition process, which will be described later, is executed, whereby a process for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8612, the process proceeds to step S8613 to turn off the special 2 standby state flag. Thereafter, the migration preparation process for this special 2 is finished.

<Main demo migration process>
Next, the main demo migration process will be described. The main demo transition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for standby processing (FIG. 158: S8403). In the following, the main demo video displayed in the main display area MA is also simply referred to as a demo video.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main demo migration process. In step S8701, it is determined whether an RTC effect flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S8701: YES), the main demo transition process is terminated. In other words, during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, it is configured not to shift to a mode in which a demo video is displayed in the main display area MA. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S8701: NO), the process proceeds to step S8702, and it is determined whether or not the main return flag is ON. The main return flag is a flag that is turned ON when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in a later-described recovery process. If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is not ON (S8702: NO), the process proceeds to step S8703.

  In step S8703, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S8703: NO), the process proceeds to step S8704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S8703: YES), the main demo transition process is terminated.

  In step S8704, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start wait flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the period is waiting for the start of the demo video, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag that is turned off at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed since the output level (volume) of the sound is zero. If it is determined in step S8704 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S8704: NO), the process proceeds to step S8705.

  In step S8705, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8705: YES), the process proceeds to step S8706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8705: NO), the main demo transition process is terminated.

  In step S8706, a process for reducing the output level (volume) of the sound is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set at 3000 levels, and processing for lowering the audio output level by 1 level is executed. In the present embodiment, since the main demo transition process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec, the audio output level (volume) becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing Step S8706, the process proceeds to Step S8707.

  In step S8707, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S8707: YES), the process proceeds to step S8708, the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S8709 to wait for the start of the demonstration video. Turn on the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8710. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S8707: NO), the main demo transition process is terminated.

  In step S8710, a demo video start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, “2500” (that is, 5.0 sec) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the sound output level (volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. The After executing step S8710, the main demo migration process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S8704 that the demo video start wait flag is ON (S8704: YES), the process proceeds to step S8711.

  In step S8711, it is determined whether or not the 5-second demonstration video start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo video start wait timer counter Tx is 0. If the value of the demo video start wait timer counter Tx is 0, the 5-second demo video start wait period ends. It is determined that If it is determined in step S8711 that the demo video start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S8712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8711 that the demo video start waiting period has not ended, the main demo transition process ends.

  In step S8712, background music output stop processing is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8713, and a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S8713, the process proceeds to Step S8714.

  In step S8714, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S8715, where the demonstration moving image display flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8716, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and the main demo transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is ON (S8702: YES), the process advances to step S8717 to determine whether the cueing determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8717 that the cueing determination flag is not ON (S8717: NO), the process proceeds to step S8718, and the sound output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing Step S8718, the process proceeds to Step S8719.

  In step S8719, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8719: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8720, and the volume reduction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8721. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8719: NO), the process proceeds to step S8721 without executing step S8720.

  In step S8721, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8721 that the demo video start wait is ON (S8721: YES), the process proceeds to step S8722 and the demo video start wait flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8723, and the main return flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8721 that the demonstration video start waiting flag is not ON (S8721: NO), the process proceeds to step S8723 without executing step S8722, and the main return flag is turned OFF. After executing step S8723, the main demo migration process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S8717 that the cueing determination flag is ON (S8717: YES), the process proceeds to step S8724, and a demo video end command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo video end command executes a process for ending the display of the demo video. After executing step S8724, the process proceeds to step S8725, and the demonstration moving image display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8726.

  In step S8726, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8727.

  In step S8727, the audio output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing Step S8727, the process proceeds to Step S8728.

  In step S8728, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cueing determination flag is ON, output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8729, and the cueing determination flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8730, the main return flag is turned OFF, and the main demo transition process is terminated.

<Sub demo migration process>
Next, the sub demo migration process will be described. The sub demo transfer process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8404).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing sub demo migration processing. In step S8801, it is determined whether the sub return flag is ON. The sub return flag is a flag that is turned on when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in a later-described recovery process. If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is not ON (S8801: NO), the process proceeds to step S8802.

  In step S8802, it is determined whether the sub-demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8802 that the sub-demo video display flag is not ON (S8802: NO), the process proceeds to step S8803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8802 that the sub-demo video display flag is ON (S8802: YES), the sub-demo transition process ends.

  In step S8803, it is determined whether the sub-demo start flag is ON. The sub-demo start flag is a flag that is turned on in the special 1 migration preparation process (FIG. 159) or the special 2 migration preparation process (FIG. 160). If it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8803: YES), the process proceeds to step S8804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demo start flag is not ON (S8803: NO), the sub-demo transition process is terminated.

  In step S8804, a sub-demo video start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Receiving the sub demo video start command, the display side MPU 102 starts a process for displaying the sub demo video in the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S8804, the process proceeds to Step S8805.

  In step S8805, the sub-demo start flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S8806, where the sub-demo moving image display flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the sub demo migration process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is ON (S8801: YES), the process advances to step S8807 to transmit a sub demo video end command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the sub-demo video end command executes processing for ending the display of the sub-demo video. After executing step S8807, the process proceeds to step S8808, and the sub-demo video display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8809, the sub return flag is set to ON, and the sub demo transition process is terminated.

<Return processing>
Next, the return process will be described. The return processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby processing subroutine (FIG. 158: S8405).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the return process. In step S8901, it is determined whether or not a special 1 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8901 that the special-use variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: NO), the process proceeds to step S8911 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8901 that the special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: YES), the process proceeds to step S8902.

  In step S8902, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8902: NO), the process proceeds to step S8903, and either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 standby state flag is ON. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S8903 that either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8903: YES), the process proceeds to step S8904, and the special 1 customer waiting flag or special 1 flag is set. Among the standby state flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8903 that neither the special customer waiting flag nor the special standby state flag is ON (S8903: NO), the process proceeds to step S8905 without executing step S8904. .

  In step S8905, it is determined whether any one of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8905 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag is ON (S8905: YES), the process proceeds to step S8906, and the main return flag is turned OFF. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8905 that none of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON (S8905: NO), step S8910 is not executed and step S8911 is performed. Proceed to

  If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8902: YES), the process advances to step S8907 to determine whether either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON. Determine. If it is determined in step S8907 that either the special 1 customer wait flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8907: YES), the process proceeds to step S8908, where the special 1 customer wait flag or the sub-demo start flag is selected. The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8909. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8907 that neither the special customer waiting flag nor the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8907: NO), the process proceeds to step S8909 without executing step S8908.

  In step S8909, it is determined whether the sub-demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8909 that the sub-demo video display flag is ON (S8909: YES), the process proceeds to step S8910, and the sub return flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8909 that the sub-demo video display flag is not ON (S8909: NO), the process proceeds to step S8911 without executing step S8910.

In step S8911, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8911 that the special-use variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: NO), the return processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8911 that the special-use variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: YES), the process proceeds to step S8912.

  In step S8912, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8912: YES), the process proceeds to step S8913, and either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S8913 that either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8913: YES), the process proceeds to step S8914, and the special 2 customer waiting flag or special 2 flag is set. Among the standby state flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8913 that neither the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8913: NO), the process proceeds to step S8915 without executing step S8914. .

  In step S8915, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start waiting flag, or the demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8915 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag is ON (S8915: YES), the process proceeds to step S8916, and the main return flag is turned OFF. . Thereafter, the return process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8915 that none of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag is ON (S8915: NO), the process returns to step S8916 without executing step S8916. The process ends.

  If it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8912: NO), the process proceeds to step S8917, and whether or not either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON. Determine. If it is determined in step S8917 that either the special 2 customer wait flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8917: YES), the process proceeds to step S8918, and the special 2 customer wait flag or the sub-demo start flag is selected. The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8919. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8917 that neither the special customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8917: NO), the process proceeds to step S8919 without executing step S8918.

  In step S8919, it is determined whether the sub-demo video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8919 that the sub-demo video display flag is ON (S8919: YES), the process proceeds to step S8910, and the sub return flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the return process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8919 that the sub-demo video display flag is not ON (S8919: NO), this return processing is terminated without executing step S8910.

<Process for RTC production>
Next, the RTC effect process will be described. The RTC effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8006).

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing. In step S9001, it is determined whether an RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect in-progress flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. In step S9001, when it is determined that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S9001: NO), the process proceeds to step S9002, and the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9003.

  In step S9003, it is determined whether or not the read time information coincides with a time set in advance as a time for starting execution of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches 00 minutes. In step S9003, when it is determined that the read time information does not coincide with the time set in advance as the time for starting the execution of the RTC effect (S9003: NO), the process for the RTC effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information matches the time set in advance as the time to start execution of the RTC effect (S9003: YES), the process proceeds to step S9004.

  In step S9004, an RTC effect time setting process is executed. Specifically, “150,000” (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing Step S9004, the process proceeds to Step S9005.

  In step S9005, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. After executing Step S9005, the process proceeds to Step S9006.

  In step S9006, an RTC effect music output start process is executed. Specifically, output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. When background music is being output, output of the background music is stopped and output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9007, where the RTC effect flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9008.

  In step S9008, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo movie start wait flag, or the demo movie display flag is ON. The situation in which any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo movie start waiting flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON means a situation in which the audio output level (volume) is reduced. If it is determined in step S9008 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag is ON (S9008: YES), the process proceeds to step S9009.

  In step S9009, the reduced audio output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9010, and the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo video start flag is a flag for starting the demo video after the RTC effect ends. After executing Step S9010, the process proceeds to Step S9011, and the flag that has been turned on among the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9008 that all of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start wait flag, and the demo video display flag are OFF (S9008: NO), the processing from step S9009 to step S9011 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S9012.

  In step S9012, it is determined whether the main return flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is ON (S9012: YES), the process proceeds to step S9013, the demo video start flag after RTC effect is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S9014, where the main return flag is set. Turn off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is not ON (S9012: NO), the processing for RTC effect is terminated without executing the processing of steps S9013 and S9014.

  If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S9001: YES), that is, if the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S9015.

  In step S9015, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S9003 is zero. If it is determined in step S9015 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S9015: YES), the process proceeds to step S9016, and the process proceeds when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9015 that it is not time to end the RTC effect (S9015: NO), the process proceeds from step S9008 to step S9014 described above. This is because the volume reduction flag and the main return flag may be turned ON even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S9008 to step S9014.

  In step S9016, the RTC effect in-progress flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9017 to execute an RTC effect music output stop process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9018.

  In step S9018, it is determined whether the post-RTC demonstration demo video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9018 that the post-RTC demonstration demo video start flag is not ON (S9018: NO), the process proceeds to step S9019, and a background video start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9020 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, output starts from the temporal start position of the background music. Thereafter, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9018 that the post-RTC demonstration demo video start flag is ON (S9018: YES), the process proceeds to step S9021, and a demo video start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9022, and the demonstration moving image display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9023.

  In step S9023, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because the music to be output together with the demo video is not set in the present embodiment. After executing step S9023, the process proceeds to step S9024, and the cueing determination flag is turned ON. By this process, the cueing determination flag can be turned ON during the display of the demo video. After executing Step S9024, the process proceeds to Step S9025, and the post-RTC effect demo video start flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

<Result display processing>
Next, the result display process will be described. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8007).

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating a result display process. In step S9101, result display tabulation processing is executed. The result display tabulation process calculates information necessary for displaying a result image based on a prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a command indicating the number of times that the player has won a jackpot during the high probability mode. To do. After executing Step S9101, the process proceeds to Step S9102.

  In step S9102, it is determined whether a final specific game round end command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S9102 that the final specific game turn end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: YES), the process advances to step S9103 to transmit a result display start command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the result display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9102 that the final specific game round end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: NO), the result display processing is terminated without executing step S9103.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S9201, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9202.

  In step S9202, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S9301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S9401, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 167) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S9401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the effect such as the notice effect or the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90, and the effect image corresponding to the aspect is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S9402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command response processing (S9401) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9403.

  In step S9403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S9402), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9404.

  In step S9404, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S9403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

K8. effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 customer waiting command indicates whether or not there is a reserved game number of the first start port game times (whether or not the first start reserved number RaN is 0). The special 2 customer waiting command is transmitted based on the presence / absence of the second start opening game times (whether or not the second start hold number RbN is 0). The symbol display device 41 switches between the mode for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demo video based on the special 1 customer waiting command, and based on the transmitted special 2 customer waiting command. The mode for displaying the second liquid crystal design and the mode for displaying the demo video are switched.

  Therefore, when the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are each displayed in different display areas of the design display device 41, the first liquid crystal design and the demo video display mode are displayed. The switching is performed independently of the presence or absence of the second start opening game times (whether or not the second start reservation number RbN is 0), and the presence or absence of the first start opening game times ( Switching between the mode for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demo video can be performed on the basis of the first start opening game number RaN. Presence / absence of the second start opening game times (whether or not the second start hold number RbN is 0) in a manner independent of the presence or absence of the hold game times (whether or not the first start hold number RaN is 0). ).

  Therefore, the symbol display device 41 switches between the mode for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demo video, and the switching between the mode for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demo video. Switching between the mode for displaying the second liquid crystal design and the mode for displaying the demo video can be performed in an independent mode, and switching between the mode for displaying the first liquid crystal design and the mode for displaying the demo video. Can be carried out in an independent manner.

  As a result, the transition of the display state of the main display area MA is correlated with the game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2), The display state transition of the display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2) is displayed in each display area as compared with the configuration correlated with the game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player information regarding the presence / absence (presence / absence of reserved game times) of the game times (game times for the first start port or game times for the second start port) corresponding to the liquid crystal design being performed. it can. In other words, when the game is being executed, the player is executing any one of the first start game time or the second start game time, and which game time is being executed. You can easily grasp whether there is any.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can shift the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 to different display states independently of each other. Therefore, independent display control can be easily performed on the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted, that is, when the low frequency support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode, or when the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Since the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in a different display area from that before the game state transitions, the player can easily recognize that the game state has transitioned. Can be made.

  Further, when the game state is shifted, two liquid crystal symbols, ie, a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game times and a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start opening game times are displayed. Since the display area is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2), for example, the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are changed to roles in the game. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tightness, for example, by causing the player to guess that there has been, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine, the player is expected to feel the same about the results of the two jackpot lotteries of the first start game and the second start game. Can be granted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to a predetermined 12 seconds, the last specific game time is started. It is possible to set in advance a control that takes into account the variation time of at least two game times executed most recently. Specifically, in the at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time, an effect of displaying a result image, which is an effect whose execution time is set to 10 seconds in advance, on the symbol display device 41 Can be executed.

  In the case of a simultaneous variable machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the first start opening game time or the second start time is executed during the period in which either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time is executed. Since either one of the game times for mouth may be executed, even if the variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to a predetermined 12 seconds, Of the two game times, the time from the start of the game time started first to the end of the game time started later may be shorter than the total time of two game times whose variation time is a predetermined time. is there. However, of the two game times, as the time from the start of the game time started first to the end of the game time started later, at least one game time with a variation time of 12 seconds is secured. It is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to secure at least one game time with a variation time of 12 seconds, and control in consideration of the secured time is set in advance. be able to. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the result image using the reserved time.

  Further, in the case of a simultaneous variable machine, either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time is executed during the period of executing either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time. Or the other. Accordingly, during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, for example, the first start opening game round is ended and a new first start opening game round is started, or the second start opening game round is ended. There may be a case where a new second starting game is started. As described above, the start timing of game times and the end timing of game times are also referred to as “game time breaks”.

  Here, if a “game time break” occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, the player may have a complicated impression of the effect being executed. Moreover, there is a possibility that the player cannot concentrate on the lottery result of the big hit lottery at each game time.

  Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect of displaying the result image, the pachinko machine 10 performs the effect of displaying the result image by using the variation times of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel. Since it is set to a time (12 seconds) that is longer than the required time (10 seconds), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a division of game times during the period in which the effect of displaying the result image is being executed.

  Also, by setting the number of game times to set the variation time to 12 seconds, the result image can be reduced while suppressing the occurrence of game time breaks during the period in which the effect of displaying the result image is being executed. It is possible to minimize the number of game times set to a variation time (12 seconds) longer than the time (10 seconds) required to execute the effect to be displayed.

  Since an effect of displaying a result image is executed as an effect of notifying information related to the privilege granted to the player, the player can easily grasp the granted privilege.

  In addition, for the player, the information related to the granted privilege is information of high interest. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of a break in the game times during the execution of the effect of informing information that is highly interesting to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment displays the result image after the end of the last game time in the high probability mode (the game time execution number after the probability change is the 120th game time). That is, the result image is displayed after the display of the guidance display GD1 is completed. Here, if the result image is configured to be displayed before the end of the last game round in the high probability mode, the result image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the high probability mode ends. The person recognizes that it is better to change the direction in which the game balls are distributed from the right side of the game board 30 to the left side. However, in this configuration, when the result image is displayed, the guidance display GD1 indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 is displayed. Therefore, when it is set as the structure which displays a result image and guidance display GD1 simultaneously, there exists a possibility of giving a skeptical feeling to a player. In that respect, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not display the result image during the high probability mode, and the player can avoid having a skeptical feeling.

K9. Other aspects of the eleventh embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot effect during the display of the result image may be provided as a dedicated effect video (hereinafter also referred to as a result-only jackpot effect). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the state where the result image is displayed, the first start game game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the second sub display area SA2, or The result image to be displayed in the main display area MA when the jackpot lottery of any one of the second start-up game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is won. Is displayed in a time shorter than the preset display time (10 seconds) of the result image, and the result-only jackpot effect is executed. After recognizing that the high-probability mode has ended by displaying the result image, the player recognizes that the lottery lottery has been won by the result-only jackpot production. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but the two game times If the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the variation time may be set to a specific variation time instead of 12 seconds. For example, it is good also as a structure set to the display of a result image and the fluctuation | variation time required in order to perform result exclusive jackpot production.

<Aspect 2>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to 12 seconds, which is a predetermined time, but is shown in FIG. As shown in the example, when the display of the result image for 10 seconds is completed in the first (first) game times of the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time, the second time The game time variation time may not be set to 12 seconds. For example, it can be realized by preparing a flag indicating that the display of the result image for 10 seconds is completed, and using the flag as an index to determine whether to apply or not apply the 12-second variation time setting. In this way, unnecessary time can be omitted as the execution time of at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time is started.

<Aspect 3>
Another aspect may be adopted as a process of setting the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after starting the last specific game time to 12 seconds that is a predetermined time. Specifically, the final specific game times were started using a variation pattern table which is table data in which the game times from the start of the high probability mode to the 122nd game time and the variation times in each game time are associated with each other. You may set the fluctuation | variation time in two game times performed immediately after that. In the variation pattern table, 12 seconds are recorded as the variation time corresponding to the 121st and 122nd game times (two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time). A command indicating that the variation time corresponding to the game times other than the 122th game is set by the variation type counter CS and the variation time table is recorded. By reading such a variation pattern table at the start of the high probability mode, and reading the variation time value or command recorded in the variation pattern table while shifting one by one each time the game time advances. A variable time can be set. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process of counting the number of game times executed until the 122nd time from the start of the high probability mode in order to set the variation time. Therefore, by using the variation pattern table, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the variation time of a specific game time to a specific value.

<Aspect 4>
In the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, but the game time to be set to 12 seconds is The number is not limited to two, and any other number can be applied. When the gaming machine is a simultaneous variable machine as in the eleventh embodiment, the first start opening game is executed during the period of executing either the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time. Or the second start opening game time may be executed, so that the game time is the game time to be executed immediately after the last specific game time is started, and the variable time is a predetermined time of 12 seconds. It is preferable that the number of game times set to be 2 or more. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute an effect whose execution time is set in advance, such as an effect of displaying a result image, within a period in which a game time in which a variable time is set in advance is executed. Control for setting the production can be simplified.

<Aspect 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode is 120 when transitioning to the high probability mode in the first type big hit, but the number is not limited to 120. Any other number of times may be set.

<Aspect 6>
The opening / closing control of the big winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode executed in the case of winning the big win (the first type big win and the second type big win) You may perform based on the program of the open pattern of V winning opening 48. FIG. For example, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the 8R type 1 big win and the 8R type 2 big win can be controlled based on a program set as the following opening pattern. In the example of the following opening pattern, processing in one parenthesis is executed in one round game.

・ [8R 1st class jackpot]: (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → ( V winning entry: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning entry: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning entry: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning entry: 30 seconds open)
-[8R type 2 big hit]: (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large prize opening: 30 seconds open) → ( V prize opening: 0.006 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open)

  In this way, by reading and executing the opening pattern program set for each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, the winning opening to be released in each round game and the opening time of the winning opening are greatly increased. Opening / closing control of the winning a prize port 36a and the V winning award port 48 can be realized.

<Aspect 7>
Since the display of the result image gives the player the recognition that the high probability mode has ended or ended, various effects can be executed using the result image. For example, if you win the first type jackpot during the high probability mode, you will first display a dummy result image as one of the effects of the jackpot, and then perform an effect to notify you that you have won the jackpot lottery To do. Immediately after letting the player recognize that the high probability mode has ended by displaying the result image, it is possible to recognize that it has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give a surprise to the player, The interest can be improved.

<Aspect 8>
While the result image is being displayed, the sound other than the notification sound used for notifying that the big hit lottery has been won may be reduced, or the sound may be muted. When the player recognizes the notification sound or the production sound output during the display of the result image, the player has a sense of expectation that he has won the big hit lottery. However, if the notification sound or the production sound is not a notification sound for notifying that the jackpot lottery has been won, the player will be greatly depressed after expectation and the willingness to play will be reduced. For example, when an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect video is started and a loud sound is suddenly output while the result image is displayed, the player recognizes the sound and at the same time suddenly wins the big hit lottery. I have a sense of expectation. After that, when it is recognized that the sound is the sound of the RTC effect moving image, the player is greatly depressed.

  Therefore, during the display of the result image, unnecessary expectations are given to the player by reducing the sound other than the notification sound used for notifying that the jackpot lottery has been won or by making the sound muted. Can be suppressed.

<Aspect 9>
As described above, when it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30, it is advantageous to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 for the player. When it is more advantageous for the player to display the guidance display GD1 that is a guidance display indicating that the game ball is distributed on the left side of the game board 30, the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game board 30. Is displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is a guidance display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to circulate. That is, it can be said that the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 guide the operation method of the operation handle 25 that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the content of the guidance on the guidance display GD1 is the content indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, and the content of the guidance on the guidance display GD2 is: The content indicates that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the left side of the game board 30.

  Various effects can be executed using the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 having different guidance contents. For example, even after the high frequency support mode ends, a game ball that has been distributed to the right side of the game board 30 immediately before the high frequency support mode ends enters the second start port 34, If the player wins the jackpot or the jackpot by the jackpot lottery executed by the entry, it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the right side of the game board 30. Continue to display GD2. That is, the display control of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 is controlled based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the game time.

  The player has a sense of expectation by recognizing that the guidance display GD2 is continuously displayed despite the fact that the high-frequency support mode has ended. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the player's feelings can be further enhanced because the result is as expected for the player. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit), the result is contrary to the player's expectation. descend. Thus, even after the high frequency support mode has ended, if it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game board 30, by continuing the display of the guidance display GD2, It is possible to guess whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit or a small win and to give the player a sense of urgency. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used as a suggestion effect that suggests the result of the big hit lottery, and the game can be improved.

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the display mode which suggests the result of jackpot lottery as a display mode of guidance display GD1 or guidance display GD2. For example, blue guidance display GD2 and red guidance display GD2 are used as display modes of guidance display GD2. The game ball that has been distributed to the right side of the game board 30 immediately before the end of the high-frequency support mode enters the second start port 34, and the result of the big hit lottery executed by the incoming ball is a small hit. In this case, the frequency (probability) of displaying the blue guidance display GD2 is increased as the display mode of the guidance display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high frequency support mode ends. On the other hand, when a game ball that has been distributed to the right side of the game board 30 immediately before the end of the high-frequency support mode enters the second start port 34, and the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the pitch is a jackpot As a display mode of the guidance display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high-frequency support mode ends, the frequency (probability) of displaying the red guidance display GD2 is increased. Thus, by adopting a display mode that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery as the display mode of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2, the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 are used as suggested effects that suggest the result of the jackpot lottery. Can be used.

  The player not only regards the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 as a display for guiding the operation method of the operation handle 25 and the gaming method, but also pays attention to the display duration and display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2. It becomes like this. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency using the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, and to create new gaming characteristics. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 are suggested by controlling the content of the guidance display, such as whether to display the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2, and by controlling the display form of the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2. It can be used as a production, and the interest of the game can be improved. As the control of the display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, various shapes such as the color and shape of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be controlled.

<Aspect 10>
In the embodiment described above, the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are independently switched between the liquid crystal symbol display and the demonstration video display, but other aspects are employed. May be. For example, in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, the transition from the liquid crystal design to the demo video is executed independently, and both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are in the demo video. When one of the display areas returns from the demonstration video display to the liquid crystal design display, the other display area also returns from the demonstration video display to the liquid crystal design display. May be adopted.

<Aspect 11>
The behavior in the open / close execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) It may be difficult for the player to distinguish the behavior in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when triggered.

  Specifically, it is made difficult for the player to distinguish between the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won. Further, the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 36, which is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the opening / closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, Make the difference difficult for the player to distinguish. For example, the mode of opening the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the first type jackpot is won in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is changed to a mode in which 1.6 seconds opening is executed twice. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the variable winning device 36 from the first small hit of 1.6 seconds. Furthermore, by shortening the opening effect period (opening period) and the ending effect period (ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode executed with the first type jackpot as a trigger (for example, 0 seconds), Furthermore, the behavior in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit, and the behavior in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a small hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the behavior.

  In this way, for example, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the player distributes the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and enters the game ball into the second start port 34, so that the second In the state where the game times for the start opening are continuously executed, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the first type jackpot, it won the jackpot This can make it difficult for the player to recognize this. If the first type jackpot is won, the number of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is 120 times, so the number of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is The number of times increases substantially. However, the increase in the number of executable times in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is notified to the player at the time when the 120th game time is completed from the time when the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are first started. To do. In this case, the player can be recognized as if the number of game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is added, and unexpectedness can be given to the player.

<Aspect 12>
In the eleventh embodiment, the result image is configured to end after 10 seconds from the start of display, but the sound emission control device 90 ends the display of the result image from the main control device 60. When a command (hereinafter also referred to as a result display end command) is received, the display of the result image may be ended.

  For example, the display of the result image is started after the end of the last specific game time (the game time execution number after the probability change is 120th game time) which is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, and the game time after the probability change At the end of the 121st game, the main control device 60 transmits a result display end command to the sound emission control device 90, and displays a result image based on the result display end command received by the sound emission control device 90. It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes.

  However, in such a configuration, if the player finishes the game at the same time as the final specific game time that is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, However, since the 121st game turn is not started and ended, the result image is continuously displayed. That is, a new player starts a game with the game machine, and the main controller 60 starts the voice light emission control device 90 only when the 121st game time is started after the probability change and the game time is ended. The result display end command is transmitted to and the display of the result image is ended based on the result display end command received by the sound emission control device 90. Therefore, when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine, the symbol display device 41 is in a state where a result image indicating the game result of the previous player is displayed, and the symbol display device starts the game. The state 41 is not preferable.

  Therefore, even when the result display end command is not received, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to end the display of the result image when, for example, the state is shifted to a state in which the demo video is started. Specifically, when it is determined that the demo moving image starting flag in the eleventh embodiment is ON, the display of the result image is ended even when the result display end command is not received. Specific processing will be described below.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a result display process executed by the sound light side MPU in the aspect 12 of the eleventh embodiment. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8007).

  In step S9501, the result display tabulation process is executed. The result display tabulation process calculates information necessary for displaying a result image based on a prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a command indicating the number of times that the player has won a jackpot during the high probability mode. To do. After executing step S9501, the process proceeds to step S9502.

  In step S9502, it is determined whether or not a final specific game round end command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game turn end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: YES), the process proceeds to step S9503, and a result display start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S9503, the process proceeds to Step S9504. In step S9504, the result display flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S9505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game turn end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: NO), the process proceeds to step S9505 without executing steps S9503 and S9504.

  In step S9505, it is determined whether the result display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is ON (S9505: YES), the process proceeds to step S9506. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is not ON (S9505: NO), the result display processing is terminated.

  In step S9506, it is determined whether a result display end command has been received from main controller 60 or not. In this aspect, as described above, the result display end command is a command that the main control device 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 at the end of the 121st game time after the probability change.

  If it is determined in step S9506 that a result display end command has been received (S9506: YES), the process proceeds to step S9507, and the result display end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. That is, a result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100 at the end of the 121st game time after the probability change. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the result display end command ends the display of the result image. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9508.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9506 that the result display end command has not been received (S9506: NO), the process proceeds to step S9509, and it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. The demo moving image display flag is a flag that is turned on when the demo moving image starts and turned off when the demo moving image ends. When the demonstration moving image display flag is ON, there is a high possibility that the player of the pachinko machine 10 has stopped playing and left the game.

  If it is determined in step S9509 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S9509: YES), the process proceeds to step S9507, and a result display end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. That is, even if the result display end command is not received, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100, and the display of the result image is ended. More specifically, the display of the result image is started after the end of the last specific game time (the game time execution number after probability change is the 120th game time) which is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, After that, even if the result display end command is not received, if the 121st game time is not started and ended after the probability change, the display of the result image is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9508.

  In step S9508, the result display flag is turned OFF, and then the result display processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9509 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S9509: NO), step S9507 and step S9508 are not executed, and the result display processing is terminated.

  By executing such processing, for example, when the player leaves the seat at the same time as the end of the high probability mode, the sound emission control device 90 has not received a result display end command from the main control device 60. However, the display of the result image can be ended. Therefore, even if the execution of the game is interrupted, an event that the display of the result image is maintained can be avoided. In this mode, even when the game state is changed from the game state in which the game times are executed to the game state in which the game times are not executed, the result is triggered by the change to the game state in which the game times are not executed. Processing to end the display of the image can be executed.

  As a result, the display of the result image on the symbol display device 41 is completed even when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine and the game turn after the probability change is 121. The game can be executed in the same game state as when a normal game is started.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
L1. Outline of the twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, differences between the present embodiment and the eleventh embodiment will be described. The present embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that a right-handed unit 200 described later is provided in the right area of the game area PA of the game board 30.

  In the following description, the configuration of the right-handed unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball that has reached the right-handed unit 200, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 will be mainly described. . The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the eleventh embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of a right-handed unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the right-handed unit 200 has a through-gate 35 provided at the upper end of the right-handed unit 200 where all of the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a firing strength of a predetermined level or higher are used. It is configured to pass. The right-handed unit 200 includes a through gate 35 through which game balls can pass, a distribution mechanism 204 provided downstream of the through gate 35, a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the distribution mechanism 204, and a distribution mechanism 204. A route R2 provided in the center downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 and a route R3 provided on the right side downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 are provided. The path R1 is provided with a variable pitching device 36, the path R2 is provided with an open / close pitching device 34x including the second start port 34 therein, and the path R3 includes a general winning prize. A mouth 32 is provided.

  The distribution mechanism 204 has a function of sequentially distributing the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 to the three paths R1 to R3, and in this embodiment, the path R1 → the path R2 → the path R3 → the path The game balls that have arrived are distributed in the order of R1, route R2, route R3, route R1,.

  The variable pitching device 36 includes an open / close door 36b as a special electric accessory that opens and closes from the lower rotation axis as a base point, and opens and closes a large winning opening 36a and a V winning opening 48 through which a game ball can enter. It is provided inside the door 36b.

  The opening / closing ball entry device 34x includes an opening / closing door 34a as an ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes around a rotation axis at the bottom, and has a second start port 34 into which a game ball can enter, inside the opening / closing door 34a. In preparation.

  The path R1 is configured such that the game balls distributed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the path R1 reach the variable pitching device 36 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. When the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is open at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball is sure to enter the big winning opening 36a provided inside the open / close door 36b. It is configured.

  The path R2 is configured such that the game balls distributed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the path R2 reach the opening / closing ball-injecting device 34x 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. If the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entry device 34x is open at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball always enters the second start opening 34 provided inside the open / close door 34a. It is configured as follows.

  The path R3 is configured such that the game balls distributed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the path R3 reach the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. The game ball is always configured to enter the general winning opening 32.

  Next, the variation of the symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal symbol) in the electric accessory opening lottery and the universal symbol unit 38 in this embodiment will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the electric player-release lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35.

  In the present embodiment, the total of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the stop time during the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, the probability of winning an electric combination release in the electric combination release lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to 232/233. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the electric combination release lottery is executed during the high-frequency support mode, the electric combination release is substantially won.

  In addition, the opening / closing door 34a of the open / close ball entry device 34x is set to 1 time and the opening time is set to 1.8 seconds when the winning combination is selected in the electric character opening lottery.

  In addition, when the electrification is won, the time from when the normal symbol stop time elapses until the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing device 34x starts to open (so-called opening time) is set to 0 seconds. ing. That is, when the electrification opening is won, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x starts to open immediately after the normal symbol stop time has elapsed. In addition, the maximum number (open limit number) that a game ball can enter the second starting port 34 during one opening of the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entry device 34x is set to one. That is, the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entry device 34x is closed immediately after a single game ball enters the second start port 34. Also, the time (so-called ending time) from when the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entry device 34x is closed until the next change of the normal symbol can be started is set to 0 seconds. In other words, when the electric accessory opening lottery is put on hold, the next variation of the normal symbol starts immediately after the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is closed.

  Next, a description will be given of variations in the symbols (hereinafter also referred to as special symbols) in the jackpot lottery and special symbol unit 37 in the present embodiment. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the second start opening 34, all 2R type 1 jackpots are won. The 2R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot that allows the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode to be opened twice (two rounds), so that a game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. It is. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, the total of the variation time and the stop time of the special symbol during the high probability mode is set to 0.6 seconds. In addition, when a big win lottery based on a game ball entering the second start port 34 is executed during the high probability mode, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 74/75. In addition, the probability of winning a big hit (2R type 1 big hit) is set to 1/75 when a big hit lottery based on a game ball entering the second start port 34 is executed during the high probability mode. ing. In other words, in the present embodiment, if a big win lottery based on a game ball entering the second start port 34 is executed during the high probability mode, either a small win or a big win (2R type 1 big win) I will win the crab.

  In addition, the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is set to be opened once and the opening time is set to 1.0 second in the case of winning the small hit in the big win lottery. In addition, when the jackpot lottery is won (2R type 1 jackpot), the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is opened twice, the first opening time is 0.2 seconds, and the second opening time. Is set to 0.6 seconds, and the interval between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 seconds. In addition, only when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is opened in response to the first type big hit, the sorting piece provided in the variable pitching device 36 operates and enters the variable pitching device 36. The played game ball enters the V prize opening 48. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is opened with a small hit as an opportunity, the sorting piece provided inside the variable pitching device 36 does not operate and enters the variable pitching device 36. The played game balls will enter the grand prize winning opening 36a.

  In addition, when winning a small or big win, the time (so-called opening time) from when the special symbol stop time elapses until the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 starts to open is set to 0 seconds. Has been. In other words, when a small win or a big win is won, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 starts to open immediately after the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed. In addition, the maximum number (open limit number) that a game ball can enter the big winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48 during one opening of the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is set to one. Yes. That is, the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is closed immediately after one game ball enters the big winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48. In addition, the time from when the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is closed until the next change of the special symbol can be started (so-called ending time) is set to 0 seconds. That is, when the big hit lottery is put on hold, the next change of the special symbol starts immediately after the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is closed.

  FIG. 171 is a time chart showing the behavior of the game ball that has reached the right-handed unit 200. In FIG. 171, a point where a downward arrow indicating a game ball intersects with a horizontal axis indicating a through gate or the like means that the game ball indicated by the arrow has reached the through gate or the like indicated by the horizontal axis. The interval between the vertical broken lines shown in FIG. 171 is 0.1 second.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Further, the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a constant firing strength that can reach the right-handed unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. ing. Therefore, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 of the right-handed unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  When the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, the game ball PB1 is distributed to the path R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and after 0.3 seconds from passing through the through gate 35, the variable ball entry device 36 To reach. In the example shown in FIG. 171, since the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is in a closed state, the game ball PB1 passes through without entering the big winning opening 36a.

  The second game ball PB2 launched following the game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB1, and is distributed to the path R2 by the distribution mechanism 204. 0.3 seconds after passing, the opening and closing ball-entering device 34x is reached. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, since the first game ball PB1 has passed the through gate 35, the electric service opening lottery triggered by the fact that the electric game opening lottery is won, the opening and closing ball entry device 34x The open / close door 34a ends the normal symbol change time and stop time 0.5 seconds after the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, and starts to open. Therefore, at the timing when the second game ball PB2 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 34x, the opening and closing door 34a of the opening and closing ball entry device 34x is open, and the game ball PB2 is in the second start port 34. Enter the ball. In the present embodiment, since the opening limit number in one opening of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entry device 34x is set to one, when the game ball PB2 enters the second start opening 34, the opening / closing ball opening The open / close door 34a of the device 34x is closed. Then, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second start port 34 as an opportunity. In addition, the electric character release lottery triggered by the passing of the second game ball PB2 through the through gate 35 is put on hold.

  The third game ball PB3 launched following the game ball PB2 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB2, and is distributed to the path R3 by the distribution mechanism 204. The ball enters the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing. Then, three game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the general winning opening 32. In addition, the electric character release lottery triggered by the passing of the third game ball PB3 through the through gate 35 is put on hold.

  The fourth game ball PB4 launched following the game ball PB3 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB3 and is distributed to the path R1 by the distribution mechanism 204. It reaches the variable pitching device 36 0.3 seconds after passing. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, since the second game ball PB <b> 2 has entered the second start opening 34, the big hit lottery is triggered, so the variable pitching device 36. The open / close door 36b of the second game ball PB2 enters the second start port 34, and after 0.6 seconds, the variation time and stop time of the special symbol are finished and starts to open. Therefore, at the timing when the fourth game ball PB4 reaches the variable pitching device 36, the open / close door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is in an open state, and the game ball PB4 enters the big prize opening 36a. Enter the ball. In the present embodiment, since the opening limit number for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 is set to one, when the game ball PB4 enters the big prize opening 36a, the variable pitching device The open / close door 36b of 36 is closed. Then, six game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big prize opening 36a. In addition, the electric character release lottery triggered by the passing of the fourth game ball PB4 through the through gate 35 is put on hold.

  The fifth game ball PB5 launched following the game ball PB4 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB4 and is distributed to the path R2 by the distribution mechanism 204. 0.3 seconds after passing, the opening and closing ball-entering device 34x is reached. Here, the pending electric game opening lottery (electric game opening lottery triggered by the passing of the second game ball PB2 through the through gate 35) is the second game ball PB2 is the second starting port. 34 and started immediately after the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is closed, and in the example shown in FIG. The open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entrance device 34x starts to open 0.5 seconds after the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entrance device 34x is closed. Since the opening / closing time of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is set to 1.8 seconds, the opening / closing operation is performed at the timing when the fifth game ball PB5 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 34x. The open / close door 34a of the ball entry device 34x is in an open state, and the game ball PB5 enters the second start port 34. When the game ball PB5 enters the second start port 34, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing device 34x is closed. Then, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second start port 34 as an opportunity. In addition, the electric character release lottery triggered by the fifth game ball PB5 passing through the through gate 35 is put on hold.

  The sixth game ball PB6 launched following the game ball PB5 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB5, and is distributed to the path R3 by the distribution mechanism 204. The ball enters the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing. Then, three game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the general winning opening 32. It should be noted that the electric character opening lottery triggered by the sixth game ball PB6 passing through the through gate 35 is put on hold.

  The behavior of the seventh game ball PB7 launched following the game ball PB6 is the same as that of the game ball PB4 described above, and enters the grand prize winning opening 36a. The eighth and subsequent game balls are a repetition of the above-described entrance pattern from the game ball PB5 to the game ball PB7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, when the big hit (2R type 1 big hit) is won, the game ball enters the ball during the second opening of the opening / closing door 36 b of the variable pitching device 36. The sorting piece provided inside moves into the V winning opening 48.

  According to the right-handed unit 200 configured as described above, all of the game balls launched toward the right-handed unit 200 are in the high probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. However, the balls enter the second starting port 34, the general winning port 32, and the big winning port 36a in order. Then, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34, and three game balls are obtained based on the game ball entry into the general prize opening 32. The game balls are paid out as prize balls, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the entrance of game balls into the big prize opening 36a or the V prize opening 48. That is, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed unit 200 at a constant firing intensity during the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the second start A total of 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls every time a big hit lottery (game times) based on the game balls entering the mouth 34 is executed.

  Further, as described in the eleventh embodiment, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot lotteries (game times) executed during the high probability mode is the specified number of times (in this embodiment, without winning a jackpot). 120 times), the high probability mode ends. Then, with the end of the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is also ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends, the game balls to be paid out as prize balls to the player before the high probability mode ends. The remaining number is calculated. In the high probability mode, instead of displaying the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends, the player receives a prize ball before the high probability mode ends. The number of remaining game balls to be paid out is displayed. Hereinafter, the number of remaining game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls to the player before the high probability mode ends is also referred to as “remaining acquired number of balls”.

  FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the present embodiment, immediately after the high probability mode is started, the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP that suggests the remaining acquired ball number to the player is displayed on the upper left portion of the display surface 41a. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, ten game balls are entered while a game ball enters the second starting port 34 of the right-handed unit 200 and one big hit lottery (game times) is executed. Will be paid out as a prize ball. Therefore, immediately after the high probability mode is started, the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is 120. Therefore, in the 120 jackpot lottery (game times) If no win is won even once, the number of remaining game balls (remaining acquired balls) to be paid out as prize balls to the player by the end of the high probability mode will be 1200. . Accordingly, “1200” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP immediately after the start of the high probability mode. Then, as the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is decreased. In this embodiment, every time a big hit lottery (game game) is executed, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is decreased by “10”.

  FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the number of remaining acquired balls when winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. In FIG. 173, the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends, the actual remaining number of acquired balls, and the number displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP The remaining number of acquired balls that can be added, which will be described later, is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, after the high probability mode is started, the winning combination (2R type 1 big winning) is won at the timing when “950” is displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, and the high probability mode is selected. The remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the game ends is 120 times again. For this reason, the actual remaining number of acquired balls is again 1200, but in this embodiment, “950” is continuously displayed as it is in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls (1200) is 250 more than the number (950) displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. That is, it is possible to add to the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP by the 250 pieces. Hereinafter, the number obtained by subtracting the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP from the actual remaining acquired ball number is also referred to as “the remaining remaining acquired ball number”. In the present embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot while displaying the remaining number-of-balls suggestion image CP, an effect that suggests that the player has won a jackpot is not executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends is 120 times again.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 173, it can be executed by winning the big hit (2R type 1 big hit) at the timing when “170” is displayed in the remaining number-of-balls suggestion image CP and completing the high probability mode. The remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) is 120 again. For this reason, the actual remaining number of acquired balls is again 1200, but in this embodiment, “170” is continuously displayed as it is in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. For this reason, the actual number of remaining acquired balls (1200) is 1030 more than the number (170) displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. Therefore, the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 1030.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when “90” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball count suggestion image CP, if the remaining acquired balls count that can be added is 500 or more, the remaining acquired ball count has increased by 500. The remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CPB suggesting this is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and the number (90) displayed in the remaining-acquired ball number suggestion image CP is 500. Add pieces. Accordingly, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 1030 at the timing when “90” is first displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. The remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CPB indicating that the number has increased by 500 is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and the number (90 500) is added. Accordingly, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). The remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 530.

  Thereafter, at the timing when “90” is displayed again in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 530, which suggests that the remaining acquired ball number has increased by 500. The remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CPB is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and 500 is added to the number (90) displayed in the remaining-acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. . Accordingly, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). The remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 30.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is one or more at the timing when “0” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the number of remaining acquired balls Is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and “X” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. In the example shown in FIG. 173, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 30 at the timing when “0” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, so the number of remaining acquired balls increases by 30. The remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CPB indicating that the game has been performed is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and “30” is displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. At this time, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball count suggestion image CP matches the actual remaining acquired ball count.

L2. Processing executed in the sound emission control device:
<Remaining acquired ball number display processing>
Next, an example of processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 to display the remaining number of acquired balls will be described.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing a remaining acquired ball number display process executed by the sound light side MPU 92. This remaining acquired ball number display process is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining acquired ball number display process is repeatedly executed every 4 msec.

  In step S9601, it is determined whether or not the remaining acquired ball number display flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94 is ON. The remaining acquired ball number display flag is a flag for determining whether or not the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired ball number display flag is not ON (S9601: NO), the process proceeds to step S9602, and it is determined whether a high probability mode command is received.

  If it is determined in step S9602 that the high probability mode command has not been received (S9602: NO), the remaining acquired ball number display process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9602 that the high probability mode command has been received (S9602: YES), the process proceeds to step S9603, and 1200 is set to the counter indicating the actual remaining number of acquired balls. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9604, and a command for displaying the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in which “1200” is indicated as the remaining acquired ball number is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9604, the process proceeds to step S9605, and the remaining acquired number-of-balls display flag is set ON. Thereafter, the remaining acquired ball number display processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired ball number display flag is ON (S9601: YES), the flow advances to step S9606 to receive a variation command (a variation command for special 1 or a variation command for special 2). It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S9606 that a variation command has been received (S9606: YES), the process proceeds to step S9607 to subtract 10 from the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. The command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for subtracting 10 from the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. After executing step S9607, the process proceeds to step S9608, and 10 is subtracted from the counter indicating the actual remaining number of acquired balls. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9606 that a variation command has not been received (S9606: NO), the process proceeds to step S9609 without executing the processes in steps S9607 and S9608.

  In step S9609, it is determined whether a V winning command is received. If it is determined in step S9609 that a V winning command has been received (S9609: YES), the process proceeds to step S9610, and from “1200”, the remaining number of acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP The value obtained by subtracting is set in a counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9611, and 1200 is set to a counter indicating the actual remaining number of acquired balls. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9612. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9609 that the V winning command has not been received (S9609: NO), the process proceeds to step S9612 without executing the processes in steps S9610 and S9611.

  In step S9612, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of acquired balls displayed in the remaining number of acquired balls suggestion image CP is 90. If it is determined in step S9612 that the remaining number of acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP is 90 (S9612: YES), the process proceeds to step S9613, and the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S9613 that the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more (S9613: YES), the process advances to step S9614 to display a command for displaying the acquired number-of-balls increase suggestion image CPB. Send to. Receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After executing step S9614, the process proceeds to step S9615, and a command for adding 500 to the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for adding 500 to the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. After executing step S9615, the process proceeds to step S9616, and 500 is subtracted from the counter indicating the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9617. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9612 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is not 90 (S9612: NO), and in step S9613, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 500. If it is determined that the above is not the case (S9613: NO), the process proceeds from step S9614 to step S9616 without executing the process of step S9616.

  In step S9617, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining acquired balls displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is zero. If it is determined in step S9617 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is 0 (S9617: YES), the process proceeds to step S9618, where there is a remaining acquired ball number that can be added. Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is a remaining number of acquired balls that can be added (S9618: YES), the process proceeds to step S9619, and a command for displaying the acquired number-of-balls increase suggestion image CPB is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. . Receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After executing step S9619, the process proceeds to step S9620 to display a command for adding a counter value indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added to the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP on the display side. It transmits to MPU102. Receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for adding the value of the counter to the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP. After executing step S9620, the process proceeds to step S9621, and 0 is set in a counter indicating the remaining number of acquired balls that can be added. Thereafter, the remaining acquired ball number display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9617 that the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is not 0 (S9617: NO), the processing from step S9618 to step S9621 is not executed. The remaining acquired ball number display process is terminated. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is no remaining number of acquired balls that can be added (S9618: NO), that is, if the value of the counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 0, the process proceeds to step S9622. Then, a command for ending the display of the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for terminating the display of the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9622, the process proceeds to step S9623, and the remaining acquired number of balls display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the remaining acquired ball number display processing is terminated.

L3. Effects of the twelfth embodiment:
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP indicating the information corresponding to the remaining acquired ball number is displayed, so that the game ball that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends. It is possible to make the player know the number of cards. In addition, for example, compared to a configuration that displays the remaining number of jackpot lotteries that can be executed before the high probability mode ends, the player can see how much expectation the high probability mode can have Can be clearly recognized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the game balls enter the V winning opening 48 and the remaining number of acquired balls increases, the remaining number-of-balls suggestion image CP Is updated with the remaining number of acquired balls as the upper limit, so that the player can recognize that the number of game balls that can be acquired by the end of the high probability mode has increased. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the high probability mode.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the remaining number of acquired balls increases, the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed, so that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends is increased. The number of players can be clearly recognized by the player, and the player's sense of expectation for the high probability mode can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the remaining number of acquired balls at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the number of remaining acquired balls has increased (in this embodiment, the timing at which a game ball enters the V winning opening 48). Since the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the suggestion image CP is increased, it is possible to add a surprise to the game and at what timing the remaining acquired ball number indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP increases. Can provide a player with high expectations.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the image of increasing the number of remaining balls to be suggested CPB is increased with 500 increments as one unit, so that the expectation for one increase can be improved. . The unit of increase is not limited to 500, but may be set to an arbitrary number such as 300 or 1000.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is less than 500, which is one unit of increase, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is 0. At this timing, since the number less than 500 is added to the remaining acquired number of balls indicated by the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP, the remaining acquired number of balls indicated by the remaining acquired number of balls suggested image CP becomes zero. Even if the remaining number of acquired balls is less than 500, a great expectation can be given to a player whose expectation has decreased.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the remaining number of acquired balls increases, the predetermined number of remaining balls acquired by the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is continuously displayed for a predetermined period. , It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the actual number of remaining acquired balls may be larger than the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired number of balls increase suggestion image CPB, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, when the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a constant firing strength that can reach the right-handed unit 200, The number (3) of game balls entering the large winning opening 36a (V winning opening 48), the second start opening 34, and the general winning opening 32 occupying the number (3) of the played game balls is constant. Therefore, the number of game balls actually paid out before the end of the high probability mode can be matched with the number of remaining acquired balls.

L4. Other aspects of the twelfth embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 when winning a small hit is the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 when winning the 2R type 1 big hit. Although the configuration is different, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 when winning the small hit is the same as the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable pitching device 36 when winning the 2R type 1 big hit. It is good also as composition which is. According to such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice that the 2R type 1 jackpot has been won. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the happiness of the player when the remaining acquired number-of-balls increase suggestion image CPB is displayed.

<Aspect 2>
When the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more, the timing for displaying the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB indicating that the remaining acquired ball number has increased by 500 is determined by lottery. Also good. According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed. Can improve the happiness of the people.

<Aspect 3>
In the case where the remaining number-of-acquisition ball suggestion image CP is displayed, for example, the game ball is scheduled to enter by changing the launch interval and launch strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25 by the player. In the case where the player has not entered the big winning opening 36a, the general winning opening 32, or the like, an effect that suggests that the game ball has not entered as planned may be executed. For example, an image such as “Miss!” May be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

<Aspect 4>
The jackpot type other than the 2R type 1 jackpot may be set as the jackpot type distributed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entrance to the second start port 34. For example, a configuration in which 16R type 1 big hit is set may be adopted. When this configuration is adopted, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening / closing execution mode executed with the 16R type 1 big hit as a trigger is further added to the above-mentioned number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. Good.

<Aspect 5>
In addition to the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the number of game balls actually paid out may be displayed. Further, in addition to the remaining number-of-balls suggestion image CP or instead of the number-of-acquisitions suggestion image CP, the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends may be displayed. Good. In such a configuration, even if the remaining number of jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed before the end of the high probability mode is increased, the predetermined period of jackpot lottery (game times) is displayed for a predetermined period. If it is configured to display continuously without increasing the remaining number of times, the remaining number of actual jackpot lotteries (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is displayed to the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there may be more than the remaining number of times, and to improve the interest of the game.

M.M. Variations:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible.

M1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestion effect was executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game times reproduction effect, but the suggestion effect is not limited to such a configuration. It is good also as a structure which omits. Even if the suggestion effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game time in the second game time despite winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the player wins the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Moreover, even if the suggestion effect is omitted, by executing the game times reproduction effect due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, the player is surprised and the game is Unexpectedness can be imparted.

M2. Modification 2:
In the case a2 of the first embodiment and the case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game time, a suggestion effect may be executed before the game time reproduction effect. In other words, the suggestion effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing as long as it is before the reproduction of the already executed effect. Even if such a configuration is adopted, since the suggestion effect is executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, for example, the effect executed in the second game time is already It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the executed performance is reproduced.

M3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the game time that has been a big hit. An effect executed at a game time that is not a big hit, for example, a reach effect at a game time with a loss (with reach) may be a target of reproduction in a special game state reproduction effect and a game time reproduction effect, or a game with a loss (without reach) The notice effect at the time may be the target of reproduction.

M4. Modification 4:
The first game times and the second game times defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game times executed in succession. For example, other game times may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

M5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which an effect to be executed in the ending period of the special game state is determined based on special information relating to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effects executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round are the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Alternatively, as shown in case a2, whether or not the suggestion effect is to be made is determined based on the special information related to the second game round executed after the special gaming state, but is not limited to such a configuration. The production to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestion production or the special game state reproduction production, and any other production is adopted. Also good. For example, other effects such as a normal reach effect (a reach effect that is not a target of the special game state reproduction effect) or an effect that is executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be employed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of special information relating to a predetermined game number executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, an effect related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

M6. Modification 6:
It is good also as a structure which uses together the process performed in the said 1st Embodiment to 4th Embodiment. That is, case a1 (FIG. 9 (a)) and case a2 (FIG. 9 (b)) which are processes executed in the first embodiment, and a process executed in the second embodiment (FIGS. 46 (a) and (b)). ), Case c1 (FIG. 48 (a)) and case c2 (FIG. 48 (b)), which are processes executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 49 (a), which is a process executed in the fourth embodiment. )) And the case d2 (FIG. 49B), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used in combination. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined treatment. For example, the player's attention and expectation can be improved with respect to effects that reproduce effects that have already been executed, such as special game state reproduction effects and game times reproduction effects.

M7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example of winning the jackpot lottery. However, the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is won. It is not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where a condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 may be adopted. As described above, even when other conditions are set as the predetermined conditions, the same effects as those described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

M8. Modification 8:
In the said 5th Embodiment and 6th Embodiment, although 3 types of images of object AC were employ | adopted as an object image used for a notice effect, it is not limited to such a structure. For example, two types of object images may be employed as the object image used for the notice effect, or four types of object images may be employed. As described above, even if any number of object images are employed, the same effect as in the above embodiment can be obtained. Various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

M9. Modification 9:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the player is shown the jackpot expectation degree as the game situation depending on how the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect are combined. As the game situation such as the degree and the expectation that the current game state is a probable change state, a configuration in which various game situations are shown to the player may be adopted.

M10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, there are three display pattern tables for object A, object B, and object C: jackpot, out (with reach), and out (with no reach). Each display pattern random number is distributed according to the case, for example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of the object B is further divided into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, You may make the production | presentation by the object B function as a step-up production which shows the expectation degree of probability variation big hit. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which the latent probability changing state exists, the effect by the object C may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the expected degree of the probability changing state of the current game times. Thus, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, jackpot expectation degree or The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game (such as the expected degree of probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

M11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the placement position (coordinate) of each object is set to change over time. It may be. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is displayed. Arrangement of display objects and display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so as not to overlap each other.

M12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed to display no image frame. However, the display pattern (A1 A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of the image frames of the images A1, A2, and A3 displayed as -A2-A3) are not displayed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the same process also with respect to another object image.

M13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the arrangement and the display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the notice effect by the arrangement / timing setting table. However, other configurations may be employed. For example, also in the notice effect that displays object A and object B, the notice effect that combines (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3), or the combination of (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) There are multiple types of notice effects such as a notice effect. The arrangement may be such that the arrangement of each object image and the display start timing are set for each of these multiple types of notice effects. By doing in this way, the effect performed when a plurality of objects are displayed in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

M14. Modification 14:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and each object is related. The relative arrangement position between the objects and the display timing are set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having Specifically, it was set so that it is displayed in a mode having narrative as a mode having relevance, but as a mode having relevance, it is set so that a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having one idea. Various modes can be adopted as modes in which a plurality of objects are related, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule.

M15. Modification 15:
Each display pattern set in the display pattern table described in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in the above embodiment, and a display pattern of another mode is adopted. Can do. For example, a display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern that shows the appearance of the dog's face from the box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object C is a display pattern that shows how the dog in the box gets wet due to worsening weather. The player can be recognized that the situation is disadvantageous, and various effects can be executed by combining the objects, so that the objects can be used effectively.

M16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image obtained by combining these is used as the image used for the notice effect, but another image may be used.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for a notice effect. The object D is an image composed of three images, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. 175 (a) shows the image D1, FIG. 175 (b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 175 (c) shows the image D3. As illustrated, the object D represents a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 shows a state in which a male character and a female character are staring at a certain distance. In the image D2, a state in which a male character and a female character are staring at a short distance is expressed. In the image D3, a state in which a male character and a female character are holding hands and are getting along is expressed. Further, the image D3 shows that the female character is talking to the male character in secret to the female character's father.

  In the object D composed of images of such contents, a state in which the love between men and women is fulfilled as the images progress in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3, the image D2 from the image D1, The image D3 generally gives a better impression than the image D2. In other words, the image D2 from the image D1 and the image D3 from the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In addition, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as an effect image that is stepped up so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes a display pattern table for D as a display pattern table. In the three cases of jackpot, missed (with reach), and missed (without reach), no display and display pattern respectively. Four display patterns of (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. When the display pattern table for D is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns. Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed. In the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 is assigned so as to increase.

  The pachinko machine in the present modification further executes a notice effect in which the object D is combined with the image E as another image.

  FIG. 176 shows an image (object D + image E) in which the image E is combined with the object D. As illustrated, an image E that is an image combined with the object D represents the father of a female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], and [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D3 + image E]. 176 (a) shows [Image D1 + Image E], FIG. 176 (b) shows [Image D2 + Image E], and FIG. 176 (c) shows [Image D3 + Image E]. As shown in the figure, an object D + image E shows a female character's father watching a love pattern between a male character and a female character from behind a pillar. Specifically, [Image D1 + Image E] expresses how a male character and a female character are looking at each other at a certain distance, while the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar. Has been. In [Image D2 + Image E], a state in which a male character and a female character are looking at each other at a short distance and a state in which the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar is expressed. In [Image D3 + Image E], the male character and the female character hold hands, and the female character talks to the female character's father that the female character is friendly to the male character. It shows how the father of the female character is looking from behind the pillar.

  An object D + image E composed of images having such contents is obtained as the image progresses in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is speculated that the parent-child relationship deteriorates. Therefore, a generally bad impression is given as the image progresses in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. In other words, [Image D2 + Image E] is generally better than [Image D3 + Image E], and [Image D1 + Image E] is generally better than [Image D2 + Image E]. That is, [Image D2 + Image E] from [Image D3 + Image E] and [Image D1 + Image E] from [Image D2 + Image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  The object D + image E is displayed as an effect image that is set such that the probability of winning the big hit lottery decreases as the image D1 + image E, [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E] progress. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes a display pattern table for DE as a display pattern table. In the three cases of jackpot, missed (with reach), and missed (without reach), the non-display and display patterns respectively. Four display patterns of (D1 / E), display pattern (D1-D2 / E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) are allocated. When the DE display pattern table is out of reach (no reach), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and the display pattern table is out of reach (with reach). In this case, the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. In the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1 / E) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. The display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned a value from 0 to 99 so that the frequency of the display pattern random number is increased.

  By doing in this way, the effect similar to the said 6th Embodiment can be acquired. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modified example, the case where the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E is more than the case where the image D1 is not combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E when the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a in spite of giving the player an advantageous recognition about the game situation. The player can be given more favorable recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, various recognitions about the game situation can be given to the player by devising how to combine the images and the contents of the images.

  In addition, the probability that the big win lottery is won when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is not combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. Even though the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a, the lottery lottery is performed when the image D3 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. There is a high probability of winning. Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with an effect image that steps up as the probability or expectation of winning the jackpot lottery increases, the player can be given a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved. In addition, although the said effect demonstrated the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, there exists the said effect also between the image D1 and the image D2 and the image D2 and the image D3.

M17. Modification 17:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the sound output mode is reduced to the background music volume while the background music output is continued and the volume of the background music is reduced over time. Although it was set as the structure made to transfer to a certain aspect, instead of this, when transition conditions are satisfied, the aspect which reduces the volume of the said background music with progress of time, continuing the output of a background music, and outputting the background music. It is good also as a structure which transfers to the aspect which the volume of background music is zero, without passing.

  In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video after 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume of the background music has become zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be shifted to a mode in which a demo video is displayed at the timing when the volume of background music becomes zero.

  In the above embodiment, the background music output itself continues until 5 seconds elapses after the background music volume becomes zero, and the background music output is stopped after 5 seconds elapses. Instead of this, the background music output may be stopped when the background music volume becomes zero.

M18. Modification 18:
In the embodiment described above, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the temporal head of the background video is displayed. Although the display is started from the position “01” and the output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music, the display and output of the background moving image and the background music are started from the temporal start position. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, the display and output of the background moving image and the background music may be started from a predetermined time position that is most exciting (so-called start position of rust). That is, display is started from a predetermined time position of the background moving image, and an output is made from a predetermined time position of the background music corresponding to the predetermined time position of the background moving image. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure made to start. Even in such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts varies according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

M19. Modification 19
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the background music volume is set to zero. However, the background music volume may not be completely zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to be equal to or lower than a volume that cannot be recognized by the player. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been established.

  In addition, the sound output mode before the transition condition is satisfied is set to a mode in which background music is output at the first volume, and the sound output mode that is shifted after the transition condition is satisfied is the background music first. It is good also as an aspect which outputs with the volume of the 2nd magnitude | size smaller than the volume of the magnitude | size. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been established.

M20. Modification 20:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video, but before the transition condition is satisfied The display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the transition condition are established is not limited to the mode of displaying the background video and the mode of displaying the demo video. For example, if the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode of displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied is The aspect which displays the image different from a predetermined moving image, or the aspect which has stopped the display of the image may be sufficient. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the transition condition is satisfied includes a mode that displays a video that is different from the predetermined video, a mode that stops and displays at least a part of the predetermined video, the predetermined A mode in which the video is not displayed, a mode in which a still image different from the predetermined video is displayed, or a mode in which the video and still image are not displayed may be used.

M21. Modification 21:
In the above-described embodiment, a detection sensor that detects that a game ball has been ejected to the game board 30 is provided, and it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when the game ball is not detected by the detection sensor for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is good also as composition to do. In this way, the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing a game, which is uncomfortable for the player. Can be reduced.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which determines with the return conditions having been satisfied, after the transition conditions are satisfied and when a game ball is detected by the detection sensor. In this way, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is uncomfortable for the player such that the player does not hold for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

M22. Variation 22:
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be used in which background video and background music corresponding to the background video are selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected based on whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the player's selection, or the like.

M23. Modification 23:
The time, numerical value, and the like that are specifically set in the above embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately set to another time, numerical value, or the like. For example, the time until the transition condition is satisfied after the change of the pattern is stopped may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the background music volume becomes zero until the demonstration video is started is It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

M24. Modification 24:
In the above embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode of displaying a demo video, the audio output mode is configured such that no sound is output and the volume is zero. Instead of this, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode of displaying a demo video, the audio output mode is a demo music that is a music corresponding to the demo video and an output level preset by the player. You may be comprised so that it may become the aspect output with (volume).

  In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the process shifts to a mode in which the demo moving image is displayed, the output of the demo music may be started from a predetermined time position. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demo video and the output of the demo music as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the demo music starts varies. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal start position of the demo music. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which output is started from a position in the middle of demo music in time.

M25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information related to time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. However, instead of this, the sound emission control device 90, after executing the RTC effect once, is configured to start the process for executing the RTC effect. The elapsed time from the start of the previous RTC effect is measured, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the start of the previous RTC effect, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. In such a case, the process for executing the RTC effect may be started.

M26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to output the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player. Regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the user, the RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume). According to such a configuration, the power and attention of the RTC effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

M27. Modification 27:
A configuration in which the maximum output level (volume) is maintained when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output after adopting the configuration of the modified example 26 described above. Good. The effect by such a structure is demonstrated. A player who has enjoyed the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is attracted by the power of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume), so that even after the RTC effect ends, There are cases where there is a desire to continue the game at a certain output level (volume). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect has ended.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above-described modification 26 is adopted and the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the output level (volume volume) set in advance by the player is output. It is good also as a structure which returns to (). According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC effect that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above-described modification 26 is adopted and the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the player outputs the sound output level (volume). It is good also as a structure which displays the volume setting screen for setting on the symbol display apparatus 41, and outputs background music with the audio | voice output level (volume) designated by the player. The effect by such a structure is demonstrated. A player who appreciates the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) may get used to the high sound volume, so that the desired output level (volume) may change from that before appreciating the RTC effect music. For this reason, there is a case where it is desired to reset the audio output level (volume) to a desired output level after the RTC effect is finished. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the sound output level (volume) to a desired output level at the timing after the end of the RTC effect.

M28. Modification 28:
The method for determining the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display may be different from the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment. Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the plurality of hold displays displayed is determined to win the jackpot lottery by the first determination process, the plurality displayed By making the display mode of the hold display of the specific pattern display mode, it is highly likely that the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold displays will win the jackpot lottery It may be suggested to the player. For example, in the case where four hold displays of hold display Dm11 to hold display Dm14 are displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display Dm14 is selected in the jackpot lottery by the first determination process. When it is determined to be won, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to red, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to white, and the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to red. That is, the jackpot corresponding to one of the displayed hold displays is changed by changing the display mode of the plurality of displayed hold displays to a specific pattern such as “white / red / white / red”. It can be suggested to the player that the random number counter C1 is highly likely to win the big hit lottery.

  In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 in the predetermined hold game number is won by the big hit lottery, the hold display of the predetermined hold game time and the predetermined hold game number are generated when it is determined by the prior determination process. The jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one pending display in the displayed pending display is selected as a jackpot lottery by determining the display pattern of the pending display of the pending game times generated thereafter as a specific display pattern. You may suggest to the player that you are likely to win. In this case, after the predetermined reserved game number is generated, the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the display mode of the hold display of the reserved game number corresponding to the input ball is displayed. When deciding, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display for which the display mode is determined (the hold display of the predetermined hold game times determined by the first determination process when winning the big win lottery) This can be realized by determining the display mode of the hold display based on the above.

M29. Modification 29:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the reel rotation is started by the insertion of medals and the operation of the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

N. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Informing means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game time;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The effect execution means (MPU62, MPU92 and MPU102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
When the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). The process of c2 and the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A1, at least a part of the effects executed in the first game times in the second game times, even though the special information related to the second game times satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. After that, only by notifying the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round by the notifying means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be imparted to. That is, by making the second game round unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state for giving a privilege to the player after the game times related to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
The production execution means
In the first case where the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
Reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game time after the start of the special game state executed after the first game time and before the start of the second game time. (The process of case a1 in the first embodiment and the process of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
In the second case where the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). c2)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A2, when the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the reproduction performed in the first game round is reproduced in the already executed stage. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes as such. On the other hand, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, at least part of the reproduction performed in the first game round is reproduced in the production already performed. However, it is actually executed because the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game round, when the notification means informs that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, The reproduction executed in the game times does not simply reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first game times, but the special information related to the second game times satisfies a predetermined condition. The player recognizes that the action is executed. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and a player can be given a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the performance that has already been executed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The production execution means
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round, the suggestion effect suggesting that the effect already executed is reproduced before the reproduction (first embodiment). To a suggestion effect executed in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A3, since the suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, the effect executed in the second game time is the first game. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the reproduction is at least part of the performance executed in the round. Then, by notifying the player that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition only after notifying the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round by the notification means, Furthermore, unexpectedness can be imparted to the game.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A3,
The production execution means
When there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A4, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is performed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game times. And reproduction can be performed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game times before the first game time, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game time. (The process of case c1 and the process of case c2 in the third embodiment are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A5, even if a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to a player,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is the same as the effect executed in the first game time. Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, in practice it is executed because the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, as a case where the reach effect is executed, at least one of the effect executed in the first game round and the case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined condition is satisfied. When executed as a part of the reproduction, and on the production, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the production executed in the first game round. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, a case where the process is executed due to satisfying the condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Informing means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game time;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
Game times (first embodiment to third embodiment) executed after a specific game time (first game time in the first embodiment to the third embodiment) in which the special information is a game time satisfying a predetermined condition. A timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round based on the special information relating to the second game round in the game machine.

  According to the feature B1, since the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined based on the special information related to the game time executed after the specific game time, the reproduction is special. Can be given meaning, and the player's attention to the reproduction can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
The production execution means
Prior to the determination means, it is determined whether or not the special information relating to a game time executed after a specific game time in which the special information satisfies a predetermined game condition satisfies the predetermined condition (step S1022). As well as
Based on the result of the determination executed before the determination means, the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is determined (the processing of steps S2302 to S2312 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B2, by performing the determination whether or not the special information related to the game times executed after the specific game times satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means, the effect executed at the specific game times It is possible to determine the effect in the game times executed before the game times determined to reproduce at least a part in consideration of the game times for executing the reproduction. Therefore, for example, an effect related to the reproduction can be executed as an effect in the game times executed before the game times decided to be reproduced.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
The production execution means
Of the game times executed after the specific game time, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the game a2 in the first embodiment, the second in the case c2 in the second embodiment and the case c2 in the third embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that it is determined to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time.

  According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect executed at the specific game time is reproduced in the game times for which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the effect executed at the specific game time is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the game times to be satisfied satisfies a predetermined condition. Only after the result of the determination of the special information related to the game times is notified by the notification means, the game is made surprising by allowing the player to recognize that the special information related to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. be able to. That is, by making the game times unpredictable by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The production execution means
A suggestion effect suggesting that an effect already executed is reproduced before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times.

  According to the feature B4, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the effect that has already been executed is reproduced, the attention level and interest level of the player are reproduced for the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times. Can be improved. In addition, when reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is executed in the game time for which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game time is further reproduced by executing the suggestion effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
A gaming machine according to Feature B4,
The production execution means
When there is another game time between the specific game time and a game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B5, even if there is another game time between a specific game time and a game time that reproduces at least a part of the performance executed in the specific game time, it is suggested in the other game times. By executing the effect, at least a part of the suggestion effect and the effect executed in the specific game times can be reproduced without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
In the case where the effect executing means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times,
The object to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes a reach effect that is an effect executed in the specific game round, and is an effect that suggests to the player that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B6, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time was actually executed based on the special information related to the game time. By making the player recognize this, an unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. In addition, as a case where a reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least a part of the effect executed in a specific game time When it is executed as a reproduction, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed at a specific game time. However, in practice, the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where the process is executed due to the cause. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Informing means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game time;
Special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state for giving a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
When the special game state is executed, an effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to a predetermined game round executed after the special game state (first embodiment). In case a1 and case a2 in the second embodiment, and in case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game round is determined by whether or not the big hit lottery in the second game round (S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of special information related to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, an effect related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The production execution means
When the special game state is executed and the special information related to the predetermined game times is a first case that does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In case a1 in the first embodiment and case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game)
In the case where the special game state is executed and the special information related to the predetermined game times is a second condition satisfying the predetermined game times, the predetermined effect is displayed in the predetermined game times. Execute (In the case a2, the second embodiment, and the case c2 in the third embodiment in the first embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game round)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C2, when the special information related to the predetermined game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the special performance executed in the special game state, the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition In this case, the player can recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning by executing the predetermined game times. Therefore, unexpectedness can be imparted to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C3, at least the effects executed in the game times executed before the special game state in the predetermined game times, even though the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined conditions. Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition. Only after the result of the determination of the special information relating to the predetermined game times is notified by the notifying means, the player recognizes that the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition, thereby making the game unexpected. Can be granted. That is, by making the predetermined game times unexpected development by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine according to Feature C3,
When the game times executed before the special game state are defined as the first game times, and the predetermined game times executed after the special game state are defined as the second game times,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes an effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game time when the special information relating to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction). The target effects are the first by winning the jackpot lottery related to the first game round in the cases a1 and a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the cases c1 and c2 of the third embodiment. Including the performances performed in the game times)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition. The production is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, only when the notification means informs that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the production is performed as a reproduction of the performance executed in the first game round. However, in practice, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second game round has been executed due to the fact that the predetermined condition has been satisfied, and to add an unexpectedness to the game. Further, the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reproduction can be improved.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to Feature C3 or Feature C4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature C5, in the game time (first game time) executed before the special game state when the special information related to the predetermined game time (second game time) satisfies the predetermined condition The executed reach production is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, in the second game round, the reach production that has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in the game round executed before the special game state is actually the second game round. An unexpectedness can be imparted to the game by making the player recognize that the special information relating to the game times has been executed due to satisfying the predetermined condition. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, when it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game times executed before the special game state It is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed at the time of execution, and as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game times executed before the special gaming state on the effect, Can set at least three cases, that is, the case where the special information related to the game times is executed due to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5,
The production execution means
Before executing the predetermined effect, a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is executed is executed.

  According to the feature C6, by executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is executed before executing the predetermined effect, the player's degree of attention with respect to the predetermined effect to be executed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to Feature C6,
The production execution means
The special game state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition,
If there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time,
While performing the suggestion effect in the other game times (in the second embodiment, executing the suggestion effect in the preceding game times),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C7, even if there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time, the suggestion effect and the predetermined game time are determined by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The production can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

[Feature C8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of effects executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C8, even if a continuous effect is executed over at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state, the continuous effect can be reproduced. it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Informing means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game time;
Special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state for giving a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The special gaming state starting means is
Starting the second special gaming state triggered by the fact that the special information related to the second gaming time executed after the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition,
The production execution means
An effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information relating to the first game times (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first case a1. The game times executed before the game times [corresponding to the first game times in the feature group] and the first game times in the case a1 [corresponding to the second game times in the feature group] The first game times [corresponding to the second game times in the feature group] are determined to be executed in the special game state after [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605] / case a2 first game times According to the relationship between [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the second game time in the case a2 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group], the second game time [first in the feature group] 2 games Determining the effect to be executed in the special game state after Action] in time [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D1, the second special that is executed after the second game time in consideration of the special information of the first game time that is executed before the second game time that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. An effect in a gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a relationship between the special information related to the first game times and the effects in the second special game state, and various effects from the first game time to the second special game state. Can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
In the case where the second special gaming state is executed by the special information relating to the second game times satisfying the predetermined condition,
The production execution means
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (when the relationship is between the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment),
In the second game time (the second game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment), the effect executed in the first game time (the first game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part (execute processing of S2308 and S2309)
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) ),
In the second special game state (special game state after the first game operation of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game operation (first game operation of the case a1 of the first embodiment). Reproduce at least a part of the executed performance (execute the processing of S2605)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game round is informed by the notifying means, the game is unexpected by allowing the player to recognize that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Sex can be imparted. That is, by making the second game round unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced in the second special gaming state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to re-appreciate the effect executed when the special information related to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D2,
The production execution means
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment) In the case of a relationship), before performing the reproduction, a first suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed (the process of S2606 is executed),
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time in the second special game state (game time executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) And the first game times), before the reproduction, the second suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed (the process of S2605 is executed). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D3, the first suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced. Since the second suggestion effect is executed prior to, the reproduction of at least part of the effect executed in the first game time or the reproduction of at least part of the effect executed in the second game time, The attention level and interest level of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3,
The production execution means
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment) If relevant)
In the first special gaming state that is started when the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a first suggestion effect that suggests reproducing an effect that has already been executed is executed (S2606). Execute the process)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D4, with respect to the game times after the first special game state is ended by executing an effect suggesting the contents of the effect in the game times after the first special game state in the first special game state. The attention level, interest level, and expectation of the player can be improved.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature D5, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is actually caused by the special information related to the second game round. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed, the game can be given unexpectedness. In addition, when at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game time is executed in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to re-appreciate the reach production at the game times. Furthermore, as a case where a reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a reproduction of at least a part of an effect already executed When executed, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect already executed, but actually, it is executed because the special information related to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Informing means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game time;
Production execution means for performing production in each game time;
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
When the special information relating to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information relating to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition In the case of the case d1 in the fourth embodiment,
In the second game round, reproduce at least a part of the performance executed in the first game round,
Already executed after the execution of the effect in the first game time and before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect.

  According to the feature E1, the first game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game time even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Since at least a part of the effect executed in step S1 is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestion effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, in the second game time, at least the effect executed in the first game time. The player can be given more recognition that only a part has been reproduced. Then, only when the result of determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notifying means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be imparted to. That is, by making the second game round unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
The production execution means
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
The special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game round, reproduce at least a part of the performance executed in the first game round,
After the execution of the effect in the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round, a suggestion effect is suggested that suggests reproducing the already executed effect. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since at least a part of the effect executed in one game round is reproduced, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the special information related to the game round in which the reproduction has been executed does not necessarily satisfy the predetermined condition. . As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, the player is given a feeling of emotional relaxation and expectation, and the player's game play for the reproduction is executed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, further comprising:
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state for giving a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production execution means
When the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) Is
In the second game round, reproduce at least a part of the performance executed in the first game round,
The gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed after the start of a special game state executed after the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round.

  According to the feature E3, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game round is executed in the first game round by satisfying the predetermined condition The production is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, only when the notification means informs that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the production is performed as a reproduction of the performance performed in the first game round. However, in actuality, it is possible to give the game an unexpectedness by allowing the player to recognize that the special information related to the second game round has been executed due to satisfying the predetermined condition. it can. Further, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for the reproduction of the performance. Further, if the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is executed due to the fact that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player. Since the special game state for giving the game is started, the player's expectation for the reproduction of the performance can be further improved.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special gaming state in which a privilege is given to a player,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature E4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round on the stage of the actual performance, the special information related to the second game round actually satisfied the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed due to the game, unexpectedness can be given to the game. In addition, as a case where the reach effect is executed, at least one of the effect executed in the first game round and the case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is executed as a reproduction of a part, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round on the production, but actually, the special information relating to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, a case where the process is executed due to satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reach production.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The production execution means
When there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times.

  According to the feature E5, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, by performing the suggestion effect in the other game times, the suggestion effect and Reproduction can be performed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature E6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game times before the first game time and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time. A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature E6, even if a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature A group, feature B group, feature C group, feature D group, and feature E group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming. These effects include, for example, effects that are executed at a low frequency, such as reach effects that are executed with a low probability, and effects that are executed only when a big win lottery is won. In some cases, such an effect executed at a low frequency may be reproduced by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that executes an effect that reproduces an effect that has been executed once is known in order to meet such demands of a player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
A first image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image Are displayed on the image display means (the objects A, B, and C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a manner related to the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment). By referring to the arrangement / timing table, each object is set and displayed so as to be displayed in a related manner. In S3305 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a related manner. Display each object based on each display pattern table set to be
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to a player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap, and in such a case, the relevance with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the above. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relevance, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated production.

  According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, the first image is displayed in a manner associated with the second image. The effect that is executed when the two images are displayed in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
The aspect having the relationship includes an aspect in which the first image and the second image are related and have narrative characteristics.

  According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a manner having a story character in association with each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) can be an effect that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the effect that is executed when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period has a story character.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image is:
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping period (fifth embodiment) In S3203 / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F3, when the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, and when the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game is different. This suggests that the first image can be used to produce a plurality of different aspects, and the first image can be used effectively. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping with other images. , Can improve interest and expectation.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of the game (processing of S3203 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F4, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games can be suggested using an image.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means includes
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit with an image frame indicating a region of the first image. Display
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature F5, the effect which consists of a 1st image and a 2nd image can be made into an effect without a sense of incongruity with respect to a player.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Expectation degree image storage means for storing an expectation degree image that is an image that changes over time;
Image display means for displaying the expectation level image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The expectation degree image storage means includes:
A first expectation image;
A second expectation image;
Remember
The control means includes
Displaying the first expectation degree image on the image display means;
Displaying the second expectation image on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image constituting at least a part of the first expectation degree image in the time axis direction, and at least a part of the second expectation degree image in the time axis direction are constituted. A case in which a third expectation image that is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial images from which the images to be extracted are combined in a related manner is displayed on the image display means;
There is
The probability that the special information when the first expectation degree image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first probability,
The probability that the special information when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a second probability,
When the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as a third probability,
The control means is configured so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability.
The first expectation degree image, the second expectation degree image, or the third expectation degree image is displayed on the image display means (displayed using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment) Display using the display pattern table)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G1, in addition to the first expectation degree image and the second expectation degree image as the expectation degree image to be displayed on the image display unit, the first partial image and the second partial image are related. Since the third expectation degree image combined in the form is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the first expectation degree image and the second expectation degree image. Since the third expectation level image is an expectation level image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are related to each other, there is no complicated impression on the player. The quality can be improved. Further, the first expectation degree image, the second expectation degree image, or the third expectation degree image is displayed as image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. Therefore, the player's degree of attention to the expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
The control means includes
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation degree image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, the plurality of different display modes are used. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation degree image, a plurality of different displays are obtained by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image. Since the third expectation degree image can be displayed on the image display means in a manner, various effects can be executed using the third expectation degree image. Further, since the third probability differs for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation level image, the player's attention level with respect to the third expectation level image can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2,
The control means includes
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation degree image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, the plurality of different display modes are used. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation degree image are:
It is preset for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (the arrangement position of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display unit as the third expectation degree image are different from each other in the third expectation degree image. Since each display mode is set in advance, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed on the third expectation image and are not displayed on the image display unit. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation level image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The control means includes
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation degree image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, the plurality of different display modes are used. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display unit as the third expectation degree image are different from each other in the third expectation degree image. Preset for each display mode (the display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G4, the relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display unit as the third expectation degree image are different from each other in the third expectation degree image. Since it is preset for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image at a timing that is not related at all. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation level image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
A first image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image Are displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, a relative position between the first image and the second image is determined in advance (the arrangement / position in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position determined by a timing table / an arrangement position set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to a player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap, and in such a case, the relevance with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the above. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relevance, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated production.

  According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image (same period), the arrangement position in which the relative position with the second image is determined in advance Therefore, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the effect. Can do. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means includes
In a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a period overlapping with the second image,
In accordance with each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is arranged at a predetermined position relative to the second image (in the display / pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at a set arrangement position).

  According to the feature H2, the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping with the second image in a plurality of different display modes. Therefore, various features using the first image and the second image are used. Production can be performed. In addition, since the first image is displayed on the image display means at a position where the relative position between the first image and the second image is determined in advance according to each of a plurality of different display modes. In this case, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect is improved. Can be made.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2,
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the control unit relatively determines a predetermined timing with respect to the second image (in the fifth embodiment). Display on the image display means at a display timing determined by an arrangement / timing table / a display timing set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image (same period), the first image is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing with respect to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at a timing that is not related at all. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can do.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping period (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H4, the first image is displayed with a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game that is different between when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image and when the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. This suggests that the first image can be used to produce a plurality of different aspects of the game with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage, and the first image can be used effectively. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping with other images. , Can improve interest and expectation. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position. High performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H5, in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, the effect composed of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games is suggested. can do. Therefore, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games can be suggested depending on how to combine a plurality of images.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
The control means includes
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit with an image frame indicating a region of the first image. Display
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature H6, the effect which consists of a 1st image and a 2nd image can be made into an effect without a sense of incongruity with respect to a player.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
A first image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that suggests a degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image Are displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, a relatively predetermined timing with the second image (in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment). Display on the image display means at the determined display timing / display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to a player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap, and in such a case, the relevance with other images displayed in the overlapping period (same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the above. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relevance, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated production. Note that the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game indicates the degree of whether the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. For example, in a pachinko machine, the state of game times is advantageous to the player, such as the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot lottery, the degree of expectation of a promising big hit, and the degree of expectation that the game times are in a probabilistic state. Indicates the degree of being or not being disadvantaged.

  According to the feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are not displayed at a timing that is not related at all. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can do. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image (same period) or in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the first image is used. Thus, it is possible to execute effects in a plurality of different modes, and to effectively use the first image.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means arranges the first image relative to the second image at a predetermined position (arranged position determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / first position). Display on the image display means at an arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image (same period), a relative position with the second image is determined in advance. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the effect. Can do.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image is:
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping period (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature I3, the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image, and when the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image, the degree of difference between the advantages and disadvantages of the game is different. This suggests that the first image can be used to produce a plurality of different aspects of the game with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage, and the first image can be used effectively. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping with other images. , Can improve interest and expectation. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position. High performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature I4, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games is suggested in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, and the effect composed of the first image and the second image. can do. Therefore, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games can be suggested depending on how to combine a plurality of images.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means includes
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period that does not overlap the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit with an image frame indicating a region of the first image. Display
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature I5, the effect made up of the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image storage means for storing an image that enables the player to be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation;
Image display means for displaying the image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
A first image stored in the image storage means, the first image enabling the player to recognize the advantage / disadvantage regarding the game situation is displayed on the image display means;
It is a combined image that combines the first image with a second image different from the first image, and is a recognition regarding advantages / disadvantages about the game situation, and without combining with the second image When the first image is displayed, a combination image that enables the player to be given recognition different from the recognition given to the player is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments). The display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern that shows the appearance of the dog's face in the box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object C is a table showing how the dog in the box gets wet when the weather worsens. A pattern, gives the recognition that the status of the game is disadvantageous to the player / modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition given to the player about the advantages / disadvantages of the game, and the first image as the second image Since it is possible to change the recognition given to the player about the advantages / disadvantages of the game when combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image. Can be used effectively. The game situation is based on the game situation such as whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and whether or not the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. Refers to the situation.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
In the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the second image, the control means determines a relative position between the first image and the second image according to the game situation. (Set to the arrangement position determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and display on the image display means. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature J2, since the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are displayed. The player can be given various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
When the first image is displayed in combination with the second image, the control unit displays a relative timing between the first image and the second image on the image display unit. Is set according to the game situation (set to the display timing determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

  According to the feature J3, the relative timing for displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. The player can be given various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game using the image and the second image.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
At least one of the first image or the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature J4, various effects can be executed by using an image that is an image that changes over time.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image, and a third image;
Image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is more than the case where the control means displays the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) on the image display means without being combined with the third image. The situation in which the game is displayed to the player when (the image in which the dog looks out from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. Despite giving an advantageous recognition,
The control means causes the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) to be combined with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) and the image display means. The second image (the image in which the dog looks out from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that it gives the player a more favorable recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the image display means.

  According to the feature K1, when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the player is more likely to display the first image without being combined with the third image. In spite of giving an advantageous recognition about the game situation, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is displayed rather than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. , Give the player a favorable recognition of the game situation. Therefore, various effects can be executed depending on how the images are combined. In addition, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a partial period in the time axis direction of the first time-varying image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image. By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, it is possible to execute various effects.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The control means includes
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature K3, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the second image is not combined with the third image and the case where the second image is not displayed are displayed. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1)). (In the case where the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed is more likely than the case where the notice effect by the player is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature K4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, an image that is not combined with the third image is not displayed thereafter (first case). In the case of the display (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is subsequently changed in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the transition and to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute various effects.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time,
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image constituting at least a part of a time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

  According to the feature K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the second temporal change image in the time axis direction, various effects can be produced using the second temporal change image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image are displayed in combination, the third image that is a part of the second time-varying image is changed to the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, the player can change his / her recognition of the game situation.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notifying means for notifying the result of determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image, and a third image;
Image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is more than the case where the control means displays the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) on the image display means without being combined with the third image. In the case where (the image in which the dog looks out from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting,
The control means causes the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) to be combined with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) and the image display means. The second image (the image in which the dog looks out from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that displayed on the image display means.

  According to the feature L1, the special information is predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, rather than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Although the probability that the condition is satisfied is high, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is more than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. There is a high probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention regarding whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a partial period in the time axis direction of the first time-varying image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature L2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-varying image, the first time-changing image is displayed. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention regarding whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means includes
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the second image is not combined with the third image and the case where the second image is not displayed are displayed. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to Feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1)). (In the case where the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed is more likely than the case where the notice effect by the player is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, an image that is not combined with the third image is not displayed thereafter (first case). In the case of the display (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is subsequently changed in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the transition and to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute various effects.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time,
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image constituting at least a part of a time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

  According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the second temporal change image in the time axis direction, various effects can be obtained using the second temporal change image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image are displayed in combination, the third image that is a part of the second time-varying image is changed to the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, the player can change his / her recognition of the game situation.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group, feature G group, feature H group, feature I group, feature J group, feature K group, and feature L group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of such object images are prepared, and each object image suggests the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature M1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a predetermined acquisition condition being satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting moving image-corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the first moving image in a first output mode (a mode of outputting background music at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode (mode for displaying a demo video) and the sound output unit is changed from the first output mode to the second output mode (background music). A transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a transition condition that is a condition for shifting to an output stopped state) is satisfied;
Return condition determination means for determining whether a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode. Start
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the video corresponding sound from a predetermined time position when outputting the video corresponding sound in the first output mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature M1, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode and the image display unit has shifted to the second display mode, the image display unit When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first video, the display starts from a predetermined temporal position of the first video, and the sound output means has the first output mode. When the video corresponding sound is output after returning to step S2, the output is started from a predetermined temporal position of the video corresponding sound. Therefore, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means switches the first time according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. Compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of one moving image starts varies, the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display unit starts displaying the first moving image changes according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display unit returns after the transition to the second display mode. When the condition is satisfied, the configuration for starting the display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, or the image display means A configuration and an image that, when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, determines the temporal position of the first moving image to start display based on the elapsed time since the transition to the second display mode. Even after the display means has shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process, and at the time of returning from the second display mode to the first display mode. Continue as internal processing Configured for displaying the first video is playing and the like.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the video-compatible sound is reduced over time while continuing to output the video-compatible sound. And
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied during the period in which the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume in the first output mode.

  According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display unit continues the first display mode, and the sound output unit returns the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first level. Since it returns to the output mode, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied with a natural flow without a sense of incongruity while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first video and the output of the video corresponding sound.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1 or the feature M2,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means outputs the moving image-corresponding sound from the first output mode in which the moving image-corresponding sound is output at a first volume. Shift to the second output mode of outputting at a volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after elapse of a predetermined time after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound to the volume of the first volume.

  According to the feature M3, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display is performed. The means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound to the first volume level. Therefore, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied with a natural flow without a sense of incongruity while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image-corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the moving image-corresponding sound.

  According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, and the first display mode and When returning to the first output mode, the display is started from the temporal start position of the first moving image, and the output is started from the temporal start position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the first moving image and the output is started from the position in the middle of the moving image corresponding sound, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player is reduced. Can do. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the first moving image and output is started from the position in the middle of the moving image corresponding sound, the player satisfies the return condition. After that, since the first video and the video-compatible sound are to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, it is unsatisfactory or there is a part of the first video and video-compatible sound that is not being viewed. There is a possibility of feeling. On the other hand, according to the feature M4, it is possible to allow the player to appreciate the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from the temporal start position, thereby reducing the uncomfortable feeling given to the player. At the same time, the player can be satisfied that the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound can all be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The second display mode includes a mode in which a second video different from the first video is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first video is stopped and displayed, and the first video is not displayed. A mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which the moving image and the still image are not displayed,
The first output mode is a mode in which the moving image-corresponding sound is output at a first volume.
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image-corresponding sound is output at a second volume level smaller than the first volume level, or the moving image-corresponding sound output is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature M5, the player can recognize that the transition condition is satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have been shifted to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to feature M5,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second volume is equal to or lower than a volume that cannot be recognized by a player.

  According to the feature M6, when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving image-corresponding sound becomes equal to or less than a volume that cannot be recognized by the player. The player can clearly recognize that the means has been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6,
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The transition condition determining means has passed a predetermined time without starting either the special gaming state or the next gaming time after the game times for performing display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determining means have been completed. In this case, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied.

  If a predetermined time elapses without starting the special game state or the next game time after the game time is over, it is highly likely that the player is not playing a game on the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be established in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7,
A detecting means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board;
The transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied when a game ball is not detected for a predetermined time by the detecting means.

  According to the feature M8, since the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board, the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing the game. Generation can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8,
The return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M9, when the special information is acquired, the image display unit returns to the first display mode and the sound output unit returns to the first output mode. Therefore, the expectation that the special information has been acquired. Can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M9,
A detecting means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board;
The return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board. Therefore, the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. A situation uncomfortable for the player that does not hold for a long time (for example, 1 minute) can be reduced.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature N1]
As a first display mode, image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image);
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level;
Command receiving means for receiving commands;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is another display mode in which the continuity with the predetermined video is cut off (a mode of displaying a demo video), and the sound output unit is cut off from the continuity with the video corresponding sound. Identification information storage means for storing identification information (cue determination flag) that can be identified as a specific mode, which is another output mode (a mode in which background music output is stopped),
When the command receiving unit receives a specific command (return condition establishment command), a determination unit that determines whether or not the specific mode is based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit When,
With
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command and the determination unit determines that the specific mode is based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11). Is
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined time position (FIG. 11).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined time position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature N1, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display unit starts display Since the time positions at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound are respectively determined in advance, the predetermined moving image and the moving image corresponding sound can be easily synchronized.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to the feature N1,
The command receiving means receives the specific command, and the determination means determines that the specific mode is not based on the identification information, and the image display means has continuity with the predetermined moving image. When the display mode is maintained (in the case from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode that maintains the continuity (FIGS. 12 and 13).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature N2, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which continuity with a predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display unit Continuously displays a predetermined video in a manner that maintains continuity, and the sound output means outputs a video-compatible sound corresponding to the predetermined video in which continuity is maintained, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable The image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2,
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined video is a temporal start position of the predetermined video,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image-corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the moving image-corresponding sound.

  According to the feature N3, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display unit starts display Since the time position at which the sound output means starts outputting the video-compatible sound is the temporal start position, the display starts from the middle of the predetermined video and the output starts from the middle of the video-compatible sound. Compared with the case where it is performed, the process which an image display means and a sound output means perform is easy, and the discomfort given to a player can be reduced.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3,
The other display mode is a mode in which the image display unit displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped.

  According to the feature N4, when the image display unit is returned from the specific mode to the first display mode, the other display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which an image is displayed or a mode in which image display is stopped, even if the display is returned to the first display mode and display is started from a predetermined time position of a predetermined moving image It is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player. The images include moving images and still images.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The other output mode includes a mode in which the sound output unit outputs another sound different from the video-corresponding sound, the video output or the other sound at an output level that the sound output unit cannot recognize. A game machine, wherein the sound output means stops outputting.

  According to the feature N5, when the sound output unit is returned from the specific mode to the first output mode, the other output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is different from the sound corresponding to the moving image. Since it is a mode in which another sound is output, a mode in which video is supported or another sound is output at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player, or a mode in which output is stopped, the first output mode Even after returning and starting to output a moving image corresponding sound corresponding to a predetermined moving image that starts to be displayed from a predetermined temporal position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature O1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a predetermined acquisition condition being satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Elapsed time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means includes
When it is determined by the elapsed time determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the first display mode is shifted to the second display mode (RTC effect moving image display mode) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode and the first display mode shifts to the first display mode. When one moving image is displayed, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIGS. 80 and 81).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode and the first display mode returns. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, when shifting to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts to fluctuate. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts when the first moving image is displayed after shifting to the first display mode, for example, the second display mode is predetermined. When the display period ends, a configuration for starting display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, or image display means Is configured to determine the temporal position of the first moving image at which the display is started based on the elapsed time since the transition to the second display mode when shifting from the second display mode to the first display mode Even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process, and the second display mode shifts to the first display mode. Sometimes it continues to play as an internal process Configuration and the like to display a video.

  In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously in each gaming machine, and the game shifts to the first display mode. When the machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first video, the display starts from a predetermined temporal position of the first video, so the first displayed on each gaming machine. Can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving images displayed on each gaming machine are synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic O1,
A transition condition determination unit that determines whether or not a transition condition that is a condition for shifting the image display unit to a third display mode (a mode for displaying a demo video) is satisfied;
The image display means includes
When the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (in the mode of displaying the background video), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the transition condition (FIG. 11).
When the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode (in the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the above-described predetermined display period of the second display mode is ended as an opportunity. Transition to the third display mode (FIG. 82),
A game machine characterized by starting display from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image when the third moving image (demo moving image) is displayed in the third display mode.

  According to the feature O2, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is set in advance. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the set display period, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously at each gaming machine, and the game proceeds to the third display mode. When the machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, the display starts from the predetermined time position of the third moving image, and therefore the third displayed on each gaming machine. Can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third video displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
A return condition determining means for determining whether a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image) is satisfied;
The image display means includes
When the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (in the mode of displaying the demo video), the first display mode is returned when the return condition is satisfied (FIG. 11).
When the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode (in the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the above-described predetermined display period of the second display mode ends as an opportunity. Returning to the first display mode (FIG. 83),
When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, display is started from the predetermined time position of the first moving image.

  According to the feature O3, even if the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is preset. Since the display mode returns to the first display mode when the set display period ends, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image.

  According to the feature O4, the game is compared with the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after shifting or returning to the first display mode. The discomfort given to the person can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after shifting or returning to the first display mode, Since one movie is viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or that there is a part of the first movie that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, since the player can view the first moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player and It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4,
Sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means;
The sound output means, when the image display means starts displaying from the predetermined time position of the first moving image, a first moving image corresponding sound (background) corresponding to the first moving image. A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

  According to the feature O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first moving image-corresponding sound are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image-corresponding sound starts varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started varies, for example, a predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the first moving image corresponding sound is output from the temporal position of the first moving image-corresponding sound output immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. The image display means displays the temporal position of the first moving image-corresponding sound at which the output is started when the configuration for starting the outputting of the moving image-corresponding sound or the mode of outputting the first moving image-corresponding sound is performed. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode, and the playback of the first moving image-corresponding sound continues as an internal process even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, the image display means Configured for outputting a first video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition or return from 示態 like in the first display mode.

[Feature O6]
A gaming machine according to feature O5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image-corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the first moving image-corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which output is started from a position in the middle of the first moving image-corresponding sound. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a position in the middle of the time corresponding to the first moving image-corresponding sound, the player views the first sound corresponding to the moving image from a position in the middle of the time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfied with a portion of the first moving image-compatible sound that is not being appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, since the player can appreciate the first moving image-corresponding sound from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all the first moving image-corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal start position of the third moving image.

  According to the feature O7, when the display is shifted to the third display mode and the third moving image is displayed, the player is compared with the configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the third moving image. The unpleasant feeling given can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the third video when the third video is displayed by shifting to the third display mode, Since the movie is to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or that there is a part of the third movie that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, since the player can view the third moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O4,
Sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means;
The sound output means, when the image display means starts display from the predetermined time position of the third moving image, a third moving image corresponding sound (demo corresponding to the third moving image) A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

  According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image-corresponding sound are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving-image-corresponding sound starts varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started varies, for example, a predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the third time from the temporal position of the third moving image-corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. The image display means displays the time position of the third moving image-corresponding sound at which the output is started in the second display when shifting to the configuration for starting the output of the moving image-corresponding sound or the third moving image-corresponding sound. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode, and the reproduction of the third moving image-corresponding sound continues as an internal process even after the image display means shifts from the third display mode to the second display mode. In addition, the image display means Configured for outputting the third video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition from 示態 like the third display mode.

[Feature O9]
A gaming machine according to feature O8,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image-corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the third moving image-corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O9, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to the player as compared with a configuration in which output is started from a position in the middle of the time corresponding to the third moving image corresponding sound. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a position in the middle of the time corresponding to the third moving image-corresponding sound, the player views the third sound corresponding to the moving image from a position in the middle of the time. Therefore, there is a possibility of feeling uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a part of the third moving image corresponding sound that is not appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, since the player can appreciate the third moving image-corresponding sound from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all the third moving image-corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The invention of the above-described feature M group, feature N group, and feature O group solves the following problems.

  In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the fun of games. For example, a gaming machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker is known.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Feature P1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
The number of on-hold displays (the on-hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 and the on-hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in a predetermined display mode. And a hold display means for changing the display mode of the displayed hold display (holding effect content determination process in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment),
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
Prior to the hold display means changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestion effect (FIG. 89, FIG. 90, FIG. 100, FIG. 105) that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Conventionally, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player by displaying a hold display. However, regarding the hold display, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  According to the feature P1, since the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed prior to the change of the display mode of the hold display, Can give attention to the person and give a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The effect execution means selects the suggested effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects according to an object whose display mode is changed by the hold display means among the displayed hold displays ( Holding effect content determination process in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P2, since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected according to the hold display that is a target whose display mode is to be changed, the player can be focused on the content of the suggestion effect, and the target whose display mode is to be changed. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation as to which hold display is to be made.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determination unit in the displayed hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode is changed (FIGS. 92, 97, and 98). , FIG. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, the opportunity for the display mode to change decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit is shortened. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determining means is the hold display corresponding to the previous special information, and the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the display mode is unlikely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player changes the display mode preferentially from the hold display corresponding to the previous special information in the order of determination by the determining means in the displayed hold display. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wishes, there is a case where the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is changed. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to feature P3, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display increases. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, even if the display mode of the subsequent hold display changes relatively in the order of determination by the determining means in the displayed hold display, the hold display Since the step-wise width in multiple stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the player is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and more A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Is also changed to a higher-level display mode (FIGS. 101, 103, 104).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player may change the display mode of the specific hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. There is a case. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature P4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a display mode at a higher level than the display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode is contrary to the player's desire. Even if it has changed, the hold display whose display mode has changed is changed to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed, and more expectation can be given.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine according to feature P3 or feature P4,
The production execution unit
When executing the suggestion effect, according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means. Then, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects (from the eighth embodiment to the tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P5, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the inside, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the type of effect to be executed.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Feature Q1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A hold display means for displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The hold display means includes
When determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on special information corresponding to another hold display that is different from the hold display of which the display mode is to be determined (eighth embodiment). To 10th Embodiment and Modification 28)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic Q1, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display to be determined. Therefore, the information about the game times corresponding to other hold displays (hereinafter also referred to as hold game times) can be suggested to the player using the hold display of the target whose display mode is determined. For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined is more important to the player than the special information to be determined by the determination means prior to the special information. When advantageous, in addition to the information of the hold display itself for which the display mode is determined, such as determining the display mode of the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined as a specific display mode, Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the return for one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, but also executed before and after that. Various speculations are also made about the return of the reserved game times. Therefore, it is possible to create a new gameability by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency more than before and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The hold display means includes
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target to change the display mode, after the change of the hold display of the target to change the display mode The display mode is determined (from the eighth embodiment to the tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q2, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed Since the display mode after the display change is determined, information about the reserved game turn corresponding to the other hold display can be suggested to the player by using the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. For example, based on special information corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed, the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed The following playability can be realized by determining the subsequent display mode. As an example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Can be changed to a higher-level display mode (a display mode advantageous to the player). Thus, according to the feature Q2, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determination unit in the displayed hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode is changed (FIGS. 92, 97, and 98). , FIG. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, the opportunity for the display mode to change decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit is shortened. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determining means is the hold display corresponding to the previous special information, and the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the display mode is unlikely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player changes the display mode preferentially from the hold display corresponding to the previous special information in the order of determination by the determining means in the displayed hold display. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wishes, there is a case where the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is changed. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to feature Q3, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display. As described above, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display increases. Therefore, contrary to the player's wish, even if the display mode of the subsequent hold display changes relatively in the order of determination by the determining means in the displayed hold display, the hold display Since the step-wise width in multiple stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the player is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation, and more A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Is also changed to a higher-level display mode (FIGS. 101, 103, 104).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player may change the display mode of the specific hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. There is a case. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature Q4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a display mode at a higher level than the display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode is contrary to the player's desire. Even if it has changed, the hold display whose display mode has changed is changed to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed, and more expectation can be given.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q4,
Providing production execution means for performing production,
The effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes prior to the hold display means changing the display mode of the hold display (FIGS. 89, 90, 90). (Fig. 100, Fig. 105)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q5, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed prior to the change of the display mode of the hold display. Can give attention to the person and give a sense of expectation.

[Feature Q6]
A gaming machine according to feature Q5,
The production execution unit
When executing the suggestion effect, according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means. Then, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects (from the eighth embodiment to the tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic Q6, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed. Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from the inside, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Feature R1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A hold display means for displaying the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode and changing the display mode of the hold display being displayed,
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means
An effect execution determination process for determining whether or not an effect execution condition that is a condition for executing a predetermined effect is performed,
The hold display means includes
While determining whether or not a display mode change condition that is a condition for changing the display mode of the hold display,
When the production execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined production is executed (from the eighth embodiment to the tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed independently of the execution of the predetermined performance, even though the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, It cannot be recognized that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the player cannot be noticed with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display are only those that have different effects on the player, and these two do not function synergistically.

  According to the feature R1, when the production execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined production is executed. The player can recognize that there is a correlation between the display and the execution of a predetermined effect, and the player can be noted with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as giving a sense of expectation or a sense of urgency, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display such as giving a sense of expectation or a sense of urgency for subsequent game times, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the production of the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency synergistically with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and improve the fun of synergistic gaming Can be achieved.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The hold display means includes
When the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined performance is executed (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature R2, when the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined performance is executed, so that the predetermined performance is executed. After being played, the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display changes can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be imparted to the game. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change thereafter, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
A selection means (effect operation button 24) for the player to select a predetermined hold display is provided,
The hold display means includes
While performing the change possibility determination process which determines whether it is possible to change the display mode of each hold display currently displayed,
Based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process, it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature R3, it is possible to create new game characteristics such as allowing the player to select the hold display. Further, since it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process, the display of the hold display selected by the player himself A sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode changes can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determination unit in the displayed hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode is changed (the eighth embodiment and the tenth embodiment). Form)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, the opportunity for the display mode to change decreases as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit is shortened. In other words, in the displayed hold display, the order determined by the determining means is the hold display corresponding to the previous special information, and the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter than the hold display corresponding to the special information, and the display mode is unlikely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player changes the display mode preferentially from the hold display corresponding to the previous special information in the order of determination by the determining means in the displayed hold display. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wishes, there is a case where the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display is changed. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to feature R4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information is changed in the order determined by the determining means in the displayed hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display increases. Accordingly, contrary to the player's wish, if the display mode of the subsequent hold display changes relative to the order in which the determination means determines the displayed hold display (or the player selects Even if the display mode of the hold display is changed), the step-wise width in the multiple stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display is increased. While the fall of expectation can be suppressed, rather more expectation can be given.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display is:
The special information corresponding to the hold display suggests the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The hold display means includes
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Is also changed to a display mode at a higher level (9th and 10th embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display whose display mode has already changed and the player wishes to change to a higher display mode with respect to the hold display, the player may change the display mode of the specific hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. There is a case. In such a case, the player's sense of expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature R5, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a display mode at a higher level than the display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode is contrary to the player's desire. Even if it is changed (or when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changed), the hold display whose display mode has changed is the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher-order display mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and to give a further expectation.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature P group, feature Q group, and feature R group solves the following problems.

  Conventionally, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player by displaying a hold display.

  Here, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature S1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A first entrance part (first start port 33) into which game balls that circulate in the game area can enter;
A second entry part (second start port 34) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance unit and acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance unit Means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means (design display device 41) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
First command transmission means for transmitting a first command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment) S6610, S5402)
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment) S6628, S5402) in FIG.
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
First identification information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information And the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating each, in a different display area of the display means,
Based on the transmitted first command, the first identification information display mode in which the first identification information is changed or stopped, and the display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (the eleventh mode) In addition to switching the first identification information non-display mode that is a mode of displaying the demo image in the embodiment,
Based on the transmitted second command, the second identification information display mode in which the second identification information is fluctuating or stopped, and the display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (the eleventh mode) A gaming machine characterized by switching to a second identification information non-display mode which is a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the embodiment.

  According to the feature S1, the first command is transmitted based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second command is stored in the second special information in the acquired information storage means. Sent based on the presence or absence of The display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is performed by obtaining information It can be performed based on the presence or absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a manner independent of the presence or absence of storage of the second special information in the storage means. (2) Switching to the identification information non-display mode is performed based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit in a mode independent of whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit. be able to. In other words, the display means switches the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of the switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. The switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode can be performed in a mode independent of the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. Can do.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to the feature S1,
The display means includes
When the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state (from low frequency support mode to high frequency support mode or from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed in a display area different from that before the gaming state is shifted (FIG. 120).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature S2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed before the game state shifts. Since the display is performed in a different display area, the player can easily recognize that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine described in feature S2,
The display means includes
When the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state,
The second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed on the display area where the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) has been displayed, and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed. The gaming machine, wherein the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) is displayed in a display area that has been displayed.

  According to the feature S3, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information is displayed, and Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the two identification information has been displayed, the player is made aware that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state. Can do. Further, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information is displayed, and the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the second identification information is displayed. With respect to the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as causing the player to guess that the role in the game has changed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode. (It is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating a result of determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating a result of determination based on the second special information. According to the feature S4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be simultaneously given to the result of the determination of the two special information, the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A first entrance part (first start port 33) into which game balls that circulate in the game area can enter;
A second entry part (second start port 34) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance unit and acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance unit Means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination (the symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
First identification information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information And the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating each, in a different display area of the display means,
When the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state (from low frequency support mode to high frequency support mode or from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) is displayed differently from before the game state transitions. Display in the area (Fig. 120)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T1, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed before the game state shifts. Since the display is performed in a different display area, the player can easily recognize that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The display means includes
When the game state transitions from the first game state to the second game state (from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode or from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode) Is
The second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed on the display area where the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) has been displayed, and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed. The gaming machine, wherein the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) is displayed in a display area that has been displayed.

  According to the feature T2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information is displayed, and the second Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the two identification information has been displayed, the player is made aware that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state. Can do. Further, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information is displayed, and the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the second identification information is displayed. With respect to the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as causing the player to guess that the role in the game has changed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
First command transmitting means for transmitting a first command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment). S6610, S5402) in the form,
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment). S6628, S5402) in the form,
With
The display means includes
Based on the transmitted first command, the first identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information (the first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) fluctuates or is stopped, While switching the first identification information non-display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (a mode in which the demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment),
Based on the transmitted second command, the second identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the second identification information (the second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) fluctuates or is stopped, A gaming machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode, which is a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment).

  According to the feature T3, the first command is transmitted based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the second command is stored in the second special information in the acquired information storage unit. Sent based on the presence or absence of The display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is performed by obtaining information It can be performed based on the presence or absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a manner independent of the presence or absence of storage of the second special information in the storage means. (2) Switching to the identification information non-display mode is performed based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit in a mode independent of whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit. be able to. In other words, the display means switches the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of the switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. The switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode can be performed in a mode independent of the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. Can do.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode (simultaneous change in the eleventh embodiment). Machine)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating a result of determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating a result of determination based on the second special information. According to the feature T4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be simultaneously given to the result of the determination of the two special information, the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Special information storage means for storing the first special information and the second special information;
According to the state of the game, first identification information based on the first special information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment) and second identification information based on the second special information (in the eleventh embodiment) A first display area (main display area or sub-display area) for displaying any one of the second liquid crystal symbols), and a second display for displaying either the first identification information or the second identification information. Display means having a region (main display region or sub-display region);
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
The display state of the first display area is shifted to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage unit. (In the eleventh embodiment, the display state is shifted from the display state for displaying the liquid crystal design to the display state for displaying the demo video), and
The display state of the second display area is shifted to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. (In the eleventh embodiment, a transition is made from the display state in which the liquid crystal design is displayed to the display state in which the demo video is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic U1, the display means displays the display state of the first display area based on whether or not special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. The display state of the second display area is changed based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means while shifting to a different display state. Since it shifts to the state, the first display area and the second display area can be shifted to different display states independently of each other. Therefore, the transition of the display state of the first display area has a correlation with the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area, and the transition of the display state of the second display area to the first display area. Compared to the configuration correlated with the special information corresponding to the displayed identification information, information regarding the presence or absence of the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in each display area is clearly shown to the player. be able to.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
The display means includes
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area (main display area) is changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means. As a result, the display state of the first display area is changed from a display state where the identification information is displayed (a display state where a liquid crystal symbol is displayed) to a state where the identification information is not displayed (a demo video is displayed). A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a display state.

  According to the feature U2, the display unit changes from the state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage unit to the state in which the special information storage unit is not stored. As a result, the display state of the first display area shifts from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed, so that it corresponds to the identification information displayed in the first display area. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information has changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
The display means includes
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area (sub display area) is changed from being stored in the special information storage means to not being stored in the special information storage means. As a result, the display state of the second display area is changed from a display state where the identification information is displayed (a display state where the liquid crystal symbol is displayed) where the identification information is not displayed (a demo video is displayed). A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a display state.

  According to the characteristic U3, the display unit is in a state where the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is not stored in the special information storage unit from the state where the special information is stored in the special information storage unit. As a result, the display state of the second display area shifts from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed, and therefore corresponds to the identification information displayed in the second display area. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information has changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The display means includes
When the gaming state shifts to a predetermined state, the identification information (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) displayed in the first display region (main display region) is displayed in the second display region ( The identification information (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) displayed in the second display region (sub display region) is displayed in the first display region (main display region). A gaming machine characterized by being displayed in ().

  According to the feature U4, the display means displays the identification information displayed in the first display area in the second display area and also in the second display area when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined state. Since the identification information that has been displayed is displayed in the first display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state of the game has shifted. Furthermore, since the identification information displayed in the first display area is displayed in the second display area and the identification information displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area, for example, the first identification information As for the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as causing the player to guess that the role in the game has changed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode. (It is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature U5, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be simultaneously given to the two pieces of identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means,
The display means (the symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment)
A first display area (main display area MA) and a second display area (first sub-area SA1);
The display state of the first display area (main display area MA) is acquired by entering the first information (game ball into the first start port 33) in the first game state (low frequency support mode). In the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), based on the second information (special information acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34). A gaming machine characterized by changing.

  According to the feature V1, the display means has a first display area and a second display area, and the display state of the first display area is based on the first information in the first gaming state. Since the second game state is changed based on the second information, for example, when the state of change of the display state of the first display area changes before and after a predetermined game time, the player On the other hand, it can be presumed that the gaming state has changed before and after a predetermined game time, and a sense of expectation or inflection can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
In the game area, detection means (first start port 33 and second start port 34) for detecting the game ball;
With
The gaming machine, wherein the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detecting means detects the gaming ball.

  According to the feature V2, since the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection unit detects the game ball, the display state of the first display area is changed to the game state. In addition to changing in accordance with changes (changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state), It can be changed according to the presence / absence of a ball entry and the timing at which a game ball enters the ball entry part.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The display means includes
The display state of the second display area (first sub area SA1) is the second information (the game ball entering the second start port 34) in the first game state (low frequency support mode). In the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), the first information (the special information obtained by entering the game ball into the first start port 33) is changed. A game machine characterized by being changed based on information.

  According to the feature V3, the display unit changes the display state of the second display area based on the second information in the first gaming state, and based on the first information in the second gaming state. For example, when the state of change of the display state of the second display area is changed before and after a predetermined game time, the game state is changed before and after the predetermined game time. It can be guessed that there was, and an expectation and inflection can be given to a player. Further, since such a change in display state is executed in the two display areas of the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
The game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for informing the determination result is started, and the game turn operation is performed after the game turn operation is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game times when the time until the end is a variable time, and a control means for controlling the variable time;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
A specific game time, which is a game time to be executed in a specific game state (high probability mode game state in the eleventh embodiment), and the last specific game time to be executed before the end of the specific game state. The variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time (the game time after the probability change in the eleventh embodiment is the 120th game time) is started is set to a predetermined time ( The gaming machine is set to 12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment.

  According to the feature W1, since the variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game times is set to a predetermined time, the latest time after starting the last specific game times It is possible to set in advance a control that takes into account the variation time of at least two game times to be executed. For example, it is possible to execute an effect whose execution time is set in advance in at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time is started.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to the feature W1,
A first entrance portion (first start port 33) as the entrance portion;
A second entrance portion (second start port 34) as the entrance portion;
With
The information acquisition means acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance part and special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance part. Get information,
The determination means includes first special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball has entered the first entrance part, and a game ball that has entered the second entrance part. Determining whether or not the second special information, which is the special information acquired by doing so, satisfies a predetermined condition;
The control means includes
Controlling a variation time in a first game part game time (a game time for the first starter in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball entering the first ball part,
Controlling a variation time in a second game part game time (a game time for a second starter in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball entering the second ball part,
During the period of executing either the first game part game time or the second game part game time, either the first game part game time or the second game part game time It is possible to perform parallel execution processing that is processing for executing the other (the simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W2, in a gaming machine capable of performing parallel execution processing, the variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time is set to a predetermined time. Set. In the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period of executing either the first game part game time or the second game part game time, the first game part game time or the second game play Since either one of the part game times may be executed, even if the variation time in at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time is started is set to a predetermined time When the time from the start of the game times started first to the end of the game times started after the two game times is shorter than the total time of the two game times whose fluctuation time is a predetermined time There is. However, of the two game times, as a time from the start of the game time started first to the end of the game time started later, at least a time corresponding to one game time whose fluctuation time is a predetermined time is secured. Is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to set in advance a control that takes into account the time of one game time at which the variation time is a predetermined time.

[Feature W3]
A gaming machine according to the feature W2,
The control means includes
When the parallel execution process is being executed and a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the result image is displayed for 10 seconds set in advance in the eleventh embodiment),
Of the at least two game times executed most recently after the start of the last specific game time, for at least one game time, the predetermined length of time has elapsed since the game time was started. Even before the game is finished, the game round is ended (another aspect (aspect 2) in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W3, when the parallel execution process is executed and the prescribed condition is satisfied, at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time is started. Of these, for at least one game round, the game round ends even before the predetermined length of time has elapsed since the game round was started. Unnecessary time can be omitted as the execution time of at least two game times executed most recently.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which a probability that satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high and low as a determination mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific gaming state is a state in which the determination means is in the high probability mode.

  According to the feature W4, the variation of at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time which is the last specific game time executed before the end of the game state in which the determination unit is in the high probability mode. Control in consideration of time can be set in advance. For example, it is possible to execute an effect whose execution time is set in advance in at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time executed before the end of the high probability mode.

[Feature W5]
A gaming machine according to feature W4,
The determination means limits the number of specific game times that are continuously executed in the specific game state in the high probability mode to a specified number, and the specific game times that are continuously executed are the specified number. A gaming machine comprising a high-probability mode game number limiting means for ending the specific gaming state based on reaching the above.

  According to the feature W5, the variation time of at least two game times executed immediately after the last specific game time is started among the specific game times in which the number of times of continuous execution is limited to a specified number is considered. Control can be preset.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W5,
A non-accepting state (a state where the electric accessory 34a is closed) in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the game, and the game ball enters more than the non-accepting state. Switching means that can be switched to an accepting state (a state where the electric accessory 34a is opened),
As the control mode for controlling the switching means, the control mode for controlling the switching means is a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode. Switching control means having
With
The gaming machine, wherein the specific gaming state is a state in which the switching control means is in the second mode (high frequency support mode).

  According to the feature W6, at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time, which is the last specific game time executed before the end of the game state in the second mode by the switching control means. Control in consideration of the fluctuation time can be set in advance. For example, it is possible to execute an effect whose execution time is set in advance in at least two game times executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time executed before the end of the second mode.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
Providing production execution means for performing production,
The effect execution means is given to the player at least at the first game time to be executed after starting the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change in the eleventh embodiment is the 120th game time). Execute effects that inform information related to benefits (display result images)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W7, since at least the first game round to be executed after starting the last specific game round, an effect of notifying information related to the bonus granted to the player is executed. It becomes easy to grasp. In addition, in this gaming machine in which the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after the start of the last specific game time is set to a predetermined time, information on a privilege granted to the player is notified. Since the effect to be executed is executed at least at the first game time that is executed after the start of the last specific game time, the effect that informs the information related to the privilege granted to the player is executed as an effect with a preset execution time. be able to.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A first entrance part (first start port 33) into which game balls that circulate in the game area can enter;
A second entry part (second start port 34) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance unit and acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance unit Means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. Determination means for determining whether or not the second special information which is the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
The game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for informing the determination result is started, and the game turn operation is performed after the game turn operation is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game times when the time until the end is a variable time, and a control means for controlling the variable time;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
Controlling a variation time in a first game part game time (a game time for the first starter in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball entering the first ball part,
Controlling a variation time in a second game part game time (a game time for a second starter in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball entering the second ball part,
During the period of executing either the first game part game time or the second game part game time, either the first game part game time or the second game part game time It is possible to perform parallel execution processing that is processing for executing the other (simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment),
In the case where the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, a plurality of game times (the number of game times after probability change in the eleventh embodiment is the 121th and 122th game times) executed in parallel or in parallel. The first variation time is set to a time (10 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) or longer (12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) required for execution of the predetermined effect (the effect of displaying the result image). A gaming machine characterized by executing a variable time setting process.

  According to the feature X1, in the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period of executing either the first game part game time or the second game part game time, the game for the first game part There is a case in which one of the times or the game times for the second pitching part is executed. Accordingly, during the period in which the predetermined performance is executed by the effect execution means, for example, the first game play for the first pitching unit is ended and a new game play for the first pitching unit is started, or the second pitching is performed. The club game times may end and a new second game part game time may start. Hereinafter, the start timing of game times and the end timing of game times are also referred to as “game time breaks”.

  Here, if a “game time break” occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, the player may have a complicated impression of the effect being executed. Moreover, there is a possibility that the player cannot concentrate on the determination result in the determination means in each game round.

  According to the characteristic X1, when the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, the variation times of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel are set to a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect. Since the setting is made, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a division of game times during a period in which a predetermined effect is being executed.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
The controller is
When the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect, the first variation time setting process includes two game times that are executed continuously or in parallel (the number of game times executed after probability change in the eleventh embodiment). Is set to a time longer than the time required for execution of the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature X2, in the gaming machine capable of executing the parallel execution process, the variation over the time required to execute the predetermined effect is suppressed while suppressing occurrence of the game times during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed. The number of game times set for time can be minimized.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The controller is
The number of game times set for a time longer than the time required for execution of the predetermined effect is set in advance to a predetermined number of times (2 times in the eleventh embodiment), and
When the effect execution means finishes executing the predetermined effect (the effect of displaying the result image), the number of game times set at a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is the predetermined execution. If it is less than the number of times (less than 2 in the eleventh embodiment),
A second variation time that is different from the first variation time setting process (a process for setting the variation time to 12 seconds) for game times that start after the execution of the predetermined effect is completed by the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by executing a setting process.

  According to the feature X3, when the performance execution means finishes executing the predetermined performance, the number of game times set for a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined performance is less than the predetermined number of executions. Since the second variation time setting process different from the first variation time setting process is executed for game times that start after the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means, the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to avoid unnecessarily executing the game times set for a time longer than the time required to execute the game. As a result, after the production execution means finishes executing the predetermined production, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the time required for execution of the predetermined production, or the long fluctuation time or the short fluctuation time is set randomly. It is also possible to give an inflection to the game, and various control methods can be employed to improve the fun of the game.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
The determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which a probability that satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high and low as a determination mode,
The said effect execution means performs the said predetermined effect (effect which displays a result image) on the occasion of completion | finish of the said high probability mode. The gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature X4, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a break in game times during execution of a predetermined effect that is executed when the high probability mode ends.

[Feature X5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X4,
The predetermined effect is an effect of notifying information related to a privilege given to a player (an effect of displaying a result image).

  According to the feature X5, since the predetermined effect is an effect of notifying information related to the privilege granted to the player, the player can easily grasp the granted privilege. In addition, for the player, the information related to the granted privilege is information of high interest. According to the feature X5, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a break in the game times during the execution of the effect of informing information highly interested for the player.

<Feature Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
First detection means (first start port 33) for detecting the game ball in the game area;
In the game area, a second detection means (second start port 34) for detecting the game ball;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first special information based on the fact that the first detection means has detected a game ball;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second special information based on the fact that the second detection means detects a game ball;
Determining means for determining whether or not the first special information satisfies a first predetermined condition, and determining whether or not the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination (the symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
It has at least three displayable areas in which identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the special information can be displayed (main display area MA, first sub display area SA1, second sub display in the eleventh embodiment) Area SA2),
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) that is identification information for indicating a result of the determination based on the first special information is displayed in a first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas. As well as display
Second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information, is the first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas. Displayed in a second displayable area different from
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (based on the transition to the high frequency support mode)
Displaying at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is satisfied. To play.

  According to the characteristic Y1, the display unit has at least three displayable areas in which the identification information can be displayed, and at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on a predetermined change condition, Since it is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is satisfied, for example, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information is changed when the game state is changed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the game state has changed. Further, the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed by selecting any two displayable areas from the three displayable areas. As an example, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information is changed according to the state of the game, or a display different from the identification information is displayed in one of the three displayable areas (for example, Even when the effect image is displayed), the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed in the remaining two displayable areas.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal design) having a changing display mode. (It is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Y2, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be simultaneously given to the result of the determination of the two special information, the first special information and the second special information.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
The predetermined change condition is a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Y3, by changing the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, it is possible to cause the player to guess that the game state has changed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, by changing the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, it can be applied to a suggestion effect that is an effect that suggests something to the player. Thus, based on the transition of the gaming state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed to a displayable area different from the displayable area that was displayed before the gaming state transitioned. The display process can be used for various effects, and the range of expression of effects performed by the gaming machine can be greatly expanded.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area in accordance with an operation of the operation means by a player;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means for displaying a guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2 in <Aspect 9> of the eleventh embodiment) which is guidance relating to the operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
The content of guidance in the guidance display is controlled based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means (lottery result of jackpot lottery) (control whether to display guidance display GD1 or guidance display GD2).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Z1, since the display unit controls the content of the guidance in the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, the content of the guidance in the guidance display reflects the result of the determination in the determination unit. Can be. As a result, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the result of determination by the determination means by controlling the content of the guidance in the guidance display.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to the feature Z1,
The display means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the display mode of the guidance display (the display color of the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2) is controlled based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the feature Z2, since the display unit controls the display mode of the guidance display based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the guidance display reflects the determination result in the determination unit. Can do. As a result, by controlling the display mode of the guidance display, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the result of determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The display means includes
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the color of the guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2) is controlled as the display mode of the guidance display (controls whether it is blue or red).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Z3, the display unit controls the color of the guidance display as the display mode of the guidance display based on the determination result by the determination unit. Therefore, the color of the guidance display reflects the result of the determination by the determination unit. Can be a thing. As a result, by controlling the color of the guidance display, a suggestion effect that suggests the result of determination by the determination means can be executed.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guidance display is a display for guiding an operation method of the operation means that is advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature Z4, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the result of the determination by the determination unit, using the guidance display that guides the operation method of the operation unit that is advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
When a predetermined command (result display end command in the eleventh embodiment <Aspect 12>) is received in the first gaming state, a specific process based on the predetermined command is executed (result image display is performed). A game machine having specific processing execution means that is terminated,
The specific process executing means includes
The predetermined command is not received in a second gaming state (a state in which a game turn is not executed) that is different from the first gaming state (a state in which a game turn is executed). Nevertheless, the gaming machine is characterized by executing the specific process.

  According to the characteristic αA1, the specific process execution means executes a specific process based on the predetermined command when the predetermined command is received in the first gaming state, and the gaming state is the first gaming state. In the second gaming state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received, so that the condition for setting the predetermined command as a transmission command is satisfied in the second gaming state. Even if it is not done or it is unlikely that it will be satisfied, a specific process can be performed.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
The specific process executing means includes
The predetermined command is received when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state (a state in which gaming times are being executed) to the second gaming state (a state in which gaming times are not being executed). A game machine characterized by executing the specific process even though it is not.

  According to the characteristic αA2, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. When the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied in the gaming state, or when it is unlikely to be satisfied, and for example, when a specific process is not executed in the first gaming state Even so, the specific process can be executed in accordance with the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A gaming machine comprising
The first gaming state is a state in which the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
The second gaming state is a state in which the special information is not stored in the acquired information storage unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic αA3, in a state where the special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, when a predetermined command is received, a specific process based on the predetermined command is executed, and the acquired information storage unit stores the special information. In a state where no information is stored, a specific process is executed even though a predetermined command is not received. Therefore, in a state where no special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, a predetermined command is Even when the condition set as the transmission command is not satisfied, or when it is unlikely that the condition is satisfied, the specific process can be executed. For example, a specific process is executed even when a condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied or is unlikely to be satisfied in a state where a game ball has not been launched toward the game area be able to.

[Feature αA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3,
A display means that can display a specific image (result image)
The specific process execution means executes a process of ending the display of the specific image displayed by the display means as the specific process when the predetermined command is received. Machine.

  According to the characteristic αA4, when the display unit displays a specific image, in the second gaming state, a condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied, or there is a possibility that the condition is satisfied. Even in the case of low, the display means can end the display of the specific image. Therefore, when it is not preferable to display a specific image in the second gaming state, the display of the specific image can be ended even when a predetermined command is not received.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entrance part (a general winning port 32, a second starting port 34, a large winning port 36a, a V winning port 48 in the twelfth embodiment) in which game balls that circulate in the game area can enter,
A gaming state transition means for transitioning from the first gaming state (low probability mode) to the second gaming state (high probability mode) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering the ball entrance section;
Information corresponding to the planned payout number that is the number of game balls to be paid out before the end of the second gaming state (high probability mode) (remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment) is displayed. Display means (symbol display device 41);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature αB1, the information corresponding to the planned payout number is displayed, so that the player can know the number of game balls that can be acquired before the second game state ends. Further, for example, compared to a configuration that displays the remaining number of jackpot lotteries that can be executed before the end of the second gaming state, how much expectation can be given to the second gaming state. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the game is interesting.

[Feature αB2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αB1,
When the planned payout number increases, the display means displays information corresponding to the displayed payout number being displayed (remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (b) in the twelfth embodiment)), It is changed to information corresponding to the planned payout amount after increasing the increased number as an upper limit (remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172 (c))). .

  According to the characteristic αB2, the information corresponding to the planned payout number being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the payout number after increasing the increased number up to the upper limit, so that the second gaming state ends. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of game balls that can be acquired is increased, and to improve the player's expectation for the second gaming state.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αB2,
The display means displays the increase suggestion information (the remaining acquired number-of-balls increase suggestion image CPB in the twelfth embodiment) indicating that the planned payout number has increased when the planned payout number increases, The information (the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment) is increased by the increase number suggested by the increase suggestion information corresponding to the planned payout number being displayed. The game machine is characterized in that it is changed to information corresponding to the planned number of payouts (remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)) in the twelfth embodiment).

  According to the feature αB3, the increase suggestion information is displayed, so that the player can clearly recognize the increased number of game balls that can be acquired by the end of the second game state. It is possible to improve the player's expectation on the gaming state.

[Feature αB4]
The gaming machine according to feature αB2 or feature αB3,
The display means sets the payout amount to be displayed at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the payout amount has increased (the timing at which a winning game is won and a game ball enters the V winning opening). The corresponding information is changed to information corresponding to the number of payouts after the increase.

  According to the feature αB4, the information corresponding to the scheduled payout number being displayed is changed at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the planned payout amount has increased. It is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation as to when the information corresponding to the number of payouts currently displayed is changed.

[Feature αB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αB2 to αB3,
The display means corresponds to the planned payout number after increasing the information corresponding to the planned payout number being displayed, with an increase of a predetermined number (500 in the twelfth embodiment) or more as one unit. A gaming machine characterized by changing to information.

  According to the feature αB5, the information corresponding to the number of payouts being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the number of payouts to be increased after the increase of the predetermined number or more is taken as one unit. Expectation can be improved.

[Feature αB6]
A gaming machine according to feature αB4,
When the information corresponding to the number of payouts being displayed is less than or equal to a second predetermined number (0 in the twelfth embodiment), the display means is information corresponding to the number of payouts being displayed. Is changed to information corresponding to the planned number of payouts after increasing the number less than the predetermined number (500).

  According to the feature αB6, when the information corresponding to the number of payouts being displayed is equal to or less than the second predetermined number, the information corresponding to the number of payouts being displayed is increased by a number less than the predetermined number. Since the information is changed to the information corresponding to the later payout number, the information corresponding to the displayed payout number is less than the second predetermined number and less than the predetermined number for a player whose expectation has decreased. Even if the planned number of payouts increases, a great sense of expectation can be given.

[Feature αB7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB6,
In the second gaming state, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant launch intensity and at a constant interval (0.6 second interval), the number of game balls fired (the twelfth embodiment) The number of game balls that enter the entrance part (three in the twelfth embodiment) is fixed.

  According to the characteristic αB7, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant interval with a constant launch intensity, the number of game balls entering the entrance portion occupying the number of game balls that have been launched is Since it is configured to be constant, the number of game balls actually paid out before the end of the second gaming state can be matched with the planned payout number.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
A determination means for executing a determination process (a jackpot lottery) based on the special information;
In the first gaming state (low probability mode), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the twelfth embodiment, the 2R type 1 jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48). In addition, the number of the determination processes executed after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (high probability mode) and the transition to the second gaming state is a prescribed number (in the twelfth embodiment). Transition means for shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when reaching 120 times),
Display means for displaying information (remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment) based on the remaining number of determinations that is the remaining number of times of the determination process that can be executed until the specified number of times is reached;
Increasing means for increasing the remaining number of determinations when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means continues the information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed without changing the information based on the number of remaining determinations after the increase even when the number of remaining determinations is increased. A gaming machine characterized in that it may be displayed.

  According to the feature αC1, even when the remaining number of determinations is increased, information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed is continuously displayed without being changed to information based on the increased number of remaining determinations. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the actual number of remaining determinations may be greater than the number of remaining determinations displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The display means, when the remaining determination count increases, information based on the remaining determination count being displayed at a timing different from the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, Changing to information based on the remaining number of determinations after the increase.

  According to the feature αC2, the information based on the remaining number of determinations being displayed is changed to information based on the number of remaining determinations after the increase at a timing different from the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. Therefore, unexpectedness can be imparted to the game, and a new sense of expectation can be provided to the player, such as at what timing the remaining determination count increases.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
The display means, as information based on the remaining number of determinations, is information corresponding to a planned payout number that is the number of game balls to be paid out before the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number of times (the twelfth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying a remaining acquired ball count suggestion image CP) in the form.

  According to the feature αC3, information corresponding to the scheduled payout number, which is the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out before the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number of times, is displayed, so that the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number of times. Thus, the player can be made aware of the number of game balls that can be acquired by the end of the second gaming state. In addition, since the player can clearly recognize the degree of expectation that the second gaming state can have, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
In the second gaming state, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant launch intensity and at a constant interval (0.6 second interval), the number of game balls fired (the twelfth embodiment) The number of game balls that enter the entrance part (three in the twelfth embodiment) is fixed.

  According to the feature αC4, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant interval with a constant launch intensity, the number of game balls entering the entrance portion occupying the number of game balls fired is Since it is configured to be constant, the number of game balls actually paid out before the end of the second gaming state can be matched with the planned payout number.

  The inventions of the feature S group to the feature Z group and the feature α A group to the feature α C group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production and the like for the purpose of improving the fun of games.

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of games.

  A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature Z group and the feature αA group to the feature αC group are appropriately combined may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the starting entrance part,
A gaming machine comprising acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting entrance section.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. ..Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... weight button 25c ... variable resistor 26 ... game ball launch button 30 ... game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail part 31b ... outer rail part 32 ... General winning port 33 ... First starting port 34 ... Second starting port 34a ... Electrical accessory 34b ... Electric accessory driving unit 35 ... Thru gate 36 ... Variable winning award Equipment 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive part 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... First result display part (first symbol display part)
37b ... second result display section (second symbol display section)
37c ... 1st hold display part 37d ... 2nd hold display part 38 ... Universal figure unit 39 ... Round display part 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Symbol display apparatus 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 48 ... V prize opening 48a ... Opening / closing door 48b ... Opening / closing door drive unit 51 ... First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main side RAM
63a ... Attack table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Variation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Holding information storage area 64c ... Telephone holding area 64d ... Various counter area 64e ... Various flag storage area 64f ... Destination determination processing result Memory area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Discharge control device 71 ... Discharge device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 96 ... RTC
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Display control apparatus 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
PA ... game area PC ... winning counter area AE ... execution area Ra ... first hold area Rb ... second hold area Dm11-Dm14, Dm21-Dm24 ... hold display Sync1 .. .1st synchronization display section Sync2 ... second synchronization display section MA ... main display area SA1 ... first sub display area SA2 ... second sub display area Ds1 ... first hold display area Ds2 ... second hold display area

Claims (4)

In a first gaming state, when a predetermined command is received, a gaming machine comprising specific process execution means for executing a specific process based on the predetermined command,
The specific process executing means includes
In the second gaming state in which the gaming state is different from the first gaming state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The specific process executing means includes
When the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. Machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A gaming machine comprising
The first gaming state is a state in which the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
The second gaming state is a state in which the special information is not stored in the acquired information storage unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
A display means capable of displaying a specific image
The specific process execution means executes a process of ending the display of the specific image displayed by the display means as the specific process when the predetermined command is received. Machine.